Coral IPx 800 Installation Manual PDF

Coral
IPx 800
Installation Procedure
and Hardware Reference
Manual
The flexible way to communicate
The information contained in this document is proprietary and is subject to all relevant
copyright, patent and other laws protecting intellectual property, as well as any specific
agreement protecting TADIRAN TELECOM LTD.'s (herein referred to as the "Manufacturer")
rights in the aforesaid information. Neither this document nor the information contained herein
may be published, reproduced or disclosed to third parties, in whole or in part, without the
express, prior, written permission of the Manufacturer. In addition, any use of this document or
the information contained herein for any purposes other than those for which it was disclosed is
strictly forbidden.
The Manufacturer reserves the right, without prior notice or liability, to make changes in
equipment design or specifications.
Information supplied by the Manufacturer is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no
responsibility is assumed by the Manufacturer for the use thereof nor for the rights of third
parties which may be effected in any way by the use thereof.
Any representation(s) in this document concerning performance of the Manufacturer's
product(s) are for informational purposes only and are not warranties of future performance,
either express or implied. The Manufacturer's standard limited warranty, stated in its sales
contract or order confirmation form, is the only warranty offered by the Manufacturer in
relation thereto.
This document may contain flaws, omissions or typesetting errors; no warranty is granted nor
liability assumed in relation thereto unless specifically undertaken in the Manufacturer's sales
contract or order confirmation. Information contained herein is periodically updated and
changes will be incorporated into subsequent editions. If you have encountered an error, please
notify the Manufacturer. All specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
Copyright by TADIRAN TELECOM LTD., 2005.

All rights reserved worldwide.
The Coral is Protected by U.S. Patents 6,594,255; 6,598,098; 6,608,895; 6,615,404
All trademarks contained herein are the property of their respective holders.
Federal Communications Commission

Rules Part 68 Compliance Statement
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On this equipment is a label that contains,
among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this
equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line.
Excessive REN's on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming
call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN's should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the
number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total REN's contact the
telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is
designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack
which is Part 68 compliant.
This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line
Service is subject to state tariffs.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the
telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right
to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that
could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide
advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted
service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact the supplier at (516)-632-7200 for repair
and/or warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone
company may request you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
The following repairs can be done by the customer: No repairs allowed.
This equipment is hearing-aid compatible.
It is recommended that the customer install an AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. This is to avoid damaging the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
This equipment is capable of providing user's access to interstate providers of operator services through
the use of equal access codes. Modifications by aggregators to alter these capabilities may be a violation
of the telephone operator consumer services improvement act of 1990 and part 68 of the FCC Rules.
Canadian DOT Compliance Statement

NOTICE: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the
equipment meets telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements as
prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The
Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the
facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an
acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipm2.8(1(ent)6.1(

al metallic wape)-5.5(sh)4(ou)4(ld
system, iffpr
be
esent,
coo)4(r)1(din)4(a)-2.8(ted)4(
are connected together. This
b)15(y)-1.4( a rep)4(r)1(ese
precaution may be
important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the
appropriate electric inspection authorit
UL Safety of Information Technology

Equipment Compliance
This equipment has been tested and complied with the following:
USL Compliance
USL indicates Listing to U.S. Standard for Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical
Business Equipment, UL60950, Third Edition.
CNL Compliance
CNL indicates Certification to Canadian Standard for Information Technology Equipment Including
Electrical Business Equipment, CSA C22.2 No.60950-00.
CE Compliance Statement
The Coral system complies with the requirements of the following standards:
EN60950-1
AS/NZS 4117
AS/NZS 60950.1
The Coral system may include a CLASS I laser product.

All laser transmitters integrated within the Coral systems are approved CLASS I laser
units. Coral systems that in
Federal Communications Commission

Part 15
The FCC Wants you to Know
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in
a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
a) Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
b) Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
c) Connect the equipment on an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
d) Consult with the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
To ensure continued compliance with specified radio energy emissions limits of FCC Rules, the
following precautions must be observed while installing and operating the equipment:
1. Install the equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2. Verify that the power supply and associated A.C. powered equipment are connected to a properly
grounded electrical supply, and that power cords, if used, are unmodified.
3. Verify that the system grounding, including Master Ground, D.C. power system, and equipment
cabinets, is in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and connected to an approved earth
ground source.
4. Always replace the factory-supplied cover or keep the cabinet doors closed when not servicing the
equipment.
5. Make no modification to the equipment that would affect its compliance with the specified limits of
FCC Rules.
6. Maintain the equipment in a satisfactory state of repair.
7. Verify that emissions limiting devices, such as ferrite blocks and radio frequency interference modules, are properly installed and functional.
If necessary the operator should consult their supplier, or an experienced radio/television engineer for
additional suggestions. The following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) may be of assistance: "How to Identify and Resolve Radio-TV Interference Problems."
This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402,
Stock No. 004-000-00345-4.
FCC Warning
Modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user authority to operate the
equipment under FCC rules.
Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

Directive 2002/96/EC of the European Parliament
It is the responsibility of the Distributor to fully comply with Directive 2002/96/EC dated 27 January
2003 of the European Parliament and of the Council on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(WEEE) and with any applicable law and regulation promulgated in its respective Member State in
connection with such Directive. Accordingly, the Distributor is responsible for, and shall bear all costs
related to, the collection, treatment, recovery, reporting and environmentally sound disposal of all
electronic waste related to the products. For the purpose of this paragraph, the term "Distributor" shall
mean the person and/or entity engaged in the importation, distribution, sales, support or any other
activity carried out in the applicable jurisdiction in connection with products supplied by Tadiran
Telecom Ltd.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 - Introduction
1.1 Document Description .............................................................................................................. 1-1
Document Contents................................................................................................................ 1-1
Related Documentation .......................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Special Symbols Used in this Document .................................................................................. 1-3
1.3 System Description................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.4 Recommended Tools................................................................................................................ 1-7
Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation Procedure

2.1 Site Inspection .......................................................................................................................... 2-1
Installation Environment ......................................................................................................... 2-1
Space Requirements .............................................................................................................. 2-3
Electrical Requirements ......................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2 Equipment Installation .............................................................................................................. 2-9
Introduction............................................................................................................................. 2-9
Mounting and Installing the Cage........................................................................................... 2-10
Ground Wiring ........................................................................................................................ 2-17
Wiring DC Powered Systems ................................................................................................. 2-22
Wiring AC Powered Systems ................................................................................................. 2-25
Connecting the I/O Cables ..................................................................................................... 2-27
Setting the Configuration Jumpers ......................................................................................... 2-30
Interconnecting the Main and Expansion Cages.................................................................... 2-32
Installing the Power Supply Card ........................................................................................... 2-33
Interconnecting the Power Supply Duplication Cable ............................................................ 2-36
Inserting the Coral Circuit Cards into the Cage...................................................................... 2-37
2.3 Program Interface Device Connection...................................................................................... 2-47
vi
Chapter 3 - Initial Powerup Tests

3.1 Power Supply Test.................................................................................................................... 3-1
General................................................................................................................................... 3-1
PS19 DC Powered System .................................................................................................... 3-2
PS19 DC-D Powered System ................................................................................................ 3-4
AC Powered System .............................................................................................................. 3-6
3.2 Common Control Test............................................................................................................... 3-9
Control Card Initialization ....................................................................................................... 3-9
Memory Lithium Battery Condition Test.................................................................................. 3-17
3.3 Shared Service and Peripheral Card Test ................................................................................ 3-19
Introduction............................................................................................................................. 3-19
System Initialization................................................................................................................ 3-23
PS 19 DC-D Backup Power Supply Check ............................................................................ 3-25
3.4 Installation Wrap-up.................................................................................................................. 3-27
Chapter 4 - Software Installation Procedure

4.1 Generic Feature Software ........................................................................................................ 4-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................. 4-1
Upgrading Using FMprog PC-Utility ....................................................................................... 4-2
Installing an Upgraded IMC8 Card ......................................................................................... 4-3
4.2 System Database Control......................................................................................................... 4-5
Accessing the Database FLASH Menu .................................................................................. 4-5
Saving to IMC8....................................................................................................................... 4-6
Loading (Restoring) from IMC8 .............................................................................................. 4-8
Show File Info......................................................................................................................... 4-10
Automatic Daily Backup ......................................................................................................... 4-11
Erase Flash Memory .............................................................................................................. 4-12
4.3 MEX-IP Status Display Codes .................................................................................................. 4-13
Numeric Status Display .......................................................................................................... 4-13
Chapter 5 - External Connections

5.1 Main Distribution Frame ........................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 External Equipment .................................................................................................................. 5-5
Station Equipment .................................................................................................................. 5-5
Trunk Circuits ......................................................................................................................... 5-9
Auxiliary Connections............................................................................................................. 5-10
5.3 Protection Devices.................................................................................................................... 5-11
Introduction to Primary and Secondary Protection Devices ................................................... 5-11
Surge Arrestor Magazine Mounting........................................................................................ 5-14
5.4 Power Fail (PF) Transfer Circuits ............................................................................................. 5-17
vii
Physical Connection............................................................................................................... 5-17

Database Programming ......................................................................................................... 5-18
5.5 Terminal Data Communication Ports ........................................................................................ 5-21
5.6 I/O Connections Via Front Panel .............................................................................................. 5-25
General................................................................................................................................... 5-25
Connections on the Cage Rear Panel.................................................................................... 5-26
PRI-23, PRI-30 Card .............................................................................................................. 5-27
T1, 30T/x, 30T/E Card............................................................................................................ 5-31
DPC Card (Discontinued)....................................................................................................... 5-35
UGW Card.............................................................................................................................. 5-36
IPG Card ................................................................................................................................ 5-39
5.7 I/O RJ-45 Connections Via Rear Panel .................................................................................... 5-41
Cards with Rear Panel I/O Connections................................................................................. 5-41
PRI-23, PRI-30 Card (Layout UDT C and later)................................................................... 5-43
T1, 30T/x, 30T/E Card (Layout UDT C and later) ................................................................ 5-44
UGW Card (layout B1) and UGW-E ....................................................................................... 5-45
5.8 I/O Connections Via Champ Connectors.................................................................................. 5-49
General................................................................................................................................... 5-49
Card Index: Listed by Function Category ............................................................................... 5-53
Card Index: Listed by Alpha-Numerically Order ..................................................................... 5-55
Chapter 6 - Cage Description

6.1 Cage Description and Installation............................................................................................. 6-3
Cage Structure ....................................................................................................................... 6-3
Cage Front, Top, and Side Panels ......................................................................................... 6-6
Rear Panel ............................................................................................................................. 6-11
DC Power Terminals and Fuse............................................................................................... 6-16
AC Power Cord and Cover..................................................................................................... 6-20
Accessing the Cage Interior ................................................................................................... 6-22
Cage Interior........................................................................................................................... 6-26
Mounting Brackets.................................................................................................................. 6-29
Heat Buffer Bracket ................................................................................................................ 6-30
Cage Labels ........................................................................................................................... 6-35
Dismounting the Cage from the Rack .................................................................................... 6-37
6.2 Coral IPx 800M Main Cage ...................................................................................................... 6-39
Circuit Card Slots ................................................................................................................... 6-39
Backplane Description............................................................................................................ 6-41
Configuration Jumpers ........................................................................................................... 6-42
Connections to Other Cages .................................................................................................. 6-44
6.3 Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage .............................................................................................. 6-45
viii
Circuit Card Slots ................................................................................................................... 6-45

Backplane Description............................................................................................................ 6-47
Configuration Jumpers ........................................................................................................... 6-48
Connections to Other Cages .................................................................................................. 6-51
6.4 System Configuration Options.................................................................................................. 6-53
General Description................................................................................................................ 6-53
Interconnecting Main and Expansion Cages.......................................................................... 6-60
Suggestions for Peripheral Card Distribution ......................................................................... 6-68
Optional Coral IPx 500X Expansion Cage ............................................................................. 6-70
Chapter 7 - Power Supplies

7.1 PS19 DC................................................................................................................................... 7-1
Circuit Description .................................................................................................................. 7-5
Ringer Frequency Adjustment................................................................................................ 7-8
Installation .............................................................................................................................. 7-9
Ringer Database Programming .............................................................................................. 7-11
Troubleshooting (PS19 DC) ................................................................................................... 7-12
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 7-15
7.2 PS19 DC-D............................................................................................................................... 7-17
Installation .............................................................................................................................. 7-26
Troubleshooting (PS19 DC-D)................................................................................................ 7-33
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 7-37
7.3 PS19 AC................................................................................................................................... 7-39
Installation .............................................................................................................................. 7-46
Troubleshooting (PS19 AC).................................................................................................... 7-49
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 7-52
ix
Chapter 8 - Common Control Cards

8.1 Common Control Cards............................................................................................................ 8-1
General Information................................................................................................................ 8-1
Card Handling Procedures ..................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2 MEX-IP Card ............................................................................................................................ 8-5
Software Authorization Management ..................................................................................... 8-8
Front Panel Features.............................................................................................................. 8-10
IMC8 Card .............................................................................................................................. 8-11
KB0 RS-232E Programing Port.............................................................................................. 8-13
DBX Memory Card Installation ............................................................................................... 8-14
CLA Card Installation ............................................................................................................. 8-14
MEX-IP Card Installation ........................................................................................................ 8-15
Removal of DBX/CLA Card .................................................................................................... 8-16
Lithium Battery Condition Testing........................................................................................... 8-17
MEX-IP Status Display Codes................................................................................................ 8-19
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 8-21
8.3 IMC8 Cartridge ......................................................................................................................... 8-23
IMC8 Installation..................................................................................................................... 8-25
IMC8 Removal........................................................................................................................ 8-26
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 8-28
8.4 DBX Module ............................................................................................................................. 8-29
DBX General Information ....................................................................................................... 8-29
DBX Installation...................................................................................................................... 8-32
DBX Removal (As Required................................................................................................... 8-34
Lithium Battery Condition Testing........................................................................................... 8-34
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 8-36
8.5 CLA Module.............................................................................................................................. 8-37
CLA Installation ...................................................................................................................... 8-41
Network Connections (RJ-45) ................................................................................................ 8-45
Database Programming Areas ............................................................................................... 8-45
CLA Maintenance................................................................................................................... 8-46
Applications ............................................................................................................................ 8-48
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 8-50
8.6 HDC Card ................................................................................................................................. 8-51
Tone PROM............................................................................................................................ 8-55
HDC Card Installation............................................................................................................. 8-56
8.7 PX Card .................................................................................................................................... 8-59
PX Card Installation................................................................................................................ 8-60
List of Figures
Figure 2-1: Space Requirements............................................................................................................................. 2-4
Figure 2-2: Removing the Locking Bar .................................................................................................................... 2-12
Figure 2-3: Preparing the Right Side of the Cage for 23" Rack Assembly .............................................................. 2-13
Figure 2-4: Left Side View of Coral IPx Cage Mounted onto 19" Rack ................................................................... 2-15
Figure 2-5: Left Side View of Coral IPx Cage Mounted onto 23" Rack ................................................................... 2-15
Figure 2-6: Installing the Heat Buffer Bracket.......................................................................................................... 2-16
Figure 2-7: Coral IPx 800 Cage Ground Wiring....................................................................................................... 2-18
Figure 2-8: Master Ground Unit ............................................................................................................................... 2-19
Figure 2-9: Ground Connection for System Including Customer Supplied MDF ..................................................... 2-20
Figure 2-10: Ground Connection for Coral IPx 800System with More than One Cage Including MDF Units.......... 2-21
Figure 2-11: DC Power Terminal Interconnection ................................................................................................... 2-22
Figure 2-12: Coral IPx 800 Power Wiring for One Cage.......................................................................................... 2-23
Figure 2-13: Coral IPx 800 Power Wiring for One Rack .......................................................................................... 2-24
Figure 2-14: Coral IPx 800 Cage Rear Panel .......................................................................................................... 2-25
Figure 2-15: Coral IPx 800 Power Connection for AC Systems .............................................................................. 2-26
Figure 2-16: Coral IPx 800 Card Slot Position to I/O Cable Pair Relationship ........................................................ 2-28
Figure 2-17: ESD Wrist Strap Connection on the Coral IPx 800 Cage.................................................................... 2-30
Figure 2-18: PS19 Front Panel ................................................................................................................................ 2-35
Figure 2-19: Coral IPx 800M Main Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram .................................................... 2-42
Figure 2-20: Coral IPx 800X 1st Exp. Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram................................................ 2-43
Figure 2-21: Coral IPx 800X 2nd Exp. Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram .............................................. 2-44
Figure 2-22: Coral IPx 500X 1st Exp. Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram................................................ 2-45
Figure 2-23: Coral IPx 500X 2nd Exp. Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram .............................................. 2-46
Figure 2-24: 25-Pin Program Interface Device Connections to KBO....................................................................... 2-48
Figure 2-25: 9-Pin Program Interface Device Connections to KBO......................................................................... 2-48
Figure 3-1: Internal View of the Coral IPx 800 Cage............................................................................................. 3-8
Figure 3-2: MEX-IP Memory Interface Connector Locations ................................................................................... 3-14
Figure 3-3: MEX-IP Front Panel .............................................................................................................................. 3-15
xi
Figure 3-4: CLA and DBX Baby Card Layouts ........................................................................................................ 3-16
Figure 5-1: MDF Connections.................................................................................................................................. 5-3
Figure 5-2: Coral IPx Reversing Cross-Connect Detail ........................................................................................... 5-4
Figure 5-3: Modular Wired Station Jack Wiring Diagram......................................................................................... 5-7
Figure 5-4: Typical Trunk Circuit Wiring Diagram.................................................................................................... 5-9
Figure 5-5: Magazine 10 Surge Arrestor and Voltage Protectors............................................................................ 5-14
Figure 5-6: Connecting Surge arrestor to MDF ....................................................................................................... 5-15
Figure 5-7: Power Fail Wiring To Single-Line (500/2500) Telephone Set ............................................................... 5-19
Figure 5-8: Power Fail Wiring To EKT-PF Set (Discontinued)................................................................................. 5-20
Figure 5-9: Coral FlexSet APA/APDL RS-232E Cable Connections ....................................................................... 5-22
Figure 5-10: FlexSet 80 or GKT RS-232E (v.24) Pin Functions .............................................................................. 5-23
Figure 5-11: PRI-23, PRI-30 (layout A&B) DA-15S Interface Connector PIN Assignment...................................... 5-27
Figure 5-12: PRI-23, PRI-30 (layout UDT) RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment......................................... 5-28
Figure 5-13: PRI-23, PRI-30 (layout UDT) DA-15S Interface Connector PIN Assignment...................................... 5-29
Figure 5-14: PRI-23, PRI-30 (layout UDT) DA-15S to LTU/CSU Connection Cable ............................................... 5-29
Figure 5-15: PRI-23, PRI-30 (layout UDT) Interface Connections to the PSTN/LTU/CSU...................................... 5-30
Figure 5-16: T1, 30T (layout A&B) RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment..................................................... 5-31
Figure 5-17: T1, 30T (layout UDT) RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment..................................................... 5-32
Figure 5-18: T1, 30T (layout UDT) DA-15S Interface Connector PIN Assignment.................................................. 5-33
Figure 5-19: T1, 30T (layout UDT) DA-15S to LTU/CSU Connection Cable ........................................................... 5-33
Figure 5-20: T1, 30T/x, 30T/E (layout UDT) Interface Connections to the PSTN/LTU/CSU ................................... 5-34
Figure 5-21: DPC TO:CO & TO:CORAL Connector Pin Assignments .................................................................... 5-35
Figure 5-22: UGW Card........................................................................................................................................... 5-36
Figure 5-23: UGW Network Interface Connector PIN Assignment .......................................................................... 5-37
Figure 5-24: UGW Card Connection to the LAN/WAN ............................................................................................ 5-38
Figure 5-25: IPG Network Interface Connector PIN Assignment............................................................................. 5-39
Figure 5-26: IPG Card Connection to the LAN/WAN............................................................................................... 5-40
Figure 5-27: Coral IPx 8003000 Back Panel and RJ-45 Rear Connectors.............................................................. 5-42
Figure 5-28: PRI-23, PRI-30 (layout UDT C) Rear Panel RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment to the PSTN/LTU/
CSU ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-43
xii
Figure 5-29: T1, 30T (layout UDT C) Rear RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment to PSTN/LTU/CSU....... 5-44
Figure 5-30: UGW Card........................................................................................................................................... 5-46
Figure 5-31: UGW Rear Panel RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment to the LAN/WAN ............................... 5-47
Figure 6-1: Coral IPx 800 Cage with Door Closed................................................................................................... 6-4
Figure 6-2: Coral IPx 800 Cage with Door Opened ................................................................................................. 6-4
Figure 6-3: Coral IPx 800 System with Three Cages .............................................................................................. 6-5
Figure 6-4: Front, Left, Right, and Top Views of Coral IPx 800 Cage ..................................................................... 6-7
Figure 6-5: Left and Right Panels of the Cage ........................................................................................................ 6-8
Figure 6-6: Top Panel of Cage Clear of Objects...................................................................................................... 6-9
Figure 6-7: Front View of Cage Door....................................................................................................................... 6-10
Figure 6-8: Cage Including Components Relevant to the Door ............................................................................... 6-10
Figure 6-9: Coral IPx 800M Rear Panel................................................................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-10: Coral IPx 800X Rear Panel ................................................................................................................. 6-11
Figure 6-11: Coral IPx 800 Connection Pair Allocation ........................................................................................... 6-14
Figure 6-12: Coral IPx 800 Connection Layout for 66 Type Punch Blocks.............................................................. 6-14
Figure 6-13: DC Power Cover Closure Requirement for both AC and DC Powered Coral IPx 800 Systems ......... 6-15
Figure 6-14: Coral IPx 800 DC Power Cover........................................................................................................... 6-15
Figure 6-15: DC Cover Removal ............................................................................................................................. 6-16
Figure 6-16: DC Cover Installation .......................................................................................................................... 6-17
Figure 6-17: Rear Panel of Coral IPx 800 Cage with DC Power Cover Removed .................................................. 6-18
Figure 6-18: Coral IPx 800 DC Power Terminals .................................................................................................... 6-18
Figure 6-19: AC Power Cord Disassembly .............................................................................................................. 6-20
Figure 6-20: AC Power Cord Assembly................................................................................................................... 6-21
Figure 6-21: Opening the Door ................................................................................................................................ 6-22
Figure 6-22: Closing the Door.................................................................................................................................. 6-23
Figure 6-23: Removing the Door ............................................................................................................................. 6-24
Figure 6-24: Assembling the Door ........................................................................................................................... 6-25
Figure 6-25: Coral IPx 800 Cage Interior................................................................................................................ 6-26
Figure 6-26: Coral IPx 800M Backplane.................................................................................................................. 6-28
Figure 6-27: Coral IPx 800X Backplane .................................................................................................................. 6-28
xiii
Figure 6-28: Cable Routing from the Front of the Cage .......................................................................................... 6-28
Figure 6-29: Cage Mounted onto 19 Rack ............................................................................................................. 6-29
Figure 6-30: Cage Mounted onto 23 Rack ............................................................................................................. 6-29
Figure 6-31: Coral IPx 800 Cage Ventilation Flow................................................................................................... 6-30
Figure 6-32: Coral IPx 800 Cage with Heat Buffer Bracket Installed Directly Above............................................... 6-31
Figure 6-33: Coral IPx 800 Cage Mounted Beneath another Coral IPx 800 Cage .................................................. 6-32
Figure 6-34: Coral IPx 800 Cage Mounted Beneath a Customer Supplied Cage ................................................... 6-33
Figure 6-35: Left View of Coral IPx 800 Cage Mounted at Top of Rack.................................................................. 6-34
Figure 6-36: Labels on Rear Panel.......................................................................................................................... 6-36
Figure 6-37: Labels Inside Cage and Door.............................................................................................................. 6-36
Figure 6-38: Coral IPx 800M Card Cage (Front View)............................................................................................. 6-40
Figure 6-39: Coral IPx 800M Backplane.................................................................................................................. 6-41
Figure 6-40: Coral IPx 800M Jumper Configuration for Synchronization Slots (J29) .............................................. 6-43
Figure 6-41: Coral IPx 800M Rear Panel Connections to other Cages ................................................................... 6-44
Figure 6-42: Coral IPx 800X Card Cage (Front View) ............................................................................................. 6-46
Figure 6-43: Coral IPx 800X Backplane .................................................................................................................. 6-47
Figure 6-44: Coral IPx 800X Jumper Configuration for Shelf Designation (J38) ..................................................... 6-49
Figure 6-45: Coral IPx 800X Jumper Configuration for Primary and Secondary Synchronization Slots (J37) ........ 6-50
Figure 6-46: Coral IPx 800X Rear Panel Connections to other Cages.................................................................... 6-51
Figure 6-47: System with One Cage (IPx 800M) ..................................................................................................... 6-55
Figure 6-48: System with Two Cages (IPx 800M and IPx 800X)............................................................................. 6-55
Figure 6-49: System with Three Cages (IPx 800M and Two IPx 800X Cages)....................................................... 6-56
Figure 6-50: System with Two Cages (IPx 800M and IPx 500X)............................................................................. 6-57
Figure 6-51: System with Three Cages (IPx 800M, IPx 500X, and IPx 800X) ........................................................ 6-58
Figure 6-52: System with Three Cages (IP x800M and Two IPx 500X Cages)....................................................... 6-59
Figure 6-53: H719 Cable Connection between Two IPx 800 Cages with PS19 DC-D Power Supply..................... 6-62
Figure 6-54: Connection between Two IPx 800 Cages (IPx 800M and 800X) ........................................................ 6-63
Figure 6-55: Connection between Three IPx 800 Cages (IPx 800M and two 800X) ............................................... 6-64
Figure 6-56: Connection between Two Cages (IPx 800M and 500X) ..................................................................... 6-65
Figure 6-57: Connection between Three Cages (IPx 800M, 500X and 800X) ........................................................ 6-66
xiv
Figure 6-58: Connection between Three Cages (IPx 800M and two 500X) ............................................................ 6-67
Figure 6-59: Coral IPx 800, PCM Highway Distribution........................................................................................... 6-69
Figure 7-1: PS19 DC Front Panel Layout ................................................................................................................ 7-2
Figure 7-2: PS19 DC Card Layout........................................................................................................................... 7-4
Figure 7-3: PS19 DC Block Diagram ....................................................................................................................... 7-7
Figure 7-4: PS19 DC-D Front Panel ........................................................................................................................ 7-19
Figure 7-5: PS19 DC-D Card Layout ....................................................................................................................... 7-21
Figure 7-6: PS19 DC-D Block Diagram ................................................................................................................... 7-24
Figure 7-7: PS19 DC-D Economical Mode Cabling................................................................................................. 7-29
Figure 7-8: PS19 DC-D Redundancy Cabling ......................................................................................................... 7-30
Figure 7-9: PS19 DC-D Double Power (No Cable).................................................................................................. 7-31
Figure 7-10: PS19 AC Front Panel .......................................................................................................................... 7-40
Figure 7-11: PS19 AC Circuit Board........................................................................................................................ 7-42
Figure 7-12: PS19 AC Block Diagram ..................................................................................................................... 7-44
Figure 8-1: MEX-IP Card ......................................................................................................................................... 8-6
Figure 8-2: Software Authorization Unit (SAU) Detail.............................................................................................. 8-8
Figure 8-3: MEX-IP Front Panel .............................................................................................................................. 8-12
Figure 8-4: KB0 Pin Assignment.............................................................................................................................. 8-13
Figure 8-5: MEX-IP Card Layout ............................................................................................................................. 8-18
Figure 8-6: IMC8 Flash Memory Card - Right side and Write Protect Knob............................................................ 8-23
Figure 8-7: IMC8 Flash Memory Card - Left side with Authorized Feature List....................................................... 8-24
Figure 8-8: IMC8 Card Position on MEX-IP Card .................................................................................................... 8-27
Figure 8-9: DBX Card Layout .................................................................................................................................. 8-29
Figure 8-10: DBX Positions On MEX-IP Card ......................................................................................................... 8-35
Figure 8-11: CLA 486 Card ..................................................................................................................................... 8-38
Figure 8-12: F-CLA 686 Card .................................................................................................................................. 8-38
Figure 8-13: CLA 486 Card - Functional Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 8-40
Figure 8-14: F-CLA 686 Card - Functional Block Diagram ...................................................................................... 8-40
Figure 8-15: MEX-IP Spacers for CLA and DBX ..................................................................................................... 8-42
Figure 8-16: MEX-IP Memory Interface J-bus Connector Locations ....................................................................... 8-43
xv
Figure 8-17: CLA Card Installation .......................................................................................................................... 8-44

Figure 8-18: CoraLINK Application Telephony Server............................................................................................. 8-49
Figure 8-19: Coral IPx 800, HDC and Peripheral Cards.......................................................................................... 8-51
Figure 8-20: HDC Circuit Block Diagram ................................................................................................................. 8-52
Figure 8-21: Coral IPx 800, PCM Highway Distribution........................................................................................... 8-54
Figure 8-22: HDC Card Layout and Front Panel ..................................................................................................... 8-57
Figure 8-23: PX Buffer Card Block Diagram............................................................................................................ 8-59
xvi
List of Tables
Coral IPx 800 Cage Dimensions.............................................................................................................................. 2-3
Coral IPx 800 Cage Weights ................................................................................................................................... 2-3
Coral IPx 800 Cage Space Requirements............................................................................................................... 2-3
Coral IPx 800 Maximum Current ............................................................................................................................. 2-6
Contents of Coral IPx 800M Shipping Container ..................................................................................................... 2-11
Contents of Coral IPx 800X Shipping Container...................................................................................................... 2-11
Coral IPx 800 I/O Champ Connector to Card Slot Relationships ............................................................................ 2-28
Jumpers in the IPx 800M Main Cage....................................................................................................................... 2-31
Jumpers in the 800X Expansion Cage .................................................................................................................... 2-31
Shared Service and Peripheral Interface Card Types ............................................................................................. 2-41
Card Slot Status Messages ..................................................................................................................................... 3-22
MEX-IP Status Display Code................................................................................................................................... 4-14
Station Interface Wire Pair Requirements ............................................................................................................... 5-6
Telephone Circuit Primary Lightning / Surge Arrestor Device Specifications .......................................................... 5-12
Telephone Circuit Secondary Protection Device Specifications .............................................................................. 5-13
Coral FlexSet APA/APDL RS-232E Interface Pin Functions ................................................................................... 5-22
DKT2000 with APA/APDL RS-232E (V.24) Interface Module Pin Functions........................................................... 5-23
PRI-23, PRI-30 (layout A&B) Network Interface Connections ................................................................................. 5-27
PRI-23, PRI-30 (layout UDT) Network Interface Connections................................................................................. 5-28
T1, 30T (layout A&B) Network Interface Connections ............................................................................................. 5-31
T1, 30T (layout UDT) Network Interface Connections............................................................................................. 5-32
DA-15S D-Type connector for DPC card................................................................................................................. 5-35
UGW Network Interface Connections...................................................................................................................... 5-37
IPG Interface Connections ...................................................................................................................................... 5-39
PRI-23, PRI-30 (layout UDT C) Rear Panel RJ-45 Network Interface Connections ............................................. 5-43
T1, 30T (layout UDT C) Rear Panel RJ-45 Network Interface Connections ......................................................... 5-44
UGW Rear Panel RJ-45 Network Interface Connections ........................................................................................ 5-47
Connector - to - Peripheral Card tables ................................................................................................................... 5-51
xvii
Peripheral Card - to - Connector tables ................................................................................................................... 5-52

Possible Terminal/Card combinations ..................................................................................................................... 5-53
4TBR, 8TBR, 4TBRP, 8TBRP cards ....................................................................................................................... 5-57
I/O Connections: 4TBR, 8TBR, 4TBRP, 8TBRP cards............................................................................................ 5-58
I/O Connections: 4T-C, 4T-CID, 4T, 4TMR, 4TPF, 4TMR-PF (/S) (12/16) (PF) <G> <ES> cards .......................... 5-59
I/O Connections: 4T-C, 4T-CID, 4T, 4TMR, 4TPF, 4TMR-PF (/S) (12/16) (PF) <G> <ES> cards .......................... 5-60
I/O Connections: 8T-C, 8T-CID, 8T, 8TPF, 8T/S, 8T/S-PF (/S) (PF) <G> <ES> cards........................................... 5-61
I/O Connections: 8T-C, 8T-CID, 8T, 8TPF, 8T/S, 8T/S-PF (/S) (PF) <G> <ES> cards........................................... 5-62
I/O Connections: 4ALS, 4ALS/M cards.................................................................................................................... 5-63
I/O Connections: 4ALS, 4ALS/M cards.................................................................................................................... 5-64
8ALS, 8ALS/M cards ............................................................................................................................................... 5-65
8ALS, 8ALS/M cards ............................................................................................................................................... 5-66
8DID, 8DID/S, 8DID/S-Z cards ................................................................................................................................ 5-67
8DID, 8DID/S, 8DID/S-Z cards ................................................................................................................................ 5-68
8BID cards ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-69
8BID cards ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-70
4GID, 4TWL cards ................................................................................................................................................... 5-71
4GID cards .............................................................................................................................................................. 5-72
4TEM, 4TEM/S, 4TEMP cards ................................................................................................................................ 5-73
4TEM, 4TEM/S, 4TEMP cards ................................................................................................................................ 5-74
2SK cards ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-75
2SK cards ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-76
4SK, 8SK cards ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-77
4SK, 8SK cards ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-78
2SD, 8SD cards ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-79
2SD, 8SD cards ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-80
8SKD, 16SKD cards ................................................................................................................................................ 5-81
8SKD, 16SKD cards ................................................................................................................................................ 5-82
8SVD cards ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-83
8SVD cards ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-84
xviii
8SFT, 16SFT, 24SFT, 8SDT, 16SDT, 24SDT cards ............................................................................................... 5-85

8SFT, 16SFT, 24SFT, 8SDT, 16SDT, 24SDT cards ............................................................................................... 5-86
4S/SH, 4SH/S(-LL) cards......................................................................................................................................... 5-87
4S/SH, 4SH/S(-LL) cards......................................................................................................................................... 5-88
8SLS, 8S, 8S/SH, 8SH/S(-LL) cards ....................................................................................................................... 5-89
8SLS, 8S, 8S/SH(-LL), 8SH/S cards ....................................................................................................................... 5-90
16SLS, 16SH/S(-LL), 16S, 16SH, 16S/SH cards .................................................................................................... 5-91
16SLS, 16SH/S(-LL), 16S, 16SH, 16S/SH cards .................................................................................................... 5-92
16SLS, 24SLS cards ............................................................................................................................................... 5-93
16SLS, 24SLS cards ............................................................................................................................................... 5-94
8SM cards ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-95
8SM cards ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-96
8DRCF, 8DRCM cards ............................................................................................................................................ 5-97
8DRCF, 8DRCM cards ............................................................................................................................................ 5-98
RMI, ASU cards ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-99
RMI, ASU cards ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-100
SKW/x cards (Issue 4 and later) .............................................................................................................................. 5-101
SKW/x cards (Issue 4 and later) .............................................................................................................................. 5-102
8SKK card for Wireless FlexAIR (Radio Base Station)............................................................................................ 5-103
8SKK card for Wireless FlexAIR (Radio Base Station)............................................................................................ 5-104
16SKK card for Wireless FlexAIR (Radio Base Station).......................................................................................... 5-105
16SKK card for Wireless FlexAIR (Radio Base Station).......................................................................................... 5-106
Coral IPx 800M Card Slot Configuration for Main Cage .......................................................................................... 6-39
Coral IPx 800MConfiguration Jumpers.................................................................................................................... 6-42
Coral IPx 800X Card Slot Configuration for the Expansion Cage............................................................................ 6-45
Coral IPx 800X Jumper Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 6-48
Coral IPx 800 System Configuration Options .......................................................................................................... 6-53
Number of Universal I/O Slots per System Configuration........................................................................................ 6-54
Coral IPx 800 System Expansion Options............................................................................................................... 6-60
Time Slot Distribution in Coral IPx 800 .................................................................................................................... 6-68
xix
MEX-IP Control Card Functions .............................................................................................................................. 8-10

KB0 RS-232E Interface Pin Functions..................................................................................................................... 8-13
MEX-IP Status Display Codes ................................................................................................................................. 8-20
CLA-ATS Interface Connections (DTE) ................................................................................................................... 8-45
RS-232 Pin Connections ......................................................................................................................................... 8-46
Debugging Functions via COM1.............................................................................................................................. 8-47
xx
Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1 Document Description .........................................1-1
Cor
Coral
1.2 Special Symbols Used in this Document.............1-3

1.3 System Description .............................................1-5
1.3 Recommended Tools...........................................1-7
Coral IPx 800 Installation Manual
Document Description
1.1
0
Document Contents
The Coral IPx 800 Installation Guide and Hardware Reference Manual, is designed for field
use by Coral system installation and service personnel. It describes the installation of
the Coral IPx 800 system.
The manual is divided into two primary parts:
a systematic installation procedure
a complete hardware reference
Installation Procedure Guide

Chapters 2, 3, 4, and 5 include all installation procedures. These chapters listed below,
outline the step-by-step process of performing a complete, new Coral IPx 800 and 3000
system installation. Peripheral devices can be installed at any time after system
installation. For peripheral device installation, refer to The Coral Terminal Equipment
Installation Manual.
Chapter 2
Hardware Installation Procedure
Chapter 3
Initial Power-Up Tests
Chapter 4
Software Installation Procedure
Chapter 5
External Connections
The Hardware Reference is described in Chapters 6 through 8. These chapters offer

detailed technical information about Coral system hardware, including cabinet
specifications, internal power supplies, and interface circuit operation:
Chapter 6
Cabinet Descriptions
Chapter 7
Power Supply Descriptions
Chapter 8
Control Card Descriptions
Hardware Reference
Introduction
1-1
Related Documentation
For further information not in the scope of this manual about Coral Service cards,
Coral Peripheral cards, voice terminals, VoIP devices, etc., consult the following
Item
Subject
Manual
Coral systems
General description and

specifications for marketing
Coral IPx and FlexiCom Product Description
All FlexSet types
Description
Coral IPx and FlexiCom Product Description
Coral Database
Programming
1) PI - Program Interface and Database

Reference Manual
2) CVA -CoralVIEW Administrator User
Manual
3) CVD -CoralVIEW Designer Guide
Backup
1) PI - Program Interface and Database

Reference Manual, Chapter 21
2) Database Binary Backup PC Utility
Coral Software
Installation and Upgrade
FMprog PC-Utility Reference Manual
Coral FlexAIR (Wireless)
Descriptions and
Coral FlexAIR (Wireless Systems) Installation

Manual
IP device (VoIP)
UGW card, FlexSet-IP
280S, Coral Teleport,
FlexIP SoftPhone
Installation
Coral VoIP Installation Manual
IPG card
Descriptions and
VoIP Gateway (IPG) card Installation Manual
IPx 500X Expansion

Cages for IPx 800M
Descriptions and
Peripheral cards
Descriptions and
Coral Service and Peripheral Cards

Installation Manual
Peripheral devices
Installation and
Troubleshooting
Coral Terminal Equipment Installation Manual
Shared Service cards
Descriptions and
Coral Service and Peripheral Cards

Installation Manual
documentation.
1-2
Special Symbols Used in this Document
1.2
This manual includes information that requires special attention, or is distinguished

from the main texts in some significant way. These are indicated by the use of symbols
and text formatting. This is illustrated in the following examples:
There is a risk of danger to life or personal injury.
There is a risk of damage to the Coral System.
Points out a special procedure or a definition that is relevant but not central to
the text.
Tip:
Advice that makes it easier to follow the steps of a procedure.
Items marked {14.5x} denote that this field or feature is applicable to Coral software
version 14.50 and later only.
NOTES:
Indicates important information demanding special attention.
This page is intentionally left blank. It may be used for the reader's notes.
Introduction
1-3
NOTES:
1-4
System Description
Coral System General Features

The Coral 800 is a digital communications switching system, available in a variety of
configurations that share a common architecture. The Coral system is based on Pulse
Coded Modulation (PCM) switching technology. The active circuitry of the system is
contained on removable printed circuit assemblies or cards, nearly all of which may be
used in any system in the family.
The active circuitry of the Coral 800 system is divided into two major categories:
common control and peripheral circuitry. The common control circuitry directs call
traffic through the system, establishing audio connections between peripheral ports.
The peripheral circuitry provides the hardware necessary to establish those
connections. Instructions from the common control circuitry to the peripheral circuitry,
and status information from the peripheral circuitry to the common control circuitry
are passed through the group controller. The group controller provides driver and time
slot interchange functions for the PCM highways and the HDLC channels.
The peripheral circuitry is further divided into Shared Service and Peripheral Interface
functions. The shared service circuitry provides the equipment necessary to establish
calls between Peripheral interfaces. The Peripheral Interface circuitry provides
standardized electrical connections to external telephone station equipment and
network facilities.
Coral System Configurations

The major distinction between different Coral system configurations is their number of
card slots, into which Shared Service and Peripheral Interface cards may be inserted.
to 30 universal card slots or 3 cages. The Coral IPx 800 cage operates from a standard
100-240VAC 47-63Hz power source, or from a 48 volt direct current (DC) stationary
battery.
The Coral IPx 3000 system has the same rack-mounted design as the Coral IPx 800, but
includes more cage options, including up to 178 universal card slots or 16 cages. The
Coral IPx 3000 offers the option of operating from either 100-240VAC 47-63Hz, or from
a 48 volt direct current (DC) stationary battery plant for increased service reliability.
Introduction
1-5
System Description
The Coral IPx 800 system is a highly cost-effective rack-mounted design, including up
1.3
The Coral IPx 4000 system is a hot-standby dual control system a complete and
powerful unit that functions without interrupting telephony service and a natural
development of the Coral IPx 3000 configurations. The Coral IPx 4000 meets the
demands of critical applications through its redundant common control system and
fail-safe backup operations, including redundant power supplies. These features are of
the utmost importance to systems considered mission-critical.
The Coral wireless FlexAIR system allows portable handsets to be incorporated in the
System Description
Coral system.
1-6
Recommended Tools
In order to properly install and maintain a Coral system, the installation and service
technician must be equipped with many common tools, as well as several tools which
are specialized for the telecommunications industry. In addition, there are many tools
which, although not required to install or maintain a Coral system, are nevertheless
valuable in assisting personnel in the performance of their duties.
The manufacturer recommends that the installation or service personnel have the
following list of tools, as a minimum, at their immediate disposal for any Coral
installation site.
Required Tools:
3/
#1 and #2 Phillips screwdriver
Diagonal wire cutters
Long-nosed pliers
Electrician's pliers
Slip-joint pliers
Standard crimping tool
Adjustable wrench
Socket wrench set
Telephone cable cutters
Telephone cable insulation strippers
16 foot (5m) measuring tape
Punch tool matching all telephone cable terminal blocks used at the installation
1/
4",
and 5/16" straight-blade screwdriver
site
Digital multimeter (DMM)
Telephone line test set capable of pulse and DTMF dialing
Portable (laptop) personal computer capable of emulating an asynchronous ASCII
Recommended Tools
16",
data terminal and approved by the manufacturer to run the binary database save
and restore utility, portable asynchronous ASCII data terminal, or permanently
installed on-site personal computer or ASCII data terminal
Introduction
1-7
1.4
Optional Tools:
Modular line polarity tester
Flashlight
Tone/continuity/talk battery generator
Tone detector/amplifier probe
Telephone line test set with MF tone signaling capability
Alligator clip leads
AMPTM CHAMPTM installation tool
Soldering iron and high quality, rosin-core solder
3/
Analog line transmission analyzer
Portable DS1/E1 analyzer, bit error rate tester, and channel demultiplexer
1/
cable staple gun
Recommended Tools
16and
1-8
Chapter 2
Hardware Installation
Procedure
2.1 Site Inspection .....................................................2-1
Cor
Coral
2.2 Equipment Installation .........................................2-9

2.3 Program Interface Device Connection.............. 2-47
2.1
Site Inspection
Installation Environment
The Coral IPx 800 system should be installed in restricted access areas (dedicated
equipment rooms, equipment closets, or the like) in accordance with articles 110-16,
110-17, and 110-18 of the national electric code, ANSI/NFPA 70.
Access to the system should be limited and controlled to prevent unauthorized
tampering. The system uses hazardous working voltages and extremely high short
circuit currents, and the area must be protected against damage by, and injury to,
unqualified personnel.
Due to these considerations, an installation area must be chosen in accordance with the
following guidelines:
1.
Verify that the installation area is clean, dry, and protected from weather extremes.
2.
Verify that the floor of the installation area is finished with linoleum, vinyl,
ceramic, wooden flooring, or polished sealed concrete. Carpeting is not acceptable.
3.
Verify that the ceiling of the installation area is finished or treated to prevent
particle discharge.
4.
Verify that the installation area is well lit, and that the light source is uniformly
diffused without shadows. Adequate lighting should provide a comfortable
reading level and allow the identification of wire insulator colors without undue
eye fatigue.
Lighting should be comparable to an office work environment, with a minimum
level of 70 foot-candles at each work surface. As a general rule, in a room with an
eight foot (2.5m) ceiling, one 48 inch fluorescent tube provides sufficient
Verify that ventilation of the installation area is capable of maintaining an ambient
temperature of 32-104F (0-40C), and a relative humidity of 20-80%
non-condensing, considering the system nominal heat dissipation 700 BTU/hr.
(These figures are for each cage only, and do not take into account heat generated
by other equipment.)
6.
Verify that the installation area is free of caustic or corrosive liquids, substances, or
materials. If batteries will be installed as part of the system, ensure that adequate
2-1
5.
Site Inspection
illumination for 20-25 sq. ft. (1.9-2.4m2).
precautions are taken (such as special ventilation) to prevent corrosive emissions

from the batteries. Check local building codes for additional requirements.
7.
Verify that the installation area is located no closer than 20 feet (6.1m) from electric
devices that produce large electro-magnetic fields or high levels of radio frequency
energy. Possible EMF sources are radio transmitters, electric arc welding machines,
copying machines, electric motors, refrigeration units, power transformers, electric
load centers, and main circuit breaker panels.
8.
Verify that the installation area provides reasonable security to the system. Room
construction should include solid, reinforced walls and a locking door.
The Coral system, and the service it provides to users, represents a substantial
investment. During an emergency, reliable service may be crucial in protecting
lives and property. Access to the system should be limited and controlled to
prevent unauthorized tampering. The system uses hazardous working voltages
and extremely high short circuit currents. The area must be protected against
Site Inspection
damage by, and injury to, unqualified personnel.
2-2
Space Requirements
This section describes the Coral IPx 800 space requirements.
1.
Verify that there is sufficient space for the Coral IPx 800 system components. Table
2-1 lists the cabinet dimensions for the cages. Table 2-2 lists the cage weights. Table
2-3 and Figure 2-1 illustrate the space requirements for Coral systems.
2.
Determine the position of cages on the rack according to system configuration (see
page 6-53, System Configuration Options), function, and the length of the cables
interconnecting the cages. Observe any order previously directed by a system
designer.
Inches
Centimeters (cm)
Width
19
48
Depth
13
33
Height - 9U
16
40
1.75
4.5
Pounds
Kilograms
Empty
30
14
Fully Assembled
50
23
Inches
Centimeters (cm)
Front
36
100
Rear
36
100
Top - 2U
3.5
Heat Bracket Height - 1U
Table 2-2
Coral IPx 800
Cage Weights
Table 2-3
Coral IPx 800
Cage Space
Requirements
Weight
Space Required in:
Site Inspection
Dimension
Table 2-1
Coral IPx 800
Cage Dimensions
2-3
Figure 2-1 Space

Requirements
36"
(100cm)
Minimum required
clear floor space
36"
(100cm)
Minimum required
clear floor space
3.
Verify that there is sufficient space for the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) in
addition to the space required by the rack. The MDF should be located
immediately adjacent to the Coral IPx 8003000 rack. The bottom of the MDF must
be no lower than 2 feet (61cm) and the top must be no higher than 6 feet (1.9m)
from the floor. The floor space in front of the MDF must be clear for a minimum
of 3 feet (1 m) due to the variety of cable termination hardware at the MDF.
4.
Verify that there is sufficient space for any additional equipment related to the
Coral system, such as Program Interface terminal or personal computer, voice mail
Site Inspection
system, external public address system etc.

5.
Verify that there is sufficient space for a technician's desk or work table.
6.
Verify that there is sufficient space for power backup equipment. Due to the
variety of power backup equipment available, no specific requirements can be
detailed in this procedure.
2-4
0.
Electrical Requirements
General Requirements
The Coral IPx 800 operates from a standard wide input 100-240VAC, 47-63Hz source or
from a 48VDC source.
1.
Verify that electrical service is sufficient and located in close proximity to the
system.
Coral IPx 800 installations require one dedicated branch circuit for all cages
within the system.
Ancillary equipment such as data terminals or personal computers, external

paging equipment, test instruments, etc., require at least one additional branch
circuit.
2.
A 1.85mm2 or 10AWG wire must be used in the circuit branch for 115VAC or
230VAC power.
3.
Each branch circuit must be independently protected by a fuse or a circuit breaker

and must not be controlled by a switch. Type-C fuses must be used where
required by local authorities.
4.
The receptacle for the Coral system branch circuit must be located within 4 feet
(1.2m) of the cages for AC or DC operated systems.
5.
Ancillary branch circuit receptacles should be located conveniently for equipment,

and allow data terminals, personal computers, or test instruments to be operated
near the system.
Table 2-4 lists the voltages and current requirements for each cabinet.
Site Inspection
6.
2-5
Table 2-4
Coral IPx 800
Maximum Current
115VAC
230VAC
48VDC
IPx 800M
6A
3A
12A
IPx 800X
6A
3A
12A
IPx 500X
6A
3A
10A
IPx 800M + IPx 800X
12A
6A
24A
IPx 800M + IPx 800X + IPx 800X
18A
9A
30A
IPx 800M + IPx 500X
12A
6A
22A
18A
9A
30A
18A
9A
30A
Configuration*
Site Inspection
*Maximum power requirement is a maximum case projection based on fully populated

systems. The total number may be defined per actual system. The current is identical for
main and expansion cages.
2-6
DC Electrical Requirements
DC powered units must comply with the following instructions:
1.
Restricted Access Area: The DC powered equipment should only be installed in a

Restricted Access Area.
2.
Installation Codes: The equipment must be installed according to country

national electrical codes. For North America, equipment must be installed in
accordance with the US National Electrical Code, Articles 110-16, 110-17 and
110-18 and the Canadian Electrical Code, Section 12.
3.
Overcurrent Protection: A readily accessible listed branch circuit overcurrent

protective device rated 30A/60VDC minimum slow blow must be incorporated in the
building wiring for every four cages.
4.
CAUTION: This equipment is designed to permit connection between the earthed

conductor of the DC supply circuit and the earthing conductor at the equipment.
See installation instructions below.
5.
The equipment shall be connected to a properly earthed supply system.
6.
All equipment in the immediate vicinity shall be earthed the same way, and shall
not be earthed elsewhere.
7.
The DC supply system is to be local, i.e. within the same premises as the
equipment.
A disconnect device is not allowed in the earthed circuit between the DC supply
Site Inspection
source and the frame/ earthed circuit connection.
8.
2-7
Site Inspection
NOTES:
2-8
Introduction
This chapter describes how to install the Coral IPx 800 cages. For a detailed description
of the cage, see Chapter 6 - Cage Description.
The cage mounting and installation procedure includes the following stages:
Mounting and Installing the Cage, on page 2-10
Ground Wiring, on page 2-17
Wiring DC Powered Systems, on page 2-22
Wiring AC Powered Systems, on page 2-25
Connecting the I/O Cables, on page 2-27
Setting the Configuration Jumpers, on page 2-30
Interconnecting the Main and Expansion Cages, on page 2-32
Installing the Power Supply Card, on page 2-33
Interconnecting the Power Supply Duplication Cable, on page 2-36
Inserting the Coral Circuit Cards into the Cage, on page 2-37
General Hazard. Installation and maintenance activities carried out by unqualified

personnel could lead to death, serious injury, or damage to equipment. Only qualified
service technicians certified by the manufacturer may install and maintain the
Equipment Installation
Coral IPx 800.
2.2
2-9
Mounting and Installing the Cage

The process of mounting and installing the cage includes the following stages:
Unpacking the Shipping Container, on page 2-10
Checking the Space and Positioning Requirements, on page 2-12
Removing the Cage Door, on page 2-12
Removing the Locking Bar, on page 2-12
When necessary, Preparing the Cage for Mounting onto a 23 Rack, on page 2-13
Mounting the Cage onto the Rack, on page 2-14
Installing the Heat Buffer Bracket, on page 2-16
Unpacking the Shipping Container

1.
Inspect the shipping carton for evidence of physical damage or mishandling.

Report any damage to the carrier immediately.
2.
If it is necessary to make a damage claim to the carrier, do not move the container
until it has been examined by a representative of the carrier. Otherwise, move the
shipping carton as near as possible to the installation area before opening.
Ergonomic Hazard. The cage weights are provided in Table 2-2 on page 2-3. Serious back
injury could result due to improper handling. Use proper lifting techniques to lift the
shipping carton.
3.
Using a utility knife, carefully cut the tape securing the top flaps of the shipping
carton and open the flaps.

4.
Remove any circuit card boxes in the depressions of the top foam insert.
5.
Remove the top foam insert and set it aside.
6.
Using an assistant to avoid personal injury, grasp each end of the cage and lift it
out of the shipping carton. Place the cage on a stable surface.
7.
Inspect the cage door and rear panel for hidden shipping damage.
8.
Check the part list and verify that all the items are present. Table 2-5 through Table
2-6 list the components that are supplied with the wall-mounted Coral IPx 800
system.
9.
Remove any other cage items from the shipping container, and move the container
so that it does not interfere with the remaining installation procedures.
2-10
Quantity
Cage including attached AC Power Cord
MEX-IP Control Card
HDC Control Card
Kit with Mechanical Fasteners
Power supply unit; PS19 AC or DC-D (ordered by customer)
Peripheral interface cards (ordered by customer)
As required
8DRCF service card
Part
Quantity
Cage including attached AC Power Cord
Kit with Mechanical Fasteners
H500-1 Cage Interconnection Cable Harness
Power supply unit; PS19 AC or DC-D (ordered by customer)
Peripheral interface cards (ordered by customer)
As required
H614 DC power cable harness (for DC systems)
Table 2-6
Contents of
Coral IPx 800X Shipping
Container
Part
Table 2-5
Contents of
Coral IPx 800M Shipping
Container
2-11
Checking the Space and Positioning Requirements

Verify that the cage will be positioned in accordance with local and system
requirements. The spacing requirements as described on page 2-3, Space Requirements
ensure system operation and maintenance.
Removing the Cage Door

Remove the cage door and set it aside. For more information, see page 6-24, Removing
the Door.
Removing the Locking Bar

The locking bar for shipping reinforces the cage and prevents damage during
shipping. For more information, see Figure 2-2. After it is delivered to the customer it
may be discarded.
To remove the locking bracket:
1.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, unfasten the screws (counter clockwise) that connect
the locking bar to the cage.
2.
Remove and discard the locking bar.
3.
If the cage is to be mounted onto a 19 rack, skip to page 2-14, Mounting the Cage
onto the Rack.
Figure 2-2 Removing

the Locking Bar
Left screw
Locking bar
Right screw
2-12
Preparing the Cage for Mounting onto a 23 Rack

1.
For 19 rack installation, skip to page 2-14, Mounting the Cage onto the Rack.
2.
Unfasten the four screws that secure the right bracket to the cage.
3.
Reposition the hanging pin assembly on the bracket as depicted in step 2 of

Figure 2-3, rotate the bracket 180, and align the bracket with the cage such that
the narrow edge of the bracket is adjacent to the cage.
4.
Fasten the bracket to the cage with the four screws.
5.
Repeat step 2 through step 4 for the left bracket.
Figure 2-3 Preparing

the Right Side of the
Cage for 23" Rack
Assembly
Step
Step
Move hanging pin

and rotate angle
180 .
Step
Replace four
screws.
Remove four
screws.
2-13
Mounting the Cage onto the Rack
Mechanical Hazard. Insecure mechanical loads could result in serious injury. It is the
customers responsibility to verify that the cage is tightly secured to the frame and that it
cannot accidentally fall from the rack.
1.
Verify that the cage mounting position on the rack is correct. In addition to
customer requirements, requirements for heat dissipation must be taken into
account. For more information, see page 2-3, Space Requirements.
2.
With the help of an assistant, grasp each end of the cage and lift it to the
mounting position on the rack.
Ergonomic Hazard. The cage weight is provided in Table 2-1 on page 2-3. Serious back
injury could result due to improper handling. Use proper lifting techniques to mount the
cage onto the rack.
3.
Insert the hanging pins into the two square inserts positioned on the rack holes
(supplied by the customer). See Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5. This ensures that the
cage remains in position while it is fastened to the rack. Do not let go of the cage
after you have inserted the hanging pins. The hanging pins are not designed to
support the weight of the cage and are to be used only for assistance.
Ergonomic Hazard. The hanging pins are not designed to support the weight of the
cage. Do NOT rest the weight of the cage on the hanging pins. Continue to support the
cage until it has been securely fastened to the rack.
4.
Fasten the cage to the rack with fasteners inserted into the oval holes of the
mounting bracket. For more details, see Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5 on page 2-15.
Note
It is the customers responsibility to provide the fasteners for the cage to the
rack.
2-14
Figure 2-4 Left Side

View of Coral IPx Cage
Mounted onto 19" Rack
Nut (not supplied
by manufacturer)
Hanging pin
Mounting
bracket
19 Rack
Figure 2-5 Left Side

View of Coral IPx Cage
Mounted onto 23" Rack
Hanging pin
Nut (not supplied

by manufacturer)
Mounting
bracket
23 Rack
2-15
Installing the Heat Buffer Bracket

Verify that the cage mounting position on the rack is correct. In addition to customer
requirements, requirements for heat dissipation must be taken into account. See page
6-30, Heat Buffer Bracket.
1.
If a heat buffer bracket is not necessary, skip to page 2-17, Ground Wiring.
2.
Install the heat buffer bracket. For details, see Figure 2-6.
3.
Skip to page 2-17, Ground Wiring.
Figure 2-6 Installing the

Heat Buffer Bracket
2-16
Ground Wiring
Proper system grounding is critical for reliable system operation. System grounding is
only as effective as the ground point itself. To ensure adequate protection from
interference by radio frequency energy, electrical impulse noise, and lightening or
power line surge, the building electrical ground point must comply with grounding
recommendations of the National Area Code, Article 800, and/or applicable, local
building and electrical codes.
The purpose of ground circuit design is to establish a low resistance path to the earth,
and conduct a number of currents in such a way as to minimize the interaction of any
two or more currents. The ground connection is used as a common conductor for
many circuits: some carrying wanted signals, and others carrying unwanted signals.
The same ground that carries small networking currents must also carry unwanted
radio frequency energy, impulse noise, and lightening surges that might otherwise
interfere with system operation.
The ground terminal includes an M4 threaded terminal pole that is fixed to the bottom
right corner on the rear side of the cage (by the manufacturer), a serrated washer, a flat
washer, and an M4 nut.
Electrical Hazard. Incorrect ground wire connections to the system can cause shock,
burn, or death.
Verify that the ground wires are 10 AWG stranded conductor.
Verify that all cage ground connections are made directly from the cage ground
connection to the master ground.
Do not interconnect cage ground terminals between Coral IPx cages.
Ring terminals retain wires onto the terminal lug when the connection is loosened.
Verify that all ground wires include ring terminals at both ends.
Connect only a Protective Earth (PE) to the Coral IPx system.
Resistance from the master ground to the building electrical ground should never
exceed 1.0 ohm. The master ground bar should be located in the switching room as
close as possible to the Coral system. Any ground connection of equipment related to
the switching Coral system should ultimately connect to the master ground.
The cage ground wire is connected to the cage at the rear bottom right corner, as
described on page 2-18, Connecting the Ground Wire to the Cage.
Do not connect a separate Telecommunications Reference Conductor (TRC).
2-17
Connecting the Ground Wire to the Cage

The cage ground connection includes one serrated washer, one flat washer, and one
hexagonal nut. See Figure 2-7.
Connect the ground wire to the cage as follows:
1.
Remove the hexagonal nut and flat washer from the ground terminal, and retain
for reassembly.
2.
Insert the ground wire ring terminal over the serrated washer.
3.
Insert the flat washer onto the ground wire ring terminal.
4.
Fasten the hexagonal nut.
The hexagonal nut can be fastened or unfastened only with a closed 7mm
hexagonal socket wrench with a 1/4 drive and an adaptor. An open wrench
cannot be maneuvered in the restricted space around the nut.
Figure 2-7 Coral IPx 800
Cage Ground Wiring
Master
ground
-48V
48VRTN
Serrated
washer
Flat
washer
GND
Ring
terminals
Ground
nut (M4)
Ring Ground connection
terminalbetween the Coral IPx
cage and the Master
Ground.
(10 AWG stranded
conductor)
R=1.0 ohm max.
Building
entrance
ground
2-18
Connecting the Ground Wire to the Master Ground

A master ground must be included within the system. The system ground connection
is fabricated as follows:
1.
Verify that a master ground unit for ground connections is used. See Figure 2-8.
The recommended master ground unit must have the following specifications:
Dimensions:.......................Minimum of 5.5 x x 1 (140 mm x 6 mm x 25 mm)
Material:.............................Brass or Copper
Mounting holes:................ (6 mm) diameter, (12 mm) distance from edges
Ground screws:.................10-32 UNF
Washers...............................One serrated washer and one flat washer
Distance between screws:....." (19 mm)
Figure 2-8 Master

Ground Unit
" m)
3m
1
(
" m )
9m
(1
" m )
9m
(1
1/4"
(25 mm)
" m )
3m
1"
(25 mm)
(1
10
2
-3
F
UN
"
(6mm)
Serrated Washer
2.
Ring Terminal
Disk Washer
Verify that the ground wire is 10AWG stranded conductor, is the proper length,
3.
Route the ground wire between the cage and the master ground.
4.
Connect the ground wire to the cage as described on page 2-18, Connecting the
Ground Wire to the Cage.
Connect the cage ground wire to the master ground unit as follows:
a. Unfasten one of the 10-32 UNF screws connected to the master ground unit and
retain the screw and serrated washer. See Figure 2-8.
5.
and includes two ring terminals fitted onto either end of the wire that are suitable
for connecting to the master ground and to the cage.
2-19
b. Insert the 10-32 UNF screw such that the ground wire ring terminal is
positioned between the serrated washer and the threaded hole of the master
ground unit.
c. Position the wire ring terminal over the threaded hole of the master ground
unit, and fasten. Tighten until snug. See Figure 2-8.
6.
Repeat step 1 through step 5 for all cages in the system. Verify that the system
ground wire connection between the different cages is identical to the schematic
diagram displayed in Figure 2-9 or Figure 2-10.
7.
Connect the MDF to the master ground according to the manufacturers

recommendations.
Figure 2-9 Ground

Connection for System
Including Customer
Supplied MDF
Master
Ground
10 AWG stranded wire

with ring terminals
Main Cage
MDF
R=1.0 ohm max.
Building
Entrance
Ground
2-20
10 AWG stranded wire

with ring terminals
Master
Ground
Expansion
Cage 2
MDF
Expansion
Cage 1
MDF
R=1.0 ohm max.
MDF
Building
Entrance
Ground
Main Cage 0
Figure 2-10 Ground

Connection for Coral
IPx 800System with More
than One Cage Including
MDF Units
2-21
Wiring DC Powered Systems

This section describes how to connect the power wires to the cage for DC powered
systems (that is, when the PS19 DC or PS19 DC-D power supply cards are installed in
the cage). For instructions on how to connect power wires to AC powered systems, see
page 2-25, Wiring AC Powered Systems.
Figure 2-11 displays the wire connections for DC systems.
A bonding bar is connected by the manufacturer between:
The two positive (48VRTN) terminal lugs
The two negative (48V) terminal lugs
The two GND terminal lugs
This allows several cages to be connected together in parallel with the H614 wire
harness supplied. There is no ground interconnection between different cages.
Therefore, the GND terminal lugs are not in use.
Figure 2-11 DC Power
Terminal Interconnection
Do not use this terminal
To
-48V
Fuse
-48V
-48V
Bonding Bars
To
48VRTN
48V
RTN
GND
48V
RTN
GND
To
-48V
To
48VRTN
Before connecting the DC power wires, verify that:

The positive and negative power conductors are NOT connected to the 48 VDC power
source and are NOT energized in any way.
The H614 power wire harness (supplied by the manufacturer) are red for positive, black
for negative, 10AWG, and include ring terminals that retain wires onto the terminal lug
when the connection is loosened.
Do not connect the GND terminal lugs to master ground.
2-22
Connecting the Cage Power Wires of One Cage

1.
Connect the cage as shown in Figure 2-12.
2.
Remove the AC power cord. For more information, see page 6-20, Removing the AC
Power Cord.
It is the customers responsibility to supply the facilities DC fuse.

Power Wiring for One
Cage
Master
ground
Ground
yellow/green
Fuse
-48V
-48V
48V
RTN
48V
RTN
GND
10 AWG
GND
Ground
yellow/green
Black
++
48V battery
Ground
yellow/green
Building
entrance
ground
2-23
Fuse
30A / 125V S.B.
Red
Connecting the Cage Power Wires of One Rack

1.
Connect the cage as shown in Figure 2-13.
2.
Remove the AC power cord. For more information, see page 6-20, Removing the AC
Power Cord.

Power Wiring for One
Rack
Master
ground
-48V
48V
RTN
GND
48V
RTN
GND
Fuse
-48V
H614
wire pair
Ground
yellow/green
Ground
yellow/green
Fuse
-48V
48V
RTN
GND
-48V
48V
RTN
GND
Ground
yellow/green
Fuse
-48V
48V
RTN
-48V
48V
RTN
GND
GND
+ Red
Black
Ground
yellow/green
Red
Ground
yellow/green
Fuse
30A / 125V S.B.
48V battery
2-24
Building
entrance
ground
Wiring AC Powered Systems

This section describes how to connect the power wires to the Coral IPx cage for AC
powered systems (that is, when the PS19 AC power supply card is installed in the
cage). For instructions on how to connect power wires to DC powered systems, see
page 2-22, Wiring DC Powered Systems.
Do one of the following:
For cages that include an AC cord with bare wires, attach the appropriate AC
power connector to the end of the AC power cord according to local requirements,
and route the cord to the designated power outlet. For more information, see page
6-21, Installing the AC Power Cord.
For cages that include an AC cord with a plug already attached, route the power
cord to the designated power outlet.
Do not connect the AC power cord to the outlet at this time. The AC power connector
inside the cage includes dangerous currents when the AC power cord is connected.
Do not connect more than four cages to the same facilities AC fuse. Connecting more
than four cages to the same fuse could result in an overload within the building wiring. It
is the customers responsibility to supply the facilities AC fuse.

Cage Rear Panel
DC power
(not in Use
for AC Connections)
AC power
cord
Ground
connection
nut
2-25

Power Connection for AC
Systems
Master ground
Building
entrance
ground
2-26
Connecting the I/O Cables

The Input/Output (I/O) cables are described in further detail in Chapter 6 - Cage
Description. Read the entire chapter before attempting to connect the I/O cables.
Champ Connections
1.
Determine the route of I/O cables from the MDF to the I/O Champ connectors of
the card cage and measure the longest distance from an I/O connector on the card
cage to the corresponding cable punch block on the MDF.
2.
Prepare cables that are the length determined above, with a male 25 pair connector
on one end, for each I/O connector on the card cage. Eight 25 pair cables are
required for main cages and twelve cables are required for expansion cages.
3.
Carefully route the connector end of the first cable to the left I/O connector. Insert
the cable connector firmly into the Coral I/O connector.
4.
Route the other end of the cable to the appropriate cable punch block on the MDF.
5.
Repeat this procedure for each I/O cable, moving from left to right across the
upper I/O connectors, and then from left to right across the lower I/O connectors,
until all cables are in place.
6.
Mark each I/O cable near the connector on the card cage rear panel with the
corresponding peripheral shelf and I/O connector number on the Coral system.
7.
Terminate each of the cables in their respective cable punch blocks on the MDF.
8.
Mark each cable punch block with the corresponding I/O connector number on
the Coral system. Optionally mark every eighth pair on the block, starting with
the first pair, with the number of the two card slots associated with the I/O cable,
according to Table 2-7 and Figure 2-16.
Ensure that each I/O cable is secured with its own hook-and-loop fastener
strap on the Coral cabinet rear, so that the cables do not accidentally pop out
of place.
2-27

Card Slot Position to I/O
Cable Pair Relationship
Pair
25/50
17
25
ports 0-7
NOT
USED
26
EVEN SLOTS
2,4,6,8,10,12
ports 8-15
ports 16-23
42
Coral IPx 800 I/O Champ

Connectors
34
26
Associated Card Slots
1, 2
3,4 Upper
3,4 Lower
3, 4
5,6 Upper
5,6 Lower
5, 6
7,8 Upper
7,8 Lower
7, 8
9,10 Upper
9,10 Lower
9, 10
11,12 Upper
11,12 Lower
11, 12
1,2 Lower
LOWER
CONNECTOR
ports 8-15
1,2 Upper
2
2-28
UPPER
CONNECTOR
ports 0-7
34
17
50
ports 16-23
ODD SLOTS
1,3,5,7,9,11
25
Table 2-7
Coral IPx 800
I/O Champ Connector to
Card Slot Relationships
42
50
Connector
Pins
Pairs
1/26-8/33
Pairs
9/34-16/41
Pairs
17/42-24/49
RJ-45 I/O Cable Connections to cage Rear Panel

RJ-45 I/O cables for the network connection are routed from the rear panel of the
Coral IPx cage, for the following cards:
PRI-23 and PRI-30 cards (layout UDT C and later)
T1 card (layout UDT C and later)
30T/x, 30T/E card (layout UDT C and later)
UGW card (layout B1)
UGW-E
Verify that the RJ-45 cables for the above cards are not connected directly from the
network to the connectors on the front panel of Coral peripheral cards.
Only IPG, DPC and old versions of UGW, T1, 30T, PRI-23 and PRI-30 cards
are routed from the connectors of the front panel of Coral peripheral cards.
See page 5-25, I/O Connections Via Front Panel.
1.
Determine the route of the RJ-45 cable from the network connectionto the cage
rear panel. Measure the longest distance from the cage rear panel to the
corresponding network connector.
2.
Fabricate a cable of the length determined in step 1 with a male, 4 pair RJ-45
connector on each end. For information on the pinout connection, see page 5-41,
I/O RJ-45 Connections Via Rear Panel.
3.
Connect one side of the RJ-45 cable routed in step 1 to the network connection.
4.
Carefully route the other side of the RJ-45 cable routed in step 1 to the rear panel
of the Coral IPx cage. Connect the RJ-45 connector to the corresponding RJ-45 jack.
Repeat step 1 to step 4 for each peripheral card with an RJ-45 connector.
5.
2-29
Setting the Configuration Jumpers

The cage motherboards include the configuration jumpers that define:
The synchronization cards that are housed in the cages
The cage number
The motherboard may require changes to the jumpers on the card. This must be done
before inserting the circuit cards. This section describes how to remove and insert the
shorting plugs of the various jumpers that are present on the backplanes of the main
and expansion cages.
1.
Connect the static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and put on the
strap. See Figure 2-17.
Circuit cards contain static-sensitive circuitry and may be damaged or destroyed by

electro-static discharge (ESD).
Always wear the static dissipating wrist strap connected to the cage while handling
circuit cards.
Hold circuit cards by their edges and avoid touching contact surfaces. Handle with care
and do not drop.
Figure 2-17 ESD Wrist

Strap Connection on the
Coral IPx 800 Cage
Static Wrist Strap
2-30
2.
Remove all circuit cards from the cage if any have already been inserted.
3.
Configure the following jumpers (see Table 2-8 through Table 2-9):
Subject
Refer to
J29
Synchronization slots
See Table 6-1 on page 6-39
Subject
Refer to
J37
Synchronization slots
J38
Cage number
Table 2-9
Jumpers in
Jumpers
the 800X Expansion Cage
Jumpers
Table 2-8
Jumpers in
the IPx 800M Main Cage
2-31
Interconnecting the Main and Expansion Cages

This section describes how to interconnect the cages within the system.
For a complete description of the different cage connectors, see page 6-39, Coral IPx
800M Main Cage, and page 6-45, Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage. For a complete
description of the different system configurations, see page 6-53, System Configuration
Options.
1.
Verify that the power switches of all cages in the system are turned OFF.
2.
Route the cables from cage to cage according to the configurations defined on page
6-53, System Configuration Options.
3.
Push the cable connectors over the cage connector in the rear panel. Do not force
the connectors together. If you encounter more than a slight resistance, remove
and examine the connectors for bent pins or interfering debris.
Fasten the connector screws to the cage.
4.
2-32
Installing the Power Supply Card

The power supply is inserted only after the system has been completely grounded and
the jumpers configured. Verify that the cage is grounded and that the configuration
jumpers have been adjusted before performing the procedure described in this section.
For more information, see page 2-17, Ground Wiring and page 2-30, Setting the
Configuration Jumpers.
Coral power supply units (PS19 AC, PS19 DC and PS19 DC-D) are heavy.
Handle with care and do not drop.
Coral power supply circuit cards contain static-sensitive circuitry that could be damaged
or destroyed by electro-static discharge (ESD).
Always wear the static dissipating wrist strap connected to the cage while handling the
circuit cards. See Figure 2-17 on page 2-30.
Hold circuit cards by their edges to avoid touching contact surfaces.
The power supplies used in the Coral IPx 800 consist of an AC powered
(PS19 AC) or a 48VDC powered (PS19 DC or DC-D) power supply unit.
The PS19 is installed in the extreme left slot of the peripheral card cage.
See Figure 2-19 on page 2-42 through Figure 2-21 on page 2-44 .
1.
Connect the static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and wear the strap.
2.
The power supply includes a ring generator that is required for single-line
telephone (8/16/24SLS, or 16SH/S-LL cards) or magneto telephone (8SM
card) station circuits. Either 20Hz or 25Hz ringing frequency can be supplied, by
configuring jumper located on the power supply card. Verify that the jumper is
configured according to local requirements. The procedure is as follows:
on page 7-8 for PS19 DC
on page 7-25 for PS19 DC-D
on page 7-45 for PS19 AC
See Chapter 7 - Power Supplies for further details on the PS19 power supply units.
2-33
3.
Verify that the PS19 power switch is turned OFF (downwards). See Figure 2-18..
Do not insert or remove the power supply unit from the cage when turned ON.
Sudden power surges could damage system components.
4.
Grasp the power supply with both hands, with your fingers on the top and
bottom of the power supply near the front panel, and thumbs against the extractor
levers at the top and bottom of the front panel.
5.
Align the two guide ridges located on the right panel of the power supply (top
and bottom) with the card edge guides corresponding to the POWER SUPPLY
marking at the bottom of the card cage and gently slide the power supply straight
into the card slot.
6.
Remove the power supply units from their shipping cartons and partially insert
them into the card slots as determined above. Allow the units to protrude from
the card cage by approximately 1 inch (2.5cm).
2-34
Top
Ejector
Top
Captive Screw
Alarm
(Red) Indicator
ALARM
POWER
Power
(Green) Indicator
ON
Power Switch
OFF
PS19 AC
Cat. No. 72440952900
INPUT:
100-240VAC 47-63Hz
CURRENT RATING:
6A/115VAC/60Hz
3A/230VAC/50Hz
OUTPUT: +5VDC
+12VDC
-5VDC
-12VDC
-48VDC
-120VDC
85VRMS 20/25Hz
13.0A
3.0A
0.15A
0.15A
7.0A
0.4A
12VA
Handle
Bottom
Ejector
Bottom
Captive Screw
Figure 2-18 PS19 Front

Panel
2-35
10 Interconnecting the Power Supply Duplication Cable

The H719 power supply duplication cable may only be connected between two cages
that house a PS19 DC-D power supply unit. For a complete description of the
conditions requiring the installation of an H719 power supply duplication cable, see
page 7-28, Connecting the Power Supply Duplication Cable between Two Cages.
Connecting the power supply duplication connector (located on the cage rear panel) for
PS19 DC or PS19 AC power supplies will result in damage to the system.
This connector is only used with the PS19 DC-D power supply.
Do not use this connector when the PS19 DC or PS19 AC power supplies are installed.
1.
Verify that all main cages house a PS19 DC-D power supply unit.
2.
In all cages that house a PS19 DC-D power supply unit, verify that the cage rear
panel fuse is a 30A/125V S.B., othewise replace the 15A/125V S.B. fuse by a
30A/125V S.B. fuse.
Verify that the main cage is connected to any other IPx 800X cage.
3.
2-36
11 Inserting the Coral Circuit Cards into the Cage

This section describes the process of inserting all control, service, and peripheral cards
into the cages. Verify that the cage is grounded and that the configuration jumpers
have been adjusted before performing the procedure described in this section. For
more information, see page 2-17, Ground Wiring and page 2-30, Setting the Configuration
Jumpers.
Circuit cards contain static-sensitive circuitry and may be damaged or destroyed by

electro-static discharge (ESD).
Always wear the static dissipating wrist strap connected to the system cabinet or card
cage while handling circuit cards.
See Figure 2-17 on page 2-30. Hold circuit cards by their edges and avoid touching
contact surfaces. Handle with care and do not drop.
Inserting a Coral Circuit Card

1.
Connect the static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and put on the
strap.
2.
To insert a circuit card into a card slot, grasp the card with both hands, with your
fingers on the edge of the card near the front panel, and your thumbs against the
ejectors at the top and bottom of the front panel.
3.
Verify that the card is oriented correctly (the red diagnostic indicator on front
panel is positioned near the top of the card).
4.
Align the edges of the circuit card with the card edge guides in the card cage, and
gently slide the card straight into the card slot.
5.
A slight resistance will be felt as the multi-pin connectors on the circuit card meet
6.
Push against the ejectors until the front panel of the card is flush with the front
frame of the card cage.
Do not force the circuit card into the slot. If more than slight resistance is encountered,
remove the circuit card and examine the connectors for bent pins or interfering debris.
mating connectors on the backplane and engage.
Never place a card in a slot other than the dedicated one. Refer to to determine
peripheral interface card types.
2-37
Common Control Card Installation

Refer to Figure 2-19 for common control card placement in the Coral IPx 800M cage.
1.
Verify that the IMC8 Flash Memory card is properly installed in its connector on
the front side of the MEX-IP card.
2.
Install the SAU plug on its corresponding connector on the front side of the
MEX-IP card.
3.
Verify that the MEX-IP common control card is partially inserted into the card slot
on the extreme right slot of the main cage. The cage is normally shipped with this
card inserted in its card slot. Partially extract it from its card slot, such that the
cards protrudes from the cage by approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).
4.
Verify that the HDC card is partially inserted into the second right slot of the main
cage. The cage is normally shipped with this card inserted in its card slot. Partially
extract it from its card slot, such that the cards protrudes from the cage by
approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).
5.
Insert the PX card into slot 1 of the first expansion cage such that the card
protrudes from the cage by approximately 1 inch (2.5cm).
2-38
Shared Service and Peripheral Interface Card Installation
Some shared service and peripheral interface cards listed in Table 2-10may
require changes to option straps on the card that determines the electrical
characteristics or operation of each interface circuit. Refer to specific card
descriptions in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation
Manual for details.
Peripheral Interface cards may be installed in any universal I/O slot of the Coral
system. However, the following considerations must be taken into account when
designing the peripheral card placements.
Determine the position of shared service and peripheral interface cards that will
be inserted into the card slots. Observe any order previously directed by a system
designer or any established convention of the distributor. The card placement
diagrams, Figure 2-19 through Figure 2-21, can be used as a worksheet by the
system designer to establish card placement prior to installation. Refer to Table
2-10 to determine shared service and peripheral interface card types. If no other
convention exists, plan the card placement as follows:
In the main cage, insert a shared service card into slot 9.
In a system with one expansion cage, insert a shared service card into slot 1 of
the expansion cage.
In a system with two expansion cages; insert a PX card into slot 1 of the first
expansion cage, and insert a shared service card into slot 1 of the second
expansion cage.
See page 6-68, Suggestions for Peripheral Card Distribution for timeslot/PCM
distribution among the slots. The timeslots are evenly divided into three
groups of 128 timeslots for each of the slot slots. Therefore, slots 1-4 share 128
time slots, slots 5-8 share an additional 128 timeslots, and slots 9-12 share the
last 128 timeslots. Distribute heavy consumer cards (cards with a large number
of ports: 30T/x, T1, PRI-23, PRI-30,UDT, IPG or UGW with MG-30 or MG-60
Distribute trunk interface cards (4ALS, 8ALS, 8BID, 8DID, 4GID, 4T, 8T, 4T-C,
8T-C, 4T-CID, 8T-CID, 4TEM, 4TMR, 4TPF, 8TPF, DPC, 4TBR, 8TBR, 30T, 30T/x,
PRI23, PRI30, UDT and T1) evenly among all cages in the system, rather than
concentrate trunk interface cards in one cage. This practice ensures that the
failure of a single cage will have minimal impact to trunk service.
Insert the digital trunk interface cards into slots 4 and 5 of the designated main
or expansion cages. Slots 4 and 5 are wired as the secondary and primary
external clock source, respectively. The cards inserted in these slots can be used
to synchronize the Coral system clock with a network clock signal via a digital
trunk circuit. Refer to Coral Synchronization via Digital Trunks section in the Coral
2-39
units) among the PCM groups evenly.
1.
Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual, for more information about
synchronization.
Insert peripheral cards into slots 1 through 8 of the main cage and slots 2
through 12 of the expansion cages.
2.
If IPx 500X expansion cages are installed determine the position of peripheral
interface cards that will be inserted into card slots 1 through 10 in the expansion
cage. Observe any order previously directed by a system designer or any
established convention of the distributor. The card placement diagrams, Figure
2-22 through Figure 2-23, may be used as a worksheet by the system designer to
establish card placement prior to installation. Refer to the Coral IPx 500 Installation
Manual Chapter 2 and the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual.
Place digital trunk interface cards in card slots 4 and/or 5. Slots 4 and 5 are wired
as the primary and secondary external clock source, respectively. The cards
inserted in these slots can be used to synchronize the Coral IPx system clock with
a network clock signal derived from a digital trunk circuit.
If no other convention exists, refer to Section 10, Peripheral Cards Installation of the
Coral IPx 500 Installation Manual.
3.
Remove shared service and peripheral interface cards from their shipping cartons
and partially insert them into the card slots as determined above. Allow the cards
to protrude from the card cage by approximately 1 inch (2.5cm).
Go to page 2-47, Program Interface Device Connection.
4.
2-40
Card Type
Shared Service
8DTR, 16MFR, CNF, 4VSN, iDSP, iCMC, iVMF,

IPC/SFC, IPC/uCMC, IPC/WiCMC
Peripheral Analog trunk Interface
4/8T*, 4/8T-C*, 4/8T-CID*, 4TMR*, 4/8TPF*,

4TEM*, 4TEM-P, 4/8T/S, 4/8ALS*, 4/8ALS/M*,
8DID, 8BID, 4GID, 4TWL
Peripheral Digital Trunk Interface
PRI-23, PRI-30*, T1, 30T, 30TE, 30TM, 30T/x,

4DT*, UDT*, 4/8TBR, 8TBRP, DPC*, SS7
Peripheral Station Interface
8/16/24SFT, 8SM, 8/24SA*, 8/16/24SLS*,

16SH-LL*, 8/16SKK*,
VoIP Interface
UGW*, IPG, FlexiGate-BRI, FlexiGate-E&M, PUGW*
Peripheral Auxiliary Interface
8DRCM*, 8DRCF*, RMI*
These cards require changes to option straps which affect interface characteristics or operation
Card Names
Table 2-10 Shared

Service and Peripheral
Interface Card Types
2-41
Figure 2-19 Coral

IPx 800M Main Cage Peripheral Card
Placement Diagram
Coral IPx 800M

MAIN CAGE
Shelf Number:
Main processor card (MEX-IP)

with optional DBX or CLA
Universal I/O Card Type:
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
DIGITAL TRUNK
SYNC SLOTS 4, 5
Peripheral service card (HDC)
SHARED
SERVICE
Card Type: ..............
Power Supply
PS19 AC / DC / DC-D
2-42
PS Type: ..............
Shelf Number:
SHARED
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
10
..............
11
PX or SERVICE Card Type: ..............
..............
12
..............
Power Supply
PS19 AC / DC / DC-D
PS Type: ..............
Note:
Requires a PX card in slot# 1 if a second expansion
cage is installed.
DIGITAL TRUNK
SYNC SLOTS 4, 5
Coral IPx 800X

1st EXPANSION CAGE
Figure 2-20 Coral

IPx 800X 1st Exp. Cage Peripheral Card
Placement Diagram
2-43
Figure 2-21 Coral

IPx 800X 2nd Exp. Cage Peripheral Card
Placement Diagram
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
10
Card Type: ..............
..............
11
SHARED
SERVICE
Shelf Number:
..............
12
DIGITAL TRUNK
SYNC SLOTS 4, 5
Coral IPx 800X

2nd EXPANSION CAGE
..............
Power Supply
PS19 AC / DC / DC-D
2-44
PS Type: ..............
Card Type: ..............
Card Type: ..............
Card Type: ..............
Card Type: ..............
Card Type: ..............
Card Type: ..............
Card Type: ..............
Card Type: ..............
Shelf Number:
Card Type: ..............
10
Card Type: ..............
Power Supply
PS500 AC / DC
PS Type: ..............
Battery Pack
BATTipx
for PS500 AC
Yes/No:
..............
DIGITAL TRUNK
SYNC SLOTS 4, 5
Coral IPx 500X

1st EXP. CAGE
Figure 2-22 Coral

IPx 500X 1st Exp. Cage Peripheral Card
Placement Diagram
2-45
Figure 2-23 Coral

IPx 500X 2nd Exp. Cage Peripheral Card
Placement Diagram
2-46
Card Type: ..............
Card Type: ..............
Card Type: ..............
Card Type: ..............
Card Type: ..............
Card Type: ..............
Card Type: ..............
Card Type: ..............
Shelf Number:
Card Type: ..............
10
DIGITAL TRUNK
SYNC SLOTS 4, 5
Coral IPx 500X

2nd EXP. CAGE
Card Type: ..............
Power Supply
PS500 AC / DC
PS Type: ..............
Battery Pack
BATTipx
for PS500 AC
Yes/No:
..............
Program Interface Device Connection
The data terminal or personal computer that is used as the Program

Interface (PI) device must be equipped with an RS-232E asynchronous
serial data interface. This interface can be configured for a data rate of
115200, 57600, 38400, 19,200, 9600, 4800, 1200, or 300 bps, 8 data bits,
1stop bit, and no parity bit or EVEN, ODD, mark, space, parity. The PI device
must use the American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII)
character set. The earth ground connection to the PI device must be the
same earth ground connection supplied to the Coral system.
1.
If the system includes a dedicated PI device on-site permanently, unpack this

device and prepare it for operation. Set the interface for a data rate of 9600 bits per
second, 8 data bits, 1stop bit, and no parity bit. (These are the default settings for
all serial programming ports of the Coral system.)
2.
Obtain or prepare a serial data cable to connect the PI device to the KB0 serial
programming port on the front panel of the MEX-IP card. The KB0 port end of the
serial programming cable requires a male DA-9P style connector, wired as shown
in either Figure 2-24 or Figure 2-25.
3.
If the PI device uses a DB-25P or DB-25S connector, wire the connectors according
to the diagram in Figure 2-24. If the PI device is a personal computer equipped
2-25.
4.
For installations that have a permanent PI device, route the serial data cable from
the PI device through one of the cable routing slots on the side of the cage. Place
the serial data cable together with other cables entering the cage. Leave
approximately 24 inches (60cm) of cable on the front side of the cabinet so that it
reaches the front panel of the MEX-IP card installed on the control cage without
interfering with the insertion or removal of any circuit cards or power supplies.
with a DA-9P connector, wire the connectors according to the diagram in Figure
2.3
2-47
Figure 2-24 25-Pin

Program Interface Device
Connections to KBO
13
25
5 - SIGNAL GROUND
4 - DATA TERMINAL READY
SIGNAL GROUND - 7
DATA SET READY - 6
CLEAR TO SEND - 5
3 - TRANSMIT DATA
2 - RECEIVE DATA
1 - CARRIER DETECT
REQUEST TO SEND - 4
RECEIVE DATA - 3
TRANSMIT DATA - 2
1
KB0
PROGRAMMING PORT
(USE MALE CABLE 9 PIN CONNECTOR)
Figure 2-25 9-Pin

Program Interface Device
Connections to KBO
PC Async. Serial Port

or Async.Data Terminal
(USE FEMALE CABLE CONNECTOR)
SIGNAL GROUND - 5
DATA TERMINAL READY - 4
TRANSMIT DATA - 3
RECEIVE DATA - 2
CARRIER DETECT - 1
KB0
PROGRAMMING PORT
(USE MALE CABLE 9 PIN CONNECTOR)
2-48
14
9 PIN PC ASYNC. SERIAL PORT

(USE FEMALE CABLE CONNECTOR)
Chapter 3
Initial Powerup Tests
3.1 Power Supply Test...............................................3-1
Cor
Coral
3.2 Common Control Test..........................................3-9

3.3 Shared Service and Peripheral Card Test ........3-19
3.4 Installation Wrap-up..........................................3-27
Power Supply Test
3.1
0
General
This Chapter provides information about initial tests that must be performed when
first installing a Coral IPx 800 system.
.
Before proceeding, verify that all internal power supplies and circuit cards in the Coral
system are only partially inserted into their respective card slots, with the front panels
protruding approximately 1 inch (2.5cm) from the front of the card cage.
For PS19 DC powered systems - skip to page 3-2
For PS19 DC-D powered systems - skip to page 3-4
For PS19 AC powered systems - skip to page 3-6
Power Supply Test
The Coral IPx 800 can operate as an AC powered system or as a DC powered system.
3-1
PS19 DC Powered System

1.
Verify that the ground wires and the power wires are properly connected.
See page 2-17, Ground Wiring and page 2-22, Wiring DC Powered Systems.
2.
Verify on the cage rear panel that the POWER SUPPLY DUPLICATION connector
is not in use.
Connecting the POWER SUPPLY DUPLICATION connector (located on the cage rear
panel) for PS19 DC power supplies will result in damage to the system. This connector
is only used with the PS19 DC-D power supply. Do not use this connector when the
PS19 DC power supply is installed.
3.
Turn ON the external 48VDC Main Power Supply (MPS) or battery charger and
close any fuse or circuit breaker required to supply 48 VDC to the Coral
IPx 800cage.
Electrical Hazard. Electrical currents in the system could cause shock, burn, or death.
Exercise extreme caution while opening the DC power cover and while performing the
power checks that follow.
4.
Open the DC Power cover on the rear panel of the cage.
5.
Measure the DC voltage entering the power input terminals. See figures on
page 2-22, DC Power Terminal Interconnection
page 2-23, Coral IPx 800 Power Wiring for One Cage
page 2-24, Coral IPx 800 Power Wiring for One Rack
Measure the voltage as follows:
Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the 48V RTN IN terminal.
Power Supply Test
Connect the negative lead to the 48V IN terminal.
Verify that the reading is 48 volt DC.
3-2
If a minus sign () appears in the meter display, the polarity of the 48VDC power to the
cage is reversed. Verify the meter settings and connections. If the meter is properly set
and connected, carefully examine the wiring between the external 48VDC power supply
and/or batteries, determine the location of the polarity reversal, and correct the wiring
error before continuing.
6.
Verify that the PS19 DC power switch is turned OFF (downwards).
7.
Gently insert the PS19 DC power supply completely into its card slot. Push
against the ejectors until the front panel of the power supply is flush with the
front frame of the card cage. A slight resistance can be felt as the multi-pin
connectors on the power supply meet the mating connectors on the backplane and
engage. Do not force the power supply into the slot. If more than slight resistance
is encountered, remove the power supply and examine the connectors for bent
pins or interfering debris.
8.
Fasten the two screws located at the top and bottom of the unit front panel, thus
securing the card to the cage as well as grounding the unit.
Do not proceed until the screws of the power supply card have been fastened to the
cage. If the screws are not fastened, the power supply unit will not be grounded, and
9.
Turn the PS19 DC power switch ON, and verify that the green Power indicator is
lit, while the red Alarm indicator is not lit. If the red alarm indicator illuminates,
see page 7-12, Troubleshooting (PS19 DC).
10. Turn OFF (downwards) the power switch on the front panel of the PS19 DC.
11. Repeat step 1 through step 10 for each Coral cage in the system.
Power Supply Test
could be subject to hazardous voltages.
12. Skip to page 3-9, Common Control Test.
3-3
PS19 DC-D Powered System

1.
See page 2-17, Ground Wiring and page 2-22, Wiring DC Powered Systems.
2.
Turn ON the external 48VDC Main Power Supply (MPS) or battery charger and
close any fuse or circuit breaker required to supply 48 VDC to the Coral
IPx 800cage.
Electrical Hazard. Electrical currents in the system could cause shock, burn, or death.
Exercise extreme caution while opening the DC power cover and while performing the
power checks that follow.
3.
Open the DC Power cover on the rear panel of the cage.
4.
Measure the DC voltage entering the power input terminals. See figures on
page 2-22, DC Power Terminal Interconnection
page 2-23, Coral IPx 800 Power Wiring for One Cage
page 2-24, Coral IPx 800 Power Wiring for One Rack
Measure the voltage as follows:
Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the 48V RTN IN terminal.
Connect the negative lead to the 48V IN terminal.
Verify that the reading is 48 volt DC.
If a minus sign () appears in the meter display, the polarity of the 48VDC power to the
cage is reversed. Verify the meter settings and connections. If the meter is properly set
and connected, carefully examine the wiring between the external 48VDC power supply
and/or batteries, determine the location of the polarity reversal, and correct the wiring
Power Supply Test
error before continuing.
5.
Verify that the PS19 DC-D power switch is turned OFF (downwards).
3-4
6.
Gently insert the PS19 DC-D power supply completely into its card slot. Push
7.
8.
Turn the PS19 DC-D power switch ON, and verify that the green Power indicator
is lit, while the red Alarm indicator is not lit. If the red alarm indicator
illuminates, see page 7-33, Troubleshooting (PS19 DC-D).
9.
Turn OFF (downwards) the power switch on the front panel of the PS19 DC-D.
Tip:
In addition, the PS19 DC-D unit needs to be checked to see that it can
supply another cage. See page 3-19, Shared Service and Peripheral Card Test
Power Supply Test
for further details.
3-5
AC Powered System
The PS19 AC internal circuitry automatically adjusts itself to the input voltage
(either 115 VAC or 230 VAC). No voltage adjustments need or be performed
during installation.
1.
See page 2-17, Ground Wiring and page 2-25, Wiring AC Powered Systems.
2.
is not in use.
panel) for PS19 AC power supplies will result in damage to the system. This connector
is only used with the PS19 DC-D power supply. Do not use this connector when the
PS19 AC power supply is installed.
3.
4.
Verify that the AC voltage supplied by the AC receptacle is 115VAC or 230VAC.

See figures on
page 2-25, Coral IPx 800 Cage Rear Panel
page 2-26, Coral IPx 800 Power Connection for AC Systems
5.
Insert the male plug of the AC power cord into the AC line outlet or primary
power receptacle designated for the system.
The AC power connector inside the cage includes dangerous currents when the AC
Power Supply Test
power cord is connected. See
3-6
6.
Verify that the PS19 AC power switch is turned OFF (downwards).
7.
Gently insert the PS19 AC power supply completely into its card slot. Push
8.
9.
Turn the PS19 AC power switch ON, and verify that the green Power indicator is
lit, while the red Alarm indicator is not lit. If the red alarm indicator illuminates,
see page 7-49, Troubleshooting (PS19 AC), in Chapter 7.
10. Turn OFF (downwards) the power switch on the front panel of the PS19 AC.
Power Supply Test
3-7
Figure 3-1 Internal View

of the Coral IPx 800 Cage
Configuration
jumpers
Power supply
multi-pin
connector
Door release
mechanism
Multi-pin
connectors
for cards
AC power
supply
connector
(PS19 AC)
Power Supply Test
Grounding wire
(for door)
3-8
Common Control Test
3.2
This section deals with the Common Control Test.
Coral circuit cards contain static-sensitive circuitry that could be damaged or destroyed
by electro-static discharge (ESD).
Control Card Initialization

1.
Remove power from the Coral system.

Verify that all the PS19 units in the system are turned OFF (downwards).
Inserting or removing the MEX-IP card into a cage that has been powered will damage
2.
Connect the static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and wear the strap.
3.
Verify that all control and peripheral cards in the main cage and expansion cages
protrude from the cage by approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).
4.
Remove the MEX-IP card from its slot and place it on a static protective surface.
5.
Verify that the DBX or CLA baby cards are not attached to MEX-IP interface
connectors J1 or J2. See Figure 3-2 for the location of the memory interface
connectors. See Figure 3-4 for the the CLA and DBX cards.
If installed, remove the CLA and/or the DBX baby cards, as described on page 8-1,
Common Control Test
the card. Verify that the power supply unit is switched OFF before inserting the MEX-IP.
Common Control Cards.

6.
Carefully remove the plastic insulation from under the lithium battery on the
MEX-IP card. See Figure 3-2.
3-9
7.
Insert the MEX-IP card fully into its card slot.
8.
Verify that the serial number on the SAU device matches the serial number on the
IMC8 card (except for the last digit).
Contact your Coral manufacturers representative if the numbers do not match.
9.
Attach the SAU to the connector on the front panel of the MEX-IP just below the
IMC8 flash memory card. See Figure 3-3. Use a #2 (1/8 or 4mm) straight-blade
screwdriver to tighten the two screws securing the SAU to the MEX-IP until snug.
10. Insert the IMC8 flash memory card into the drive on the front panel of the MEX-IP
just above the SAU device. See Figure 3-3.
Insert the IMC8 card with its data label facing right (that is, the control cards
exterior) so that the data can be read without removing the card.
11. Verify that the DIP switches on the front panel of the MEX-IP are set to the right.
12. Attach the Program Interface (PI) device cable to the KB0 programming port
connector on the front side of the MEX-IP card. Verify that the PI device is
configured to match the data rate, word length, parity, and stop bits of the KB0
port. Default settings for KB0 are 9600 bps, 8 data bit, no parity, and 1 stop bit,
respectively.
13. Turn ON the power switch on the PS19 unit of the main cage.
14. On the front panel of the PS19 unit, verify that the green Power indicator is lit,
while the red Alarm indicator is not lit. If the red alarm indicator illuminates, see:
page 7-12, Troubleshooting (PS19 DC),
page 7-33, Troubleshooting (PS19 DC-D),
page 7-49, Troubleshooting (PS19 AC), in Chapter 7.
15. On the front panel of the MEX-IP, verify that the decimal point (green LED) in the
numeric display illuminates.
16. If the following message appears on the PI device and is repeated continuously:
Common Control Test
For SERVICE/SOFTWARE installation menu HIT <CTRL I> NOW

*************************
CHK RAM
END CHK RAM
Custom Init Code...
NO CCS VERSION
The line that reads NO CCS VERSION indicates that no generic feature software
was detected in the IMC8 card. To load generic feature software into the IMC8
card, follow the procedure in Section 4.1 - Generic Feature Software Upgrade on
page 4-1.
3-10
17. If the following message appears on the PI device during system start-up:
*************************
CHK RAM
END CHK RAM
Custom Init Code...
CHECKING PROG-MEM
PROG-MEM IS O.K
CHECKING CODING MEMORY
CODING MEMORY IS O.K.
END CHECKING CODING MEMORY
CHECKING MEX CONTROLS
END CHECKING MEX CONTROLS
CHECKING SAU #
END CHECKING SAU #
Patch Loaded...
CHECKING CODING MEMORY

CODING MEMORY IS O.K.
END CHECKING CODING MEMORY
CHECKING MEX CONTROLS
END CHECKING MEX CONTROLS
CHECKING SAU #
END CHECKING SAU #
CHECK CHECKSUM...
END CHECK CHECKSUM
And the following second message appears after two or three minutes, following several
Common Control Test
short messages that appear during system start-up:

Initializing CCS ...
Partial initialization phase starting
System configuration identified ......
CCS is on the air ......

(ROOT)
CCS
xx.xx.xx
Copyright (c) 2001-yyyy ...............
NAME - (site name)
SAU #
-
3-11
Do the following:
a. If the second message appears, the system initialized properly and is capable of
processing calls. The version number of the generic feature software is indicated
where the x's appear in the line that reads
CCS xx.xx.xx.
b. If the version number shown on the PI does not match the version number
printed on the IMC8 flash card supplied with the system, perform the
procedure described in Section 4.1 - Generic Feature Software Upgrade on page
4-1, to install a new generic software version on the IMC8 card.
18. Turn OFF (downwards) the power switch on the front panel of the PS19.
19. If the CLA and/or the DBX cards are not used in the system, skip to Step 27
20. Remove the MEX-IP card from its slot and place it on a static protective surface.
21. Some Coral systems may require a DBX baby card to provide additional database
memory storage for a large or complex configuration.
a. If a DBX card is supplied with the system, install a DBX baby card on the
MEX-IP card. See Section 8.4, DBX Module on page 8-29 for details.
b. Carefully remove the plastic insulation from under the top contact of the
lithium battery holder on the DBX card (refer to Figure 3-4).
22. If a CLA card is supplied with the system, install the CLA baby card on the
MEX-IP card (refer to Figure 3-4 and see Section 8.5, CLA Module on page 8-37 for
details).
23. Verify that the plastic insulator protecting the top contact of the battery holder on
the MEX-IP and DBX cards are removed. See Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-4.
24. Insert the MEX-IP card fully into its card slot in the main cage.
25. Verify that the DIP switches on the front panel of the MEX-IP are set to the right.
26. Attach the Program Interface (PI) device cable to the KB0 programming port
connector on front panel of MEX-IP. Verify that the PI device is configured as in
Step 12
27. Insert the HDC card fully into its card slot in the main cage.
Common Control Test
28. In the main cage, turn ON the PS19 power switch, and verify that the green
Power indicator is lit, while the red Alarm indicator is not lit.
If the red alarm indicator illuminates, see:
29. On the front panel of the MEX-IP, verify that the decimal point (green LED) in the
numeric display illuminates.
3-12
30. Verify that the following two messages appear on the PI screen:
*************************
CHK RAM
END CHK RAM
Custom Init Code...
The second message may appear after two or three minutes, following several
short messages (as described in Step 17) that appear during system start-up:
(ROOT)
CCS
xx.xx.xx
Copyright (c) 2001-yyyy .........................
NAME - (site name)
SAU #
The second message indicates that the system has initialized properly and is
capable of processing calls. After entering the password, the version level of the
generic feature software is indicated where the x's appear in the line that reads
CCS xx.xx.xx.
Common Control Test
31. Insert the PX card fully into slot 1 of the first IPx 800X expansion cage.
3-13
Figure 3-2 MEX-IP

Memory Interface
Connector Locations
BATTERY INSULATOR
(PULL AS SHOWN
TO REMOVE)
REMOVE
BEFORE
USE
Database Memory
Backup Battery
IMC8 Card
(Software & Database
Flash Memory)
1st DBX/
4th DBX/
CLA
Connector
J1
Common Control Test
MEX-IP
3-14
J2
2nd DBX/
3rd DBX
Connector
MEX-IP Front
MEX-IP
Status Display
Green LED
IMC8 Release Button
IMC8 Software and Database Card
Software Authorization
Unit (SAU) Connector
Interrupt CPU Push-button

(Authorized Personnel Only)
SAU
INT
RST
Reset CPU Push-button

Maintenance DIP Switches
(Always Set To The Right)
KB0 RS-232E PI Programming Port
Common Control Test
Expansion Panel For CLA
Figure 3-3
Panel
3-15
Figure 3-4 CLA and

DBX Baby Card Layouts
FCLA
CoraLINK
Status Indicator
LED
LED
Reset Pushbutton
COM 1
Maintenance
RS-232 Port
RST
Compact
Flash Disk
(CFD)
memory
le
ule
RJ-45 Network
Interface Ethernet
10/100Base-T
od
M
LA
u
od
68
reM
Co
CF
LINE
100Base-T
DIP Switches Are All

Set To The Right For
Normal Operation
CLA
REMOVE
BEFORE
USE
Common Control Test
DBX
3-16
Battery Insulator
(pull As Shown To Remove)
Memory Lithium Battery Condition Test

If the start-up tests detect that the voltage level of a lithium backup battery on the
MEX-IP or DBX card is insufficient to reliably maintain the memory contents in
the event of power failure, one of the following messages will appear:
MEX-IP - BATTERY LOW
or
J1 DOWN BATTERY LOW
These messages indicate that the MEX-IP card or DBX card battery has an insufficient
voltage level. The first message indicates that the battery located on the MEX-IP card has
an insufficient voltage level, while the second message indicates that the battery on a DBX
baby card (in this case, the card attached to memory connector J1) should be replaced. In
this event the Coral system database is in jeopardy of being lost during a power failure. If
this message appears, the database should be saved and the batteries replaced at the first
opportunity.
To ensure that the system database is not lost, save the database to the IMC8 flash memory
card via the database controls branch of the system database (PI Route: ROOT,0,10,2,2,0).
See Section 4.2, System Database Control on page 4-5for details. If the system loses power or
is reset for any reason and the database loses memory, the system will copy the database
from the IMC8 card into database memory as the system restarts.
Once the system database is safely saved on the IMC8 card, power to the Coral system
may be turned off at a time that will cause the least disruption of service to the user. At
that time, the battery (or batteries) on the MEX-IP may be replaced and the system
restarted.
Common Control Test
To replace the lithium battery, insert the new battery with the + (positive)
symbol appearing on top.
Explosion and Environmental Hazards.

There is a danger of explosion if the battery is replaced incorrectly.
Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to requirements specified by the battery
manufacturer and/or local regulatory agencies.
3-17
Common Control Test
3
3-18
Introduction
This section describes how to initialize the peripheral cards. Perform this section only
after the MEX-IP control card in the main cage has been initialized properly. If the
peripheral cards are inserted before the MEX-IP control card, they will not initialize
properly.
The card installation is described on page 3-20, Rules for Inserting a Coral Circuit Card.
The Coral IPx 800 system peripheral cards installation and initialization procedure
includes the following steps:
1.
Preparing for Initialization, on page 3-23
2.
Main Cage Initialization, on page 3-23
3.
First Expansion Cage Initialization, on page 3-24
4.
Second Expansion Cage Initialization, on page 3-24
Before proceeding, verify that all the PS19 units in the expansion cages are turned
OFF.
Shared Service and Peripheral Card Test
3.3
3-19
Rules for Inserting a Coral Circuit Card

1.
Connect the static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and wear the
strap..
Coral circuit cards contain static-sensitive circuitry that could be damaged or destroyed
by electro-static discharge (ESD).
2.
To insert a circuit card completely into its slot, gently slide the card straight into
the card slot. A slight resistance is felt as the multi-pin connectors on the circuit
card meet mating connectors on the backplane and engage.
3.
Push against the ejectors until the front panel of the card is flush with the front
frame of the card cage.
Do not force the circuit card into the slot. If more than slight resistance is encountered,
remove the circuit card and examine the connectors for bent pins or interfering debris.
Never place a card in a slot other than the dedicated one. Refer to Table 2-10 on page
2-41 to determine peripheral interface card types.
4.
On the front panel of the PS19 unit, verify that the green Power indicator is lit,
while the red Alarm indicator is not lit.
If the red alarm indicator illuminates, see:
5.
On the front panel of the peripheral card, verify that the red diagnostic LED (near
the top of the card) illuminates. The LED remains illuminated continuously until
the card receives its database from the system. After a few seconds, verify that the
LED extinguishes. An extinguished diagnostic LED indicates that the card has
initialized properly.
If the LED remains on continuously for more than two or three minutes, either
there is a conflict between the system database and its authorizations, or the card
may be faulty. Refer to the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual for
further details on LED indication.
3-20
6.
Attach the Program Interface (PI) device cable to the KB0 programming port
connector on the front panel of the MEX-IP if not already attached. The
installation of shared service and peripheral interface cards into a Coral system
has considerable impact on the system database. Refer to Chapter 6 of the Program
Interface & Database Reference Manual for more information. Using the PI, verify
that each of the parameters detailed below contain the appropriate information.
7.
Access the card list branch of the PI (Route: CLIS) to verify that the cards are
properly recognized and initialized by the Coral IPx 800 main cage MEX-IP
processor.
The following table appears on the PI terminal:
shelf/slot
I_TYPE
P_TYPE
CDB
0 / SLOT No.
CARD_NAME CARD_NAME XXX
version
subversion
status
XXX
XXX
ACTIVE
The following is an explanation of the CLIS fields:

Shelf Number ............ In Coral IPx 800 system, the main cage is designated shelf #0; the
first expansion cage is labeled shelf #1; the second expansion cage
is labeled shelf #2. the Master main cage is designated shelf #0;
the Slave main cage is designated shelf #8; the odd expansion
cages are labeled shelf #1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15; the even expansion
cage is labeled shelf #2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 14.
Slot Number .............. Identifies the slot location of the indicated card for display. In the
main cage, the range of slot numbers is 1-8; in the expansion
cage, the range of slot numbers is 1-10.
I_TYPE........................ This field should show the required card name.
If the I_Type lists a different card type this indicates that the card
card must be relocated to a clear card slot (where the I_Type field
shows NO_CARD) or the current card slot assignment must be
cleared throughout the PI.
P_TYPE....................... Shows the card type currently located in the slot.
CDB............................. Allows modifying the card database set assigned by the system.
When not applicable for the card, --- is displayed in this field.
Version, Subversion.. Provides information on the card software set loaded. For display
purposes only.
Status .......................... The information provided in this field helps you to troubleshoot
card initialization problems. See Table 3-1.
Verify that the cards are identified properly in the card list branch of the system
database
(Route: CLIS). The different card slot STATUS messages are described
below in Table 3-1.
8.
slot has been previously initialized by a different card type. That
3-21
9.
Verify that the STATUS field indicates ACTIVE for each of the cards installed.
If another message is displayed, see Table 3-1. For a complete list of card slot
status messages, see Chapter 6 of the the Program Interface & Database Reference
Manual.
Displayed
Message
Description
Technical
Recommendations
ACTIVE
Initialization was successfully

completed.
None
ACTIVE/P
Card is partially active because there

are not enough resources to support
the other sub circuits on an
8DRCM/8DRCF card or not all tone
generators are being used on the iDSP
card.
Readjust SIZES to
support unsupported
sub circuits for
8DRCM/8DRCF card.
Partial Active for the
iDSP card is not
critical. Readjust the
parameter value only
when needed.
REPLACED
P_TYPE and I_TYPE are not

compatible.
Both i_type and p_type fields should
show the required card name.
The card slot has previously been
initialized by a different card type (see
the entry for I_TYPE field, as well).
Install proper card or

enter NO_CARD in
the I_TYPE option.
WAIT_DB
Card has not received database, or

has not reported initialization.
Continue waiting
NO_RESOURCES
Insufficient system memory to initialize

card.
Check SIZES
FAULT
HDLC problem
Check HDLC wiring
UNAUTHORIZED
The SAU ports are limited and

therefore the card is not authorized for
use in this system.
Install an updated
version of the SAU
with the appropriate
amount of ports
added. Ask your
dealer for an
authorized upgrade.
Table 3-1
Card Slot
Status Messages
3-22
System Initialization
Preparing for Initialization
After the software has been installed and initialized:
1.
In the expansion cages, verify that the PS19 or PS500 power switch is in the OFF
position (turned downwards).
Before proceeding, verify that all power supply units within the expansion
cages are turned OFF. If the expansion cages are turned ON before the main
cage, the peripheral cards within the expansion cages will not initialize
properly.
2.
Check the position of shared service and peripheral interface cards that will be
inserted into the system card cage. Observe any order previously directed or any
established convention of the distributor. See page 2-39, Shared Service and
Peripheral Interface Card Installation and use the Card Placement Diagram, as
described on:
3.
page 2-42, Coral IPx 800M Main Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram
page 2-43, Coral IPx 800X 1st Exp. Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram
page 2-44, Coral IPx 800X 2nd Exp. Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram
page 2-45, Coral IPx 500X 1st Exp. Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram
page 2-46, Coral IPx 500X 2nd Exp. Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram
Verify that all shared service and peripheral cards in the main cage and expansion
4.
In the main cage, attach the Program Interface (PI) device cable to KB0
programming port connector on the front side of the MEX-IP.
Main Cage Initialization

1.
Verify that the MEX-IP control card has been initialized properly.
2.
Insert the peripheral cards completely into their card slots. See page 3-20, Rules for
Inserting a Coral Circuit Card.
Insert the cards fully, one by one, from right to left (slot# 1-9) in adjacent card
slots, so that the installation corresponds with the uniform numbering plan.
cages protrude from the cage by approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).
3-23
First Expansion Cage Initialization

1.
In a system with two expansion cages; verify that the PX card is fully inserted in
slot 1 of the first IPx 800X expansion cage.
2.
Turn ON the power supply unit in the first expansion cage.
Turn on the power supply unit within the expansion cage only after powering
the main cage and verifying that the control card has initialized properly,
otherwise the cards in the expansion cages may not initialize properly.
3.
4.
On the front panel of the PS19 unit, verify that the green power indicator is lit,
while the red alarm indicator is not lit.
Second Expansion Cage Initialization

1.
Turn ON the power supply unit in the second expansion cage.
Turn on the power supply unit within the expansion cage only after powering
the main cage and the first expansion cage and verifying that the control
card has initialized properly, otherwise the cards in the expansion cages may
not initialize.
2.

3.
On the front panel of the PS19 unit, verify that the green power indicator is lit,
while the red alarm indicator is not lit.
3-24
PS 19 DC-D Backup Power Supply Check

The purpose of this procedure is to check that the PS19 DC-D card is capable of
supplying power to another cage via a H719 DC-D cable (Catalog Number
7244-8001907).
To check the PS19 DC-D card, do one of the following:
If the system includes one PS19 DC-D card for every two cages, insert at least one
peripheral card into the cage that does NOT include the PS19 DC-D card. Verify
that the shared service card or peripheral card initializes.
If the system includes a PS19 DC-D for every cage (for backup), remove the H719
cable from the rear panel of one of the cages, and insert at least one peripheral
card or shared service card into a cage slot. Reconnect the H719 cable. Verify that
the card initializes.
For further information see page 7-33, Troubleshooting (PS19 DC-D).
3-25
NOTES:
3-26
Installation Wrap-up
3.4
This section describes how to close all equipment and prepare the system for normal
operation.
1.
Assemble the cage front door. See page 6-25, Assembling the Door.
2.
Close the cage front door. See page 6-23, Closing the Door.
3.
Close the MDF cover.
4.
Repeat step 1to step 3 for all system cages.
5.
Remove any other items from the shipping containers.
6.
Remove all empty packages, crates, and debris.
7.
Verify that you have provided all of the necessary instructions and documentation
to the system operator.
Once the system is completely installed and operating, it is no longer

necessary to keep the shipping containers.
3-27
NOTES:
3-28
Chapter 4
Software Installation
Procedure
4.1 Generic Feature Software ...................................4-1
Cor
Coral
4.2 System Database Control....................................4-5

4.3 MEX-IP Status Display Codes ..........................4-13
Generic Feature Software
4.1
Upgrade
0
Introduction
The Coral IPx 800 system is delivered to the site with factory-loaded software on IMC8
card. The IMC8 card is a 8MB Flash Memory. See Section 8.3 - IMC8 Flash-Erase Software
Memory Unit. The IMC8 card is installed on the MEX-IP card.
The software initialization procedure is described in Section 3.2 - Common Control Test.
The IMC8 card contains three types of data:
Generic Feature Software Version and Boot Code
Authorization
Database Backup
The IMC8 card can be inserted into a PC slot using any PCMCIA application adapter
for loading a new Coral software version.
Whenever an updated version of the Coral software is released, the upgrade is
delivered to the sites either on 3.5 diskettes, e-mail, or via other electronic media file
transfer. The upgrade is contained in a self-extracting compressed file, specific for the
site.
The upgraded generic feature software must be extracted by a PC using the FMprog
tool, and then written from the PC hard disk into the IMC8 card. The FMprog is a tool
for Coral dealers who install, upgrade and maintain Coral systems using flash memory
Generic Feature Software Upgrade
cards. For FMprog application, see the FMprog PC-Utility Reference Manual. This
reference manual describes how to install and operate the FMprog-Utility.
4-1
Upgrading Using FMprog PC-Utility
Use FMprog version 5.xx and later. Otherwise, the Coral will not initialize.
The upgrade of the generic feature software involves three main steps:
1.
Installing the FMprog-Utility (version 5.xx and later)
2.
Extracting the new Coral generic feature software file into the PC hard disk
3.
Programming the new generic software upgrade to the IMC8 card
The FMprog-utility can be used to backup the Coral software into PCMCIA cards. The
backup file is in a binary format and includes all the software components of the
specific Coral system from which it was copied (i.e. the Coral generic software version,
the switch authorization and the database). The manufacturer highly recommends to
keep a copy of the current files located at each customer site. Copies should be made
per customer site since each site has its unique set of software configuration, i.e. its
main software version, switch authorization and database, as well as specific Software
Authorization Unit (SAU) information. Should the need arise to reinstate or copy
systems files, copies of all systems files exist and are available for use via the
FMprog-Utility.
Use the FMprog-Utility to:
Manage your new database versions
Load Coral Generic Version, Authorization and Database information on to

flash memory cards
Extract Version, Authorization and Database information from source files
Removing the IMC8 Card
Before each installation or removal of an IMC8 card from the Coral IPx 800, press the
RESET button on the MEX-IP card.
Do not remove the IMC8 card from the MEX-IP when P is illuminated on the numeric
data display. The MEX-IP numeric status display indicates various operating and error
states of the Coral IPx 800 system. A P appears during software installation or backup.
To remove the IMC8 card from the Coral IPx 800 system:
1.
4-2
Press the Reset button on the MEX-IP card, as shown on Figure 3-3 on page 3-15.
0Press the Release button on the MEX-IP card, to remove the IMC8 card.
Installing an Upgraded IMC8 Card

This section provides instructions on inserting the IMC8 flash memory card after it has
been programmed with a new or upgraded software version.
Creating a Binary Backup of the Database

Before installing an IMC8 card with a new generic software version, it is strongly
recommended that you make a binary backup of the database. The binary backup
must be done by a PC using the Binary Backup PC-Utility. The Binary Backup is a tool
for Coral technicians who install, upgrade and maintain Coral systems. See the
Database Binary Backup PC Utility Reference Manual for further details.
Installing the IMC8 Card
Before each installation or removal of an IMC8 card from the Coral IPx 800, press the
RESET button on the MEX-IP card.
Do not remove the IMC8 card from the MEX-IP when P is illuminated. The MEX-IP
numeric status display indicates various operating and error states of the Coral IPx 800
system. A P appears during software installation or backup.
1.
Press the Release button on the PCMCIA drive of the PC to remove the new IMC8
2.
Press the Reset button on the MEX-IP card.
3.
Press the Release button on the MEX-IP card to remove the old IMC8 card.
4.
Verify that the write-protect tab (if provided) on the new IMC8 card is in the
card.
write-enabled position. The IMC8 card should not be write-protected.

5.
Insert the new IMC8 card containing the upgraded generic software version.
6.
Press the Reset button on the MEX-IP card.
7.
Verify that the following two messages appear on the PI device:

*************************
CHK RAM
END CHK RAM
Custom Init Code...
The second message may appear after two or three minutes, following several short
messages that appear during system start-up:
4-3

(ROOT)
CCS
xx.xx.xx
Copyright (c) 2001-xxxx ...............
NAME
- (site name)
SAU #
After the second message appears, the system initialized properly and is capable of
processing calls. After entering the password, the version level of the generic feature
software is indicated where the x's appear in the line that reads CCS xx.xx.xx.
8.
The new IMC8 card does not include a backup of the current database. To make a
backup of the database, perform the procedure described on page 4-6, Saving to
IMC8.
The generic feature software contained in the IMC8 is coded to function with one (and
only one) SAU, which must be installed on the MEX-IP card. The SAU also includes
information regarding the features and the highest Coral version authorized to be used
in the specific system. If the serial number of the SAU does not match the serial number
coded into the generic software, or if the generic feature software contained in the IMC8
is higher than authorized by the SAU, or if the SAU is removed from the MEX-IP, the
Coral system automatically ceases call processing after 14 days.
The program contained on the IMC8 permits the generic software to be accessed even
if the serial number of the SAU is incorrect or the SAU is absent entirely. If, however, the
Coral determines that the SAU is missing or not correct, a message appears during the
procedure warning that the system will not operate without the proper SAU. This
provision allows the generic feature software and/or feature authorizations to be
upgraded on an IMC8 card in another distant system, then installed at the proper
system by replacing the existing IMC8 card from the other distant system containing the
upgrade.
4-4
4.2
System Database Control
During normal system operation, the configuration database may be saved to a file on
the IMC8 card for permanent storage. The system may also be programmed to save
the database to IMC8 automatically on a daily basis, at a particular time.
A saved database file may be loaded at any time into the system database memory.
This is a way to restore the database into the RAM of a new MEX-IP (and DBX)
memory card.
Once the database in the system has been constructed, copy the database onto the
IMC8 card. For more detailed information, see Chapter 21 of the Program Interface
Reference Manual.
Accessing the Database FLASH Menu

1.
If a session has not already been established, establish a PI programming session

by entering a PI password.
Select the Database Flash Menu (Route: ROOT,0,10,2,2) branch. The Database
Flash menu appears, as follows:
FLASH -MENU
0
1
2
3
4
SAVE
LOAD DBS
SHOW FILE INFO
AUTO BACKUP
ERASE
2.
4-5
Saving to IMC8
The Database Save feature allows the system database to be copied to IMC8 at any
time. The procedure is as follows:
1.
Verify that the system time and date are correct (press Control-T to check). Update
through the Time and Date branch (Route: TIME) of the system database if
necessary.
2.
From the Database Flash Menu press 0 to save the database to a file on the IMC8
card. The system prompts for the selection of a destination file number, either
DB0.DEF or DB1.DEF, with:
DEST FILE (0,1) - [0]
The DB0.DEF file may be saved automatically at a preset time each day, and so is
usually more up-to-date than the DB1.DEF file. See page 4-11, Automatic Daily
Backup. The DB1.DEF file is referred to as the technician copy of the database, and
should be saved each time installation or maintenance personnel make changes to
the database.
3.
Press 0 or 1, according to the table below, to begin saving the system database to a
file. The default entry is 0, or DB0.DEF.
4.
Database File Name
PI Entry
File Description
DB0.DEF
Backup automatically at a preset time
DB1.DEF
Manual backup, typically used by a technician
When the prompt EXECUTE (Y/N) - [N] appears, type Y to begin the save
process, or N to cancel and return to the Database IMC8 menu. The PI command
prompt (*:) will return immediately, but the system will process the command as a
background (low priority) task.
Saving the database to a file generally takes several seconds. While the database is
being saved, it is important to note that changes to the system configuration (such as:
changing the system to Night Service, setting a Call Forward or Do Not Disturb
instruction at a station, even turning on or off Background Music at a key set) are
prohibited until the database save process is completed.
If the system is unable to save the database, one of several messages will be
generated by the system.

When the flash memory space is insufficient for saving the database (DBS), the
following message will appear:
4-6
NO SPACE FOR SAVING DATA BASE

When at least one of the flags cannot be recognized, the following message will
appear:
CORRUPTED
DBS
When the backup is valid, the save operation continues with:
Caution: Previous backup will be lost:
Proceed with backup (Y/N)
[N]
Type Y to continue the save operation. The following message appears:
SAVING ........
If the backup file is saved successfully, the following message appears:
SAVE OK .....
If the backup file save operation fails, the following message appears:
SAVE FAILED !!
During the save operation, no database updating will occur.
5.
4-7
Loading (Restoring) from IMC8

A system database stored in IMC8 can be loaded into the database memory on the
MEX-IP card at any time.
Loading the database from IMC8 generally takes several minutes. During
this process the Coral system is non-operational.
Loading a database can be useful for installing the database of an existing system into
the database memory of another system that will have a substantially similar
configuration. Similarly, a database can be created by programming a system off-line at
another location (perhaps at the distributor's facilities). The database can then be
loaded at a convenient time at the intended site.
Loading a database from IMC8 into the system database memory destroys the original
database information stored in the database memory and overwrites it with information
in the IMC8 database file. Once overwritten, the original database cannot be recovered.
1.
From the Database Flash Menu, press 1 to load a database from IMC8.
The system will display the following message:
CAUTION: Database contents will be lost & system will
restart !!!
Proceed with restore (Y/N) ? [N]
2.
If Y is selected, the system prompts to select a source file number, either DB0.DEF
or DB1.DEF with:
FILE (0/1) - [0]
3.
Press 0 or 1, according to the table below, to begin loading the database stored in
IMC8.
Database File Name
PI Entry
File Description
DB0.DEF
Daily backup automatically at a preset time
DB1.DEF
Technician copy for manual backup
The following prompt appears:

EXECUTE (Y/N) - [N]
4.
If you type Y, the system goes through the following retrieval conditions check
sequence:
4-8
a. Verify that internal flags are present in the database to be loaded.

b. Verify that the database is not corrupted (the system executes the Checksum test
procedure).
If the procedure checking the database (DBS) retrieval conditions found the above
conditions fulfilled, the following message will appear:
Restore DBS.......
Upon finishing the restoring procedure, the system reports:
Restore Successful
Next, the system will execute the partial initialization.
If the conditions mentioned above were not met, one of the following messages
will be displayed:
Operation denied DB0.DEF is not O.K.
or
Operation denied DB1.DEF is not O.K.
If only one backup file was present when the technician requested DB1.DEF
retrieval, the following message appears:
Operation denied, Load DBS available only to DB0.DEF
Press Y to begin loading the database, or press N to return to the Database Menu.
Loading the database from a file generally takes several minutes. When the
database has been loaded, the system performs a Partial Initialization and begins
processing calls.
5.
4-9
Show File Info

This option displays the list of backed up files stored on the IMC8 card.
From the Database Flash menu, press 2 to display the list of backed up files. The
following prompt appears:
Execute (Y/N)? - [N]
Type Y. A report appears with the following columns:
File Name
Displays a list of the DB0.DEF and DB1.DEF files.

If only one file is present, DB0.DEF will appear.
Version
File version.
Last Date
Last backup date.
Last-Time
Last backup time.
File-Status
OK - the backed up file is valid
Invalid - the backed up file is invalid.
4-10
Automatic Daily Backup

The system configuration database can be automatically saved to a database file on the
IMC8 at a preset time each day. Use AutoBackup to automatically save the database.
During automatic daily backup the database is saved to DB0.DEF.
1.
From the Database Menu, press 3 to set the Auto Backup time. The following
prompt appears:
NUMBER OF DAYS BETWEEN BACKUPS [1..to..255, N]
Set the number of days between automatic backups. The default is set to 7 days
between backups, so that an automatic backup file is created every week. If no
automatic backups are needed, enter N for creating manual backups.
Selection of the backup type is required; either a manual backup performed by the
technician or an automatic daily backup. The default after First Initialization is
automatic daily backup every week.
2.
Enter N to enable the manual backup or number between 1 to 255 to enable a

daily backup.
The system prompts for the time of day with:
SET AUTO BACKUP TIME:
TIME:
3.
Enter the time of day to automatically save the system database in 24 hour,
military time format. Use 24:00 for midnight and 24:01 to 24:59 for times between
midnight and 1:00 a.m. The default time is 01:30, or 1:30 a.m.
The system will return to the Database Backup Menu. Press 0 to return to the
Database Menu.
4.
4-11
Erase Flash Memory

This function enables erasing of backed up files stored on the IMC8 card:
Flash DBS backup will be lost.
1.
From the Database Menu, press 4 to erase the Flash Memory.

The following prompt appears:
Proceed with Erase (0/1/A/N/) ? [N]
2.
Specify one of the options, as follows:

0 - erases DB0.DEF.
1 - erases DB1.DEF.
A - erases both DB0.DEF and DB1.DEF.
N - cancels the operation.
After you specify 0, 1, or A, the following message appears:
Erasing ..
Upon completion of the erasing the following message appears:
Erase Completed ....
If the erasing operation was not successful the following message appears:
Erase failed !!
4-12
MEX-IP Status Display Codes
4.3
0
Numeric Status Display

The MEX-IP numeric status display (see Figure 3-3 on page 3-15) indicates various
operating and error states of the Coral IPx 800 system, and it can provide valuable
information to assist in the maintenance of the system. Table 4-1 lists the various status
indications and their corresponding meaning.
A . (dot) appears during normal system operation.
A "0" appears on the status display whenever the system is off-line for maintenance
testing, or to install or update the generic software.
A "b" in the status display indicates that a backup battery on the MEX-IP or on a DBX
card no longer has sufficient energy to maintain the memory circuitry in the event
system power is lost. Each time a programming session is started from the Program
Interface, any faulty battery is identified. The system database should be saved as soon
as possible to an FM unit, and the faulty battery must be replaced as soon as the
system can be shut down, to ensure continued system reliability.
An "F" indicates that the Main Processor has been interrupted to prevent database
corruption during a power fluctuation. This condition should clear itself momentarily.
Do not remove the IMC8 card from the MEX-IP when P is illuminated.
All other error status indications generally indicate a more serious problem, and they
are likely to be accompanied by considerable system malfunction. Should an error
indication appear not to affect system operation, save the database to DB0.DEF
immediately. Follow the instructions on page 4-6, Saving to IMC8.
When the system can be restarted without disrupting service, press the INT push
button, followed by the RESET push button on the front panel of the MEX-IP.
A P appears during software installation or backup.
4-13
Pressing INT and RESET interrupts all calls in progress and causes the system to
initialize, possibly discarding the database information stored in the database memory
and reloading the database from IMC8.
Should other symptoms of system malfunction also be present with an error

indication, the error indications will assist maintenance personnel in determining the
nature of the fault.
Table 4-1
MEX-IP
Status Display Code
Status
Display
System Status
Normal System Operation
Off-Line Monitor/Diagnostics Mode
1,2,3,4,5,6
Appear Briefly During Initialization

Lithium Backup Battery (MEX-IP or DBX) Low
Flash Memory (IMC8) Checksum Error
Map RAM, Coding PROM, or Memory Configuration Error
AC Fail Active (System halted due to power fluctuation)
Software Authorization Unit (SAU) Missing or Malfunctioning
Programming the flash memory during software installation and backup
4-14
Chapter 5
5.1 Main Distribution Frame ......................................5-1
Cor
Coral
5.2 External Equipment .............................................5-5

5.3 Protection Devices ............................................ 5-11
5.4 Power Fail (PF) Transfer Circuits ......................5-17
5.5 Terminal Data Communication Ports .................5-21
5.6 I/O Connections Via Front Panel .......................5-25
5.7 I/O RJ-45 Connections Via Rear Panel .............5-41
5.8 I/O Connections Via Champ Connectors...........5-49
Main Distribution Frame
5.1
5
This chapter describes the MDF and the pinout connections to the IPx 800 cage and
external equipment. The main distribution frame (MDF) is the wiring interface for the
Coral IPx system and associated peripheral equipment.
The MDF is often located adjacent to other signaling systems, such as:
Paging and public address systems
Voice messaging systems
Alarm and monitoring systems
Closed circuit television
Property management systems
Building and energy management systems
Therefore, care should be taken to plan the MDF layout before fastening components
Trunk circuits
Wired and wireless station equipment
Database programming terminals
Report printers
Music and/or audio sources
External public address or paging equipment
Recording devices
I/O Connections in the Coral

Most connections to the Coral cabinet are made using standard, 25-wire pair, I/O
(input/output) connectors to the Coral IPx 800 rear panel. Cables from the Coral rear
panel are connected to the MDF and from there to punch blocks. Individual trunk
and station interface circuits can then be cross-connected from Coral I/O punch blocks
to other punch blocks that terminate trunk circuits, station wiring, and other external
equipment. See Figure 5-1.
5-1
to the wall or mounting surface, such as:
In some cases, connections are made via RJ-45 or DA-15S connectors on the front panel
of a Coral circuit card. For example, the UDT, UGW, IPG, PRI, T1, and 30T digital
trunk interfaces. See page 5-25, I/O Connections Via Front Panel on page 5-25. Similarly,
the KB0 database Programming Interface (PI) port appears on a DB9 connector on the
MEX-IP Common Control cards. Plan for permanent wiring to these card types
accordingly.
In some cases, connections are made via RJ-45 connectors on the rear panel of the card
cage. For example, the UGW (layout B1), UGW-E, PRI (layout UDT C), T1 (layout
UDT C), and 30T (layout UDT C). See page 5-41, I/O RJ-45 Connections Via Rear
Panel on page 5-25.
Tip:
It is recommended to terminate all the I/O connectors available in the
system on punch blocks at the MDF even if some cables are not initially
used. This saves time and effort when the system expands.
MDF Size and Location Considerations

In standard MDF wiring convention, ancillary equipment wiring (key systems, paging,
etc.) is placed to the left of the MDF. Coral I/O cables are placed next to them (on the
left). Next left are protection devices (if any). The outermost cables (on the left) are the
Building Entrance cables (UG, underground, demarcation point cables). Station and
other internal building wiring is placed on the right side of the MDF. This order
ensures the shortest path for block to block cross connect wiring and minimizes
overlap.
Tip:
Anticipated expansion should be taken into consideration (external and
internal cables, protective devices, station wiring, etc.) when planning the
MDF. If a system is installed at near capacity, the MDF should be laid out so
that a move to a larger Coral cabinet can be made easily.
5-2
Figure 5-1 MDF

Connections
5-3
TIP and Ring Wiring

Some discontinued station equipment using circuits from 2SD, 8SD, 2SK, 4SK and 8SK
cards (as well as some old single line telephones) are polarity sensitive. The
equipment will malfunction if polarity is reversed. See Figure 5-2.
In addition, when upgrading from Coral FlexiCom systems to Coral IPx 800, 3000,
4000; in Coral FlexiCom wiring, wire pair TIP conductors are placed below the pair's
RING conductors, and in Coral IPx 800, 3000, 4000 wiring, all wire pair TIP conductors
are placed above the pair's RING conductors on the punch block.
Figure 5-2 Coral IPx
Reversing Cross-Connect
Detail
CORAL
I/O PUNCH BLOCK
CROSSCONNECT WIRE
CORAL END
REVERSED
5-4
STATION/TRUNK END
NORMAL
STATION WIRING or
TRUNK NETWORK INTERFACE
External Equipment
5.2
5
Station Equipment
Wired Stations
Connections to Coral IPx 800 system station equipment are established by
cross-connecting the station circuit from the appropriate Coral IPx 800 I/O cable punch
block to the corresponding station wiring punch block.
Table 5-1 lists the various station interface cards available for the Coral system, the
type of station equipment that the card supports, and the number of wire pairs
required by the station interface.
Station wiring between the Coral IPx 800 system MDF and the station equipment
should contain at least 2, and preferably 4 wire pairs to ensure adequate wiring
capacity. At the station location, the station wiring should be terminated with a
modular, six position, telephone jack, containing at least 4 conductors (pins 2, 3, 4, and
5).
Figure 5-3 illustrates typical jack configurations with wire designations for four station
types:
2-wire SLT single-line telephones and digital station sets (FlexSet, APDL, CPA,
GKT, DKT, DST, 2-wire DIM, and VDM) need only connect Tip [T] and Ring [R] or
<UpA> and <UpB> as shown.
FlexSet 280 series or FlexSet APDL units with PEX or PEX+APA, DKT 2000 sets
with PEX or APA, or VDM need an extra 2 wires when power is supplied through
the line connector. The polarity of this connection is irrelevant. When using the
designations are listed under the wire color in plain text, VDK, 4W-DIM, and TIM
designations are listed in parentheses ( ).
For peripheral device installation, refer to the Coral Terminal Equipment Installation
Manual.
To prevent a potential shock hazard to station users and damage to the system, make
sure that station circuits extended over cables that exit the building are adequately
External Equipment
TPS (single unit Telephone Power Supply), no additional wires are required. EKT
protected from lightning and surge currents. See Protection Devices on page 5-11 for
protective device specifications.
5-5
Table 5-1
Station
Interface Wire Pair
Requirements
Station Interface
Card Type
Supported Station Equipment
Pairs
Required
8SM
Standard Magneto (Field) Telephone Sets
8SA, 8SLS, 8SLSipx,

16SLS, 16SLSipx,
16SH-LL,
24SA, 24SLS,
4SH/S*, 8SH/S*
Standard Single-Line Telephone (SLT) Sets,

SLT Sets with Message Waiting Lamp
8SFT, 8SFTipx,
16SFT, 16SFTipx,
24SFT,
8SKD*, 8SVD*,
8SDT*,
16SKD*, 16SDT*,
24SDT*
FlexSet, APDL, CPA, GKT, DKT, DST, APA, PEX,

PEX+APA
FlexSet 280 series with PEX,

FlexSet 280S/APDL with PEX or PEX+APA,
DKT 2000/APDL with PEX or APA,
CPA;
for optional external power via line connector pins

2 and 5 (see Coral Terminal Equipment Installation
Manual).
2SK*, 4SK*, 8SK**
EKT*, VIC* (Vision Impaired Console), KSI*, EIS*,

ACC, ACC-R, SDU, QLD, QND Special Application
Devices
2SD*, 8SD*
VDK*, 4W-DIM*, TIM*, CoraLAN*.
SKW/x
RBS (Radio Base Station) for CoralAIR wireless

handset
8SKK, 16SKK
RBS (Radio Base Station) for FlexAir wireless

handset
LAN connection
With power over LAN type-A
FlexSet-IP 280S,
Coral Sentinel
External Equipment
* discontinued, no longer available
5-6
Figure 5-3 Modular

Wired Station Jack
Wiring Diagram
654321
Pin 5
Yellow
DR (DRR),
FlexSet/DKT - 48VDC
Pin 2
Black
DT (DTR),
FlexSet/DKT + 48VDC
Pin 4
Green
AT (DTT),
[T] <UpA>
Pin 3
Red
AR (DRT),
<UpB> [R]
Pin 4
Green
AT (DTT),
[T] <UpA>
Pin 3
Red
AR (DRT),
<UpB> [R]
New Style Surface Jack
Pin 2
Black
DT (DTR),
FlexSet/DKT + 48VDC
Pin 5
Yellow
DR (DRR),
FlexSet/DKT - 48VDC
SE625B Wall Jack
Pin 4
Green
AT (DTT),
<UpA> [T]
Pin 3
Red
AR (DRT),
<UpB> [R]
Pin 2
Black
DT (DTR),
FlexSet/DKT + 48VDC
Pin 5
Yellow
DR (DRR),
FlexSet/DKT - 48VDC
Wht / Grn
DT (DRT),
Blu / Wht
AR (DRT),
[R] <UpB>
TIA T568B (AT&T)
Wht / Blu
AT (DTT),
[T] <UpA>
Org / Wht
DR (DRR),
Blu / Wht
AR (DRT),
[R] <UpB>
Wht / Org
DT (DRT),
TIA T568A
Grn / Wht
DR (DRR),
Wht / Blu
AT (DTT),
[T] <UpA>
External Equipment
Western Electric 42A Modular Cover
5-7
Wireless and VoIP Stations

The FlexAir handset and the FlexSet-IP 280S models are not connected via the MDF.
For further information about Coral voice terminals not covered by this section,
consult the following documentation.
Station Type
CoralAIR (Wireless Systems) Installation Manual
FlexAir (wireless) handset,

SKK, RBS
FlexAir (Wireless Systems) Installation Manual
IP device
FlexSet-IP 280S,
Coral Teleport
Coral VoIP Installation Manual
Peripheral device
DKT/DST/DPEM
Coral I, II, III Installation Manual, Chapter 11
Peripheral device
FlexSet 120/280/APDL series
Coral Terminal Equipment Installation Manual
External Equipment
CoralAIR (wireless) handset,

SKW, RBS
5
5-8
Manual
Trunk Circuits
Generally, trunk circuits are connected to the Coral IPx 800 system simply by
cross-connecting the trunk interface circuit of a Coral trunk card to the point of
demarcation where the trunk circuits appear from the telephone utility company
(telco). For more specific data regarding all trunk types supported by the Coral IPx 800
system, refer to the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual.
Protective devices are regularly provided by the telecommunication connections on
circuits originating outside the building. Determine if the telecommunication
connection protective devices meet the specifications described in the following
section: Protection Devices on page 5-11. If not, install secondary protector devices that
meet these specifications. To be effective, the protective devices, whether telco or
customer provided, must be grounded to the same ground point as the Coral system.
Figure 5-4 illustrates typical trunk circuit wiring from building entrance to the Coral
IPx 800 system.
Figure 5-4 Typical Trunk

Circuit Wiring Diagram
CORAL SYSTEM
I/O Champ
Connector
Bridging
Clips
Lightning &
Surge
Protector
Ground Bus
External Equipment
Earth
Ground
TELCO
Circuit
Feed Block
CORAL
I/O Block
RJ-21X or Similar
Interface
TELCO
Demarcation
(Network
Interface)
Ground
Terminal
5-9
Auxiliary Connections
Connections to the auxiliary (KB1, KB2, KB3, Music, Page, and Relays) are made with
a standard 25-wire pair, I/O (input/output) ChampTM connectors to the Coral IPx 800
rear panel. Cables from the Coral rear panel are connected to the MDF and from there
to punch blocks. Individual auxiliary interface circuits can then be cross-connected
from Coral IPx 800 I/O punch blocks to other punch blocks that terminate music
circuits, relay wiring, and other external equipment.
For more specific data regarding all auxiliary interface circuits (8DRCF, 8DRCM and
RMI) supported by the Coral IPx 800 system, refer to the Coral Service and Peripheral
Cards Installation Manual.
Auxiliary Cards I/O Connections

8DRCF, 8DRCM cards ......................................... 5-97
External Equipment
RMI, ASU cards .................................................... 5-99
5-10
Protection Devices
5.3
5
Introduction to Primary and Secondary Protection Devices
Any circuit connected to the Coral system that is exposed to lightning or electrical
hazards must be protected with approved lightning and surge protection devices to
avoid potentially lethal hazards to all users.
.
Secondary protection devices should be installed on any circuit requiring primary

lightning protection, which connects electrically to an interface of the Coral system.
Lightning and over-voltage arrestors are used to protect the user and the system from
lightning and other electrical hazards that may occur on external circuits connected to
the system.
Any cable that passes through open air, under open ground (i.e.: across parking lots,
fields, road beds, etc.), across a bridge, or along the exterior or under the non-metallic
roof of a building, is exposed to lightning and electrical hazards.
Telephone circuit protection devices fall into two distinct design categories:
Primary (lightning) protection devices which limit voltages on a telephone circuit

specifications)
Secondary (surge and impulse) protectors that further limit voltages on a

telephone circuit to prevent damage to electronic equipment. (Table 5-3 lists
minimum specifications)
Primary protection absorbs the major impact of infrequent, but dangerous, catastrophic
Protection Devices
below levels which do not present a hazard to the user. (Table 5-2 lists minimum
surges; while secondary protection suppresses constantly occurring impulses which,

while not dangerous, can cripple valuable, and in many cases, essential
communications facilities.
5-11
Generally, leased or switched circuit facilities provided by the local telephone utility
company are equipped with primary protection devices installed with the circuit.
However, privately owned aerial or buried cable feeding from one building to another
may not be equipped with protection devices. Always consult with whomever
provided the circuits to determine whether protection devices are present, and if so,
what type. Never assume that protection devices have been provided by another party,
or that existing protection devices are adequate.
The secondary protection has to include a leakage current protector in series of every
wire, tip and ring, on every port that is either connected to the public telephone
network or to an out of the building cable. The requirement is in accordance with UL
Specification 60950, Third Edition or CSA C22.2 No. 60950. The required protectors can
be mounted directly on a 66 block in the MDF.
Specification
Measurement
Construction
Primary Element
Fail-safe Metallic Shunt
Vent Safe Spark Gap
Heat Coil (recommended)
3 Electrode Gas Tube

1.0 to Ground Max.
Per UL 497
1.0A 100 Sec. Max.
Clamp Points (per REA PE-80)

DC.
2kV/S.
100V/S
10kV/S
Vent Safe @ 100V/S
350VDC Max.
400VDC Max.
500VDC Max.
800VDC Max.
1600VDC Max.
DC Impulse Current (8x20S wave)
10KA Nom.
AC Discharge Current (60Hz/1S)
10A Nom.
DC Holdover (per IEEE 465.1)
160VDC Max.
Protection Devices
Table 5-2
Telephone
Circuit Primary
Lightning / Surge
Arrestor Device
Specifications
5-12
Surge/Impulse
Protector
Sneak Current
Protector
Specification
Measurement
Clamp Points
DC.
2kV/S
100V/S
10kV/S
230VDC Max.
230VDC Max.
100VDC Max
30VDC Max.
Response Time
5nS Max.
Series Resistance
15 Max.
Acceptance
UL Listed
Voltage Rating
600VDC Min.
Current Rating
350mA Max.
Fusing Time Characteristics

100% of Rating
150% of Rating
4 Hr. Min.
10 Sec. Nom., 210 Sec. Max.
Protection Devices
Device Type
Table 5-3
Telephone
Circuit Secondary
Protection Device
Specifications
5-13
Surge Arrestor Magazine Mounting

To prevent serious damage to the Coral system, the analog trunk and station circuits,
whose cables are laid outside the building, must be protected from the electrical peaks
caused by lightning. Lightning Arrestors must be mounted on the MDF where
telephone circuits are cross-connected.
Figure 5-5 Magazine 10

Surge Arrestor and
Voltage Protectors
1 2
5 6
7 8
Surge Voltage
Protector
10
Krone
Block
Magazine 10
Surge Arrestor
The mounting procedure is as follows:

1.
Identify the MDF disconnecting strips used for telephone connections.
2.
Place a Magazine 10 Surge Arrestor (CN# 7244-3190009) on each MDF strip used
for telephone. See Step 1 in Figure 5-6.
3.
Use the relevant tables from page 5-49, I/O Connections Via Champ Connectors to
identify the MDF cross connection points that are used for each telephone. (The
connecting cables will be visible).
4.
Insert a Surge Voltage Protector (CN# 7244-2350001) in the magazine 10 surge
Protection Devices
arrestor where a telephone is connected. See Step 2 in Figure 5-6.
5-14
Figure 5-6 Connecting

Surge arrestor to MDF
Step
Use a Surge Voltage
Protector for
cross-connected
telephone circuits only.
Add/remove the units

as required.
Step
Mount a Magazine
10 Surge Arrestor on
each MDF disconnection
strip used for telephone
circuit cross-connections.
(CN# 7244-3190009)
Protection Devices
(CN# 7244-2350001)
5-15
Protection Devices
NOTES:
5-16
Power Fail (PF) Transfer Circuits
5.4
With the installation of trunk cards that support the PF (Power Fail) transfer option,
four trunks per trunk card may be directed to station sets if power to the Coral system
is interrupted. This arrangement, referred to as power failure transfer, completely
bypasses the system, allowing specific stations to originate outgoing calls and/or
continue answering incoming calls.
5
Physical Connection
Stations
Both SLT (single line telephone) sets, and special EKT-PF1 telephones may be used as
power failure stations. Figure 5-7 and Figure 5-8 illustrate wiring interconnections
between the trunk card, station card, and an SLT and EKT-PF station set, respectively.
Coral FlexSet, GKT, DKT and DST cannot be used as power failure stations.
Trunks
The following Analog Trunk Peripheral cards support Power Fail Transfer:
The following four-trunk cards, each provides four (4) ports with PF transfer:
4TMR/S-12PF-ES, 4TMR/S PF-G, 4TMR/S-50/16PF-G, 4TMR/S-12/16PF,
4TMR-12/16PF, 4ALS, 4ALS/M
The following eight-trunk cards, each provides four (4) ports with PF transfer:
8T-C, 8T-CID, 8TPF, 8T/S-PF, 8T/S-PF-G, 8ALS, 8ALS/M,
NOTE: only circuits 2, 3, 4 and 5 support power failure transfer.
For further information on these trunk interface cards see Coral Service and Peripheral
Cards Manual.
4T-C, 4T-CID, 4TPF, 4T/S PF-G, 4T/S PF-ES, 4TMR-PF, 4TMR-PF-G,
1. discontinued, no longer available
5-17
Database Programming
To use the power failure transfer features of the Coral system, the station dials
numbers to which power fail trunks transfer should be entered in the system database.
Refer to Power Fail Trunk Definition in Chapter 8 - Program Interface Reference Manual, for
more information.
Power Failure Trunk Definition (Route: TRK,4)

FROM/TO DIAL#
Enter the required range of Loop Start/Ground Start analog trunks.
DEST
Set this parameter to determine the power fail station system dial number to be
connected to the trunk during power failure.
5-18
Figure 5-7 Power Fail

Wiring To Single-Line
(500/2500) Telephone Set
PSTN
Central Office
Trunk
Circuit
With
PF
Option
TTx
TRx
STTx
STRx
SCTx
SCRx
8SLS/SA,
16SLS/SA, STy
SRy
24SLS,
16SH/S-LL
Green
T (tip)
Modular
Jack
Red
R (ring)
Ground
Start
Button
2500
Single-Line Set
1
4
7
*
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
#
Coral IPx 800, 3000, 4000
Lightning
Protection
5-19
Figure 5-8 Power Fail

Wiring To EKT-PF1 Set
(Discontinued)
CENTRAL
OFFICE
LIGHTNING
PROTECTION
TTx
TRx
SCTx
SCRx
ATy
ARy
RED
AR
MODULAR
JACK
VOL
EKT301PF
EKT321PF
POWER FAIL
EKT SET
1. discontinued, no longer available
5-20
VOL
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PRS
TUV
8
WXY
9
OPER
GREEN
AT
DTy
DRy
BLACK
DT
2SK
4SK
8SK
STTx
STRx
YELLOW
DR
CORAL
SYSTEM
Trunk
Circuit
with PF
Option
Power Fail
Ground-Start
Button
Terminal Data Communication Ports

RS-232E
The Coral switching system is capable of switching digital data information as well as
voice signals. Coral system data communications devices are available for packet
switched data for low volume applications. The packet data communications are
provided using the APA (Application Processor Adapter), PEX+APA or APDL
(Applications Processor Data Link). The data communication devices provide a serial
interface wired as Data Communications Equipment (DCE). That is, they transmit data
is data to the APA/APDL, and receive data from the device.
The APA provides a proprietary data link to an external Applications Processor. The
link uses an asynchronous RS-232E (V.24) serial data interface, operating at a data rate
of up to 19.2Kbps. The interface appears at a:
DB-25S connector on the rear panel of the APDL and DKT2000 with an APA
RJ-45 jack connector on the rear panel of the FlexSet 80, GKT, FlexSet APDL,
FlexSet APA or FlexSet PEX+APA.
Through the link, a proprietary signaling protocol allows the Coral system Master
Processor to send call status messages to the Applications Processor, and the
Applications Processor to send call control instructions to the APA / APDL.
Application processors available for the Coral system include the Computerized
Coral CallMaster (CCM), Coral World Wide Office (WWO), TAPIdriver, GKT
PC-Utility, or any other application that complies with proprietary API products.
Use the following RS-232 cables:
CN#7244-8001195 for DKT2000 with APA or APDL
CN#7244-6914055 for FlexSet 80, GKT, FlexSet APDL, FlexSet APA or

FlexSet PEX+APA.
Tables below lists the pin designations for the RS-232 interface module of the various
Coral terminals.
Terminal Data Communication Ports RS-232E
Attendant Position (CAP), the ACD Group Supervisor and Management position,
5.5
5-21
FlexSet APA, PEX+APA and APDL RS-232E Port

The serial interface of the FlexSet APA port via the provided RS-232 cable
(CN# 7244-6914055) conforms to the EIA RS-232E specification, and is wired as a Data
Communications Equipment (DCE) device, using a D-type (female) connector. The
interface allows connection of a common, asynchronous CTI products such as the
CCM, CAP, FlexCT PathFinder, etc.
Figure 5-9 shows use of the pin number and function assignments on the FlexSet APA
cable.
Figure 5-9 Coral FlexSet
APA/APDL RS-232E
Cable Connections
RS-232 cable CN#7244-6914055
APDL
RS-232
1
RJ-45 socket (female)

external view
RJ-45 plug (male)

clip at rear
orange
brown
green
gray
yellow
black
blue
red
NC 9
Clear To Send (CTS) 8
Request To Send (RTS) 7
Data Set Ready (DSR) 6
Signal Ground (GND) 5
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) 4
Transmit Data (TR) 3
Receive Data (RD) 2
Data Carrier Detector (DCD) 1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
To Server/PC Serial Port COM

(9 pin female connector)
To FlexSet
APDL RS-232
Table 5-4 Coral FlexSet

APA/APDL RS-232E
Interface Pin Functions
Pin Number
Pin Designation
9-Pin
D-Type
Function
Data Carrier Detector (DCD)
Receive Data (RD)
Output from APA
Transmit Data (TR)
Input to APA
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
Input to APA
Signal Ground (GND)
Signal Return
Data Set Ready (DSR)
Output from APA
Request to Send (RTS)
Input to APA
Clear to Send (CTS)
Output from APA
Not used
Not Connected (NC)
5-22
RJ-45
Connector
FlexSet 80 (GKT) RS-232E Port

Figure 5-10 FlexSet 80 or
GKT RS-232E (v.24) Pin
Functions
GKT
RS-232
1
RJ-45 socket (female)

external view
RJ-45 plug (male)

clip at rear
orange
brown
green
gray
yellow
black
blue
red
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
NC 9
Clear To Send (CTS) 8
Request To Send (RTS) 7
Data Set Ready (DSR) 6
Signal Ground (GND) 5
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) 4
Transmit Data (TR) 3
Receive Data (RD) 2
Data Carrier Detector (DCD) 1
To PC Serial Port COM 1/2

(9 pin female connector)
To GKT
RS-232
DKT2000 with APA/APDL RS-232E Port
Pin Designation
Pin #
Function
Transmit Data
Receive Data
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Data Set Ready
Signal Ground
Carrier Detect
Data Terminal Ready
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
20
Input to APA/APDL
Output from APA/APDL
Input to APA/APDL

Input to APA/APDL
Table 5-5
DKT2000
with APA/APDL RS-232E
(V.24) Interface Module
Pin Functions
5-23
NOTES:
5-24
I/O Connections Via Front Panel
5.6
For Coral Interface and Control Cards

5
The I/O connections of the following interface cards are performed via cables
UGW cards include front panel and rear panel I/O options. However, there
are various factors involved. Therefore, their description is not included in
this section. For details, see the Coral VoIP Installation Procedure and
Hardware Reference Manual.
I/O Connections Via Front Panel For Coral Interface and Control Cards
connected to their front panel:
5-25
Connections on the Cage Rear Panel

In the Coral IPx 800 the following cards may be connected via the cage rear panel,
with an RJ-45 connector for each card slot.
PRI-23, PRI-30 Card (Layout UDT C and later).....................
on page 5-43
T1, 30T/x, 30T/E Card (Layout UDT C and later)..................
on page 5-44
UGW Card (layout B1) and UGW-E..................................................
on page 5-45
5-26
PRI (Layout UDT)

The external network connections to the PRI-23 and PRI-30 (layout UDT B & C) digital
circuit are made via one of the two connectors available at the front panel:
DA-15S, 15 pin female D-type connector (Table 5-7 and Figure 5-12).
RJ-45 telephony connector (Table 5-7 and Figure 5-13).
Do not use both connectors at the same time.
Figure 5-14 describes the optional connection cable (H-UDT) from the front panel to the
LTU/CSU, towards PSTN, CN# 7244-6914040.
Table 5-7
PRI-23,
PRI-30 (layout UDT)
Network Interface
Connections
DA-15S
Pin #
RJ-45
Pin #
Nomination
Pin 11
Pin 1
RxB
Receive Data (ring) from Network
Pin 3
Pin 2
RxA
Receive Data (tip) from Network
Pin 8
Pin 3,6
Shield
Pin 9
Pin 4
TxB
Transmit Data (ring) to Network
Pin 1
Pin 5
TxA
Transmit Data (tip) to Network.
Pin 13
Pin 7
-48VDC
Pin 15
Pin 8
GND
2,4,5,6,7,10,12,14
Figure 5-12 PRI-23,

PRI-30 (layout UDT)
RJ-45 Interface
Connector PIN
Assignment
Not Used
Functions
Cable Shield, 48VDC Return
Power for CSU/LTU

Not Used
1 - RxB
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
2 - RxA
3 - Shield
4 - TxB
5 - TxA
6 - Shield
RJ-45
Connector
7 - -48VDC
8 - GND
Figure 5-15 describes the connection from the front panel to the PSTN/LTU/CSU.
5-28
Figure 5-13 PRI-23,

PRI-30 (layout UDT)
DA-15S Interface
Connector PIN
Assignment
GND
15
-48 VDC
13
Rx B
11
Tx B
Shield
Rx A
Tx A
DA-15S D-TYPE Connector
10 meters
15
Slide Latch Down

to Lock
Up to Release
15
GND
14
13
-48 VDC
12
11
Rx B (Ring)
10
9
15
Tx B (Ring)
SHIELD
GND
-48 VDC
SHIELD
Rx A (Tip)
Rx B (Ring)
SHIELD
7
6
5
4
3
2
DA-15P
D-Type Plug
to PRI, T1, 30T
Front Panel
Rx A (Tip)
Tx A (Tip)
Tx A (Tip)
Tx B (Ring)
1
RJ-45 Plug
to CSU/LTU
towards PSTN
10 meters Lengths
H-UDT Cable
CN#7244-6914040
Figure 5-14 PRI-23,

PRI-30 (layout UDT)
DA-15S to LTU/CSU
Connection Cable
5-29
Figure 5-15 PRI-23,

PRI-30 (layout UDT)
Interface Connections to
the PSTN/LTU/CSU
RJ-45
Card
Status
Indicator
Trunk
Alarm
Status
Indicators
PRI-23
PRI-30
L R C G
O A R E
S I C N
L R C G
O A R E
S I C N
DA-9S D-Type
DA-15S D-Type
RJ-45
DA-9S D-Type
5-30
DA-15S D-Type
Maintenance
Port
RJ-45
Network
Interface
Connectors
Pin #
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
Nomination
RxB
RxA
Shield
TxB
TxA
Shield
-48VDC
Ground
DA-15S D-Type
Pin #
Pin 11
Pin 3
Pin 8
Pin 9
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 15
Pin 2,4,5,6,
7,10,12,14
Nomination
RxB
RxA
Shield
TxB
TxA
-48VDC
Ground
Not Used
T1, 30T/x, 30T/E Card

The I/O connections of the following T1 and 30T options are described below:
T1 and 30T (Layout A&B)................
page 5-31
T1 and 30T (Layout UDT).................
page 5-32
For further information, on how to make the connection, refer also to the
Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual.
Table 5-8
T1, 30T
(layout A&B) Network
Interface Connections
Pin No
Name
Signal
Pin 1
Tx Tip
Send Data
Pin 9
Tx Ring
Send Data
Pin 3
Rx Tip
Receive Data
Pin 11
Rx Ring
Receive Data
Pin 14,15
Ground
Cable Shield
T1, 30T/x, 30T (Layout A & B) [discontinued]
Figure 5-16 T1, 30T

(layout A&B) RJ-45
Interface Connector PIN
Assignment
15
14
Rx RING
11
Tx RING
Rx TIP
Tx TIP
DA-15S D-TYPE
GND& Shield
5-31
T1, 30T/x, 30T (Layout UDT)

The external network connections to the T1 and 30T digital circuit are made via one of
the two connectors available at the front panel:
DA-15S, 15 pin female D-type connector (Table 5-9 and Figure 5-17).
RJ-45 telephony connector (Table 5-9 and Figure 5-18).
Do not use both connectors at the same time.
Figure 5-19 describes the optional connection cable (H-UDT) from the front panel to the
LTU/CSU, towards PSTN, CN# 7244-6914040.
Figure 5-20 describes the connection from the front panel to the PSTN/LTU/CSU.
DA-15S
Pin #
RJ-45
Pin #
Nomination
Pin 11
Pin 1
Rx Ring
Receive Data from Network
Pin 3
Pin 2
Rx Tip
Pin 8
Pin 3,6
Shield
Pin 9
Pin 4
Tx Ring
Transmit Data to Network
Pin 1
Pin 5
Tx Tip
Transmit Data to Network.
Pin 13
Pin 7
-48VDC
Pin 15
Pin 8
GND
2,4,5,6,7,10,12,14
Figure 5-17 T1, 30T

(layout UDT) RJ-45
Assignment
Functions
Power for CSU/LTU

Not Used
Not Used
1 - Rx Ring
1 2 345 6 7 8
2 - Rx Tip
3 - Shield
4 - Tx Ring
5 - Tx Tip
6 - Shield
RJ-45
Connector
7 - -48VDC
8 - GND
Table 5-9
T1, 30T
(layout UDT) Network
5-32
Figure 5-18 T1, 30T

(layout UDT) DA-15S
Assignment
GND
15
-48 VDC
13
Rx Ring
11
Tx Ring
Shield
Rx Tip
Tx Tip
DA-15S D-TYPE Connector
15
Slide Latch Down

to Lock
Up to Release
15
GND
14
13
-48 VDC
12
11
Rx B (Ring)
10
9
15
Tx B (Ring)
SHIELD
GND
-48 VDC
SHIELD
Rx A (Tip)
Rx B (Ring)
SHIELD
7
6
5
4
3
2
DA-15P
D-Type Plug
to PRI, T1, 30T
Front Panel
Rx A (Tip)
Tx A (Tip)
Tx A (Tip)
Tx B (Ring)
1
RJ-45 Plug
to CSU/LTU
towards PSTN
10 meters Lengths
H-UDT Cable
CN#7244-6914040
10 meters
Figure 5-19 T1, 30T

(layout UDT) DA-15S to
LTU/CSU Connection
Cable
5-33
Figure 5-20 T1, 30T/x,

30T/E (layout UDT)
Interface Connections to
the PSTN/LTU/CSU
RJ-45
30T
T1
Card
Status
Indicator
Trunk
Alarm
Status
Indicators
R Y B G
E E P E
D L V N
DA-9S D-Type
DA-15S D-Type
RJ-45
DA-9S D-Type
5-34
DA-15S D-Type
Maintenance
Port
RJ-45
Network
Interface
Connectors
R Y B G
E E P E
D L V N
Pin #
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
Nomination
Rx Ring
Rx Tip
Shield
Tx Ring
Tx Tip
Shield
-48VDC
Ground
DA-15S D-Type
Pin #
Pin 11
Pin 3
Pin 8
Pin 9
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 15
Pin 2,4,5,6,
7,10,12,14
Nomination
Rx Ring
Rx Tip
Shield
Tx Ring
Tx Tip
-48VDC
Ground
Not Used
5
Table 5-10
DA-15S
D-Type connector for
DPC card
DPC Card (Discontinued)

Pin No
Nomination
Function
Pin 1
Tx Tip
Send Data
Pin 9
Tx Ring
Send Data
Pin 3
Rx Tip
Receive Data
Pin 11
Rx Ring
Receive Data
Pin 15
Ground
Shield
Figure 5-21 DPC TO:CO

& TO:CORAL Connector
Pin Assignments
Rx RING
11
Tx RING
Rx TIP
Tx TIP
15
DA-15S D-TYPE
GND& Shield
5-35
UGW Card
The UGW card communicates via the RJ-45 connection on the:
cage rear panel for Coral IPx 800, 3000
card front panel for Coral IPx 4000.
The ULI-1 daughterboard is attached to the UGW board before shipment as shown in
Figure 5-22 to facilitate RJ-45 connection from the front panel as required in the Coral
IPx 4000 system.
Therefore, if the RJ-45 connection is to be made in the from the cage rear panel,
reposition the ULI-1 unit as described in the Coral Voice Over IP Installation Manual.
Figure 5-22 UGW Card
MAC : 00208F0718FE
MAC address
(MG)
UGW
MG
(Media Gateway module)
MG
MAINT
MAC : 00208F0718FD
LNK
ETHERNET
10/100
ULI-1 shipped location
for Coral IPx 4000
5-36
MAC address
(UGW)
ULI-1 location
for Coral IPx 800, 3000
Table 5-11 and Figure 5-23 show the interface connections of the pins on the UGW RJ-45
connector. The interface connections are the same for the front and rear panels.
Figure 5-24 describes the connection from the front panel to the LAN/WAN.
Nomination
Pin 1
Tx(+)
Transmit Data (+) to Network
Pin 2
Tx(-)
Transmit Data (-) to Network
Pin 3
Rx(+)
Receive Data (+) from Network
Pin 4
not used
not connected
Pin 5
not used
not connected
Pin 6
Rx(-)
Pin 7
not used
not connected
Pin 8
not used
not connected
1 2 345 6 7 8
Function
Receive Data (-) from Network
1 - Tx+
2 - Tx3 - Rx+
4, 5, 7, 8
not
connected
6 - Rx-
RJ-45 Connector
For further information on how to make the connection, refer also to the
Coral Voice Over IP Installation Manual.
Figure 5-23 UGW

Network Interface
Connector PIN
Assignment
Pin #
Table 5-11 UGW

Network Interface
Connections
5-37

Connection to the
LAN/WAN
UGW
System LED (red)
MG
MAINT
MG Status Indicator (green)

UGW Maintenance Status Indicator (red)
LINK/ACTIVE Green
lit when cable correctly
connected to LAN
LAN / WAN
LNK
SPEED Yellow
lit when running at 100Mbps
ETHERNET
10/100
Pin #
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
5-38
Nomination
Tx(+)
Tx(-)
Rx(+)
not used
not used
Rx(-)
not used
not used
IPG Card
Table 5-12 and Figure 5-25 show the interface connections of the pins on the IPG RJ-45
connector.
Figure 5-26 describes the connection from the front panel to the LAN/WAN.
Nomination
Connection
Pin 1
Tx(+)
Transmit Data (+) to Network.
Pin 2
Tx(-)
Pin 3
Rx(+)
Pin 4
not used
not connected
Pin 5
not used
not connected
Pin 6
Rx(-)
Pin 7
not used
not connected
Pin 8
not used
not connected
1 2 345 6 7 8
1 - Tx+
2 - Tx3 - Rx+
4, 5, 7, 8
not
connected
6 - Rx-
RJ-45 Connector
For further information, see the VoIP Gateway (IPG) Card Installation
Manual.
Figure 5-25 IPG Network

Assignment
Pin #
Table 5-12 IPG Interface

Connections
5-39
Figure 5-26 IPG Card

Connection to the
LAN/WAN
System LED (red)

IPG
Data packets are being
received (yellow)
Rcv
Data packets are being

transmitted (green)
LINK
RJ45
LINK lit when cable

correctly connected to
LAN (yellow)
Tx
LAN / WAN
DA-9S D-Type
ETHERNET
SERIAL
5-40
Pin #
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
Nomination
Tx(+)
Tx(-)
Rx(+)
not used
not used
Rx(-)
not used
not used
I/O RJ-45 Connections Via Rear Panel
5.7
For Coral Interface Cards

5
Cards with Rear Panel I/O Connections

In the Coral IPx 8003000 the I/O connections of the following interface cards are
PRI-23, PRI-30 Card (Layout UDT C and later).....................
on page 5-43
T1, 30T/x, 30T/E Card (Layout UDT C and later)..................
on page 5-44
UGW Card (layout B1) and UGW-E..................................................
on page 5-45
UGW cards include front panel and rear panel I/O options. However, there
are various factors involved. Therefore, their description is not included in
this section. For details, see the Coral VoIP Installation Procedure and
Hardware Reference Manual.
There are two types of Coral IPx 800, 3000 systems backplane:
with 2 RJ-45 connectors per card slot (discontinued)
with 1 connector per card slot, as shown in Figure 5-27
I/O RJ-45 Connections Via Rear Panel For Coral Interface Cards
performed via cables connected to their rear panel:
5-41
Figure 5-27 Coral

IPx 8003000 Back Panel
and RJ-45 Rear
Connectors
RJ-45
Connectors
5-42
PRI-23, PRI-30 Card (Layout UDT C and later)

5
The external network connections to the PRI-23 and PRI-30 (layout UDT C) digital
circuit are made via one of the three connectors available at the front and rear panels:
Front Panel: RJ-45 telephony connector (Table 5-7 and Figure 5-12 on page 5-28)
Front Panel: DA-15S, 15 pin female D-type connector (Table 5-7 and Figure 5-12 on
page 5-29).
Rear Panel: RJ-45 telephony connector (Table 5-13 and Figure 5-28).
Figure 5-28 describes the connection from the rear panel to the PSTN/LTU/CSU.
Figure 5-28 PRI-23,

PRI-30 (layout UDT C)
Rear Panel RJ-45
Assignment to the
PSTN/LTU/CSU
RJ-45
Pin #
Nomination
Functions
Pin 1
RxB
Receive Data (ring) from Network
Pin 2
RxA
Receive Data (tip) from Network
Pin 3,6
Shield
Pin 4
TxB
Transmit Data (ring) to Network
Pin 5
TxA
Transmit Data (tip) to Network.
Pin 7
-48VDC
Pin 8
GND
Power for CSU/LTU

1 - RxB
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
2 - RxA
3 - Shield
4 - TxB
5 - TxA
6 - Shield
RJ-45
Connector
Table 5-13 PRI-23,

PRI-30 (layout UDT C)
Rear Panel RJ-45
Network Interface
Connections
Use one connector only.

Do not use two or three connectors at the same time.
7 - -48VDC
8 - GND
5-43
T1, 30T/x, 30T/E Card (Layout UDT C and later)

5
The external network connections to the T1 and 30T (layout UDT C) digital circuit
are made via one of the three connectors available at the front and rear panels:
Front Panel: DA-15S, 15 pin female D-type connector (Table 5-9 and Figure 5-18 on
page 5-33).

Do not use two or three connectors at the same time.
Figure 5-29 describes the connection from the rear panel to the PSTN/LTU/CSU.
Table 5-14 T1, 30T
(layout UDT C) Rear
Panel RJ-45 Network
Figure 5-29 T1, 30T

(layout UDT C) Rear
Panel RJ-45 Interface
Connector PIN
Assignment to the
PSTN/LTU/CSU
RJ-45
Pin #
Nomination
Functions
Pin 1
Rx Ring
Pin 2
Rx Tip
Pin 3,6
Shield
Pin 4
Tx Ring
Transmit Data to Network
Pin 5
Tx Tip
Transmit Data to Network.
Pin 7
-48VDC
Pin 8
GND
Power for CSU/LTU

1 - Rx Ring
1 2 345 6 7 8
2 - Rx Tip
3 - Shield
4 - Tx Ring
5 - Tx Tip
6 - Shield
RJ-45
Connector
7 - -48VDC
8 - GND
5-44
UGW Card (layout B1) and UGW-E
UGW Layout A can not be connected to the Coral IPx 8003000 rear panel.
The external network connections to the UGW (layout B1) and to the UGW-E are made
via one of the two connectors available at the front and rear panels:

Do not use the two connectors at the same time.
cage rear panel for Coral IPx 800, 3000
card front panel for Coral IPx 4000.
The ULI-1 daughterboard is attached to the UGW board before shipment as shown in
Figure 5-30 to facilitate RJ-45 connection from the front panel as required in the Coral
IPx 4000 system. Therefore, if the RJ-45 connection is to be made in the Coral IPx
8003000 from the rear panel:
1.
Disconnect the three screws that secure the ULI-1 daughter board to the UGW
board.
2.
Rotate the ULI-1 daughter board as shown in Figure 5-30.
3.
Secure the ULI-1 daughter board to the UGW board.
The UGW card communicates via the RJ-45 connection on the:
5-45
MAC : 00208F0718FE
MAC address
(MG)
UGW
MG
(Media Gateway module)
MG
MAINT
MAC : 00208F0718FD
LNK
ETHERNET
10/100
MAC address
(UGW)
ULI-1 shipped location

for Coral IPx 4000
ULI-1 location
for Coral IPx 800, 3000
Table 5-15 and Figure 5-31 show the interface connections of the pins on the Coral
IPx 8003000 rear panel RJ-45 connector for the UGW card. The interface connections
are the same for the front and rear panels.
5-46
Nomination
Pin 1
Tx(+)
Transmit Data (+) to Network
Pin 2
Tx(-)
Pin 3
Rx(+)
Pin 4
not used
not connected
Pin 5
not used
not connected
Pin 6
Rx(-)
Pin 7
not used
not connected
Pin 8
not used
not connected
1 2 345 6 7 8
Function
1 - Tx+
2 - Tx3 - Rx+
4, 5, 7, 8
not
connected
6 - Rx-
RJ-45 Connector
Figure 5-31 UGW

Rear Panel RJ-45
Assignment to the
LAN/WAN
Pin #
Table 5-15 UGW Rear

Panel RJ-45 Network
5-47
NOTES:
5-48
I/O Connections Via Champ Connectors
5.8
For Coral Interface Cards

5
General
The following section contains the I/O Connector Pin Designation tables for all the
peripheral cards currently available for the Coral IPx 800, 3000, 4000 cabinets.
The respective tables for the front panel connections are shown in Section 5.6, I/O
Connections Via Front Panel on page 5-25. While the respective tables for the rear panel
connections are shown in Section 5.7, I/O RJ-45 Connections Via Rear Panel on page 5-41.
Table Presentation
Each I/O connector services two universal I/O slots.
Connector - to - Peripheral Card tables
Peripheral Card - to - Connector tables
Connector - to - Peripheral Card tables (see Table 5-16)

The Connector-to-Peripheral Card tables, located on the left-hand pages, display the
pin-to-port designations from the connector's point of view.
Tip:
These tables can be very helpful for a first-time installation.
Tip:
These tables can be used for Block 66 MDF connections as their terminals
follow the same numbering pattern.
I/O Connections Via Champ Connectors For Coral Interface Cards
There are two I/O connection tables for each peripheral card:
5-49
Peripheral Card - to - Connector tables (see Table 5-17)

The Card-to-Connector tables, located on the right hand pages, indicate the port-to-pin
designations from the card's point of view.
Tip:
These tables can help when changing, adding, or removing specific ports in
an existing structure.
Table Legend
Table 5-16 illustrates the Connector-to-Peripheral Card relationship tables.
The table is divided into two major columns. The first applies when the card is
inserted in the even-numbered slots; the second is for cards inserted into the
odd-numbered slots. Each column then divides for the upper or lower connector pins.
The possible connections for each card are marked by the shaded areas.
If the card is inserted in the even-numbered slots, the upper left area will apply.
If the card is inserted in the odd-numbered slots, the lower right area will apply.
Table 5-17 illustrates the Peripheral Card-to-Connector relationship tables.
The possible connections for each cards are highlighted by the shaded areas. The table
is divided in two sections: The upper section represent the connections for cards
inserted in even-numbered slots, while the lower section stands for the connections of
cards inserted into the odd-numbered slots.
Each section shows the pins associated with a specific port - group. Given that some of
the peripheral cards can support up to 24 ports, the ports are divided into groups of
eight (for connection purposes only). Thus, each group is associated with either the
upper or lower connector (see sub-columns) and with the 1st, 2nd, or 3rd group of
pins (see rows).
The pins associated with the first two port columns are listed in the right column
while the pins for the last group of ports (left column) are listed in the adjacent
column on their left.
Finding a Specific Peripheral Card's Table

To help identify the peripheral cards, they are listed below in two indexes. The first
index is grouped according to the functional type of each card, the second is in
alpha-numeric order.
For Card Index: Listed by Function Category on page 5-53.
For Card Index: Listed by Alpha-Numerically Order on page 5-55.
5-50
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector*
Upper
Connector
1st Port
Group
2nd Port
Group
2nd
Port
Group
3rd Port
Group
Not Used
Lower
Connector*
Not Used
1st
Port
Group
3rd
Port
Group
Not Used
Not Used
Even Slots
Table 5-16 Connector to - Peripheral Card

tables
5-51
Table 5-17 Peripheral

Card - to - Connector
tables
Even Slots
Card - to - Connector tables
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
1st Port
Group
2nd Port
Group
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
3rd Port
Group
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
1st Port
Group
3rd Port
Group
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
5
5-52
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
2nd Port
Group
Card Index: Listed by Function Category

Key Set Telephone
2SK cards.............................................................. 5-75
4SK, 8SK cards ..................................................... 5-77
2SD, 8SD cards .................................................... 5-79
8SKD, 16SKD cards ............................................. 5-81
8SVD cards ........................................................... 5-83
8SFT, 16SFT, 24SFT, 8SDT, 16SDT, 24SDT cards...5-85
8/16/24SFT
8/16/24SDT
8/16SKD
8SVD
FlexSet
Yes
No
No
No
DKT/DST (Ver. 5.xx)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DKT/DST (Ver. 2.xx-4.xx)
No
No
Yes
Yes
DKT2000 + VDM
No
No
No
Yes
CPA
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
GKT
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Terminals
Single Line Telephone

4S/SH, 4SH/S(-LL) cards..................................... 5-87
8SA, 8SLS, 8SH/S(-LL), 8S, 8S/SH cards........... 5-89
16SLS, 16SH/S(-LL), 16S, 16SH, 16S/SH cards 5-91
8SM cards ............................................................. 5-95
16SLS, 24SLS, 24SA cards.................................... 5-93
Digital Trunks
Table 5-18 Possible

Terminal/Card
combinations
4TBR, 8TBR, 4TBRP, 8TBRP cards ..................... 5-57
5-53
Analog Trunks
4TEM, 4TEM/S, 4TEMP cards ............................. 5-73
4T-C, 4T-CID cards.............................................. 5-59
4TMR - PF (/S) (12/16) <G> <ES> cards........... 5-59
4TPF ..................................................................... 5-59
4TWL.................................................................... 5-71
8T-C, 8T-CID cards.............................................. 5-61
8TPF, 8T/S - PF <G> <ES> cards ....................... 5-61
I/O Connections: 4ALS, 4ALS/M cards ................ 5-63
8ALS, 8ALS/M cards............................................. 5-65
8DID, 8DID/S, 8DID/S-Z cards ........................... 5-67
8BID cards ............................................................ 5-69
4GID, 4TWL cards................................................ 5-71
Auxiliary Cards
8DRCF, 8DRCM cards ......................................... 5-97
RMI, ASU cards .................................................... 5-99
Wireless (Radio Base Station) Cards

SKW/x cards (Issue 4 and later) ........................... 5-101
8SKK card for Wireless FlexAIR (Radio Base Station)5-103
16SKK card for Wireless FlexAIR (Radio Base Station)5-105
5-54
Card Index: Listed by Alpha-Numerically Order

RMI, ASU cards.................................................... 5-99
SKW/x cards (Issue 4 and later) ........................... 5-101
16S, 16SH, 16S/SH, 16SH/S(-LL),
16SLS cards.......................................................... 5-91
16SDT cards......................................................... 5-85
16SKD .................................................................. 5-81
16SKK .................................................................. 5-105
16SLS cards.......................................................... 5-91
2SD cards ............................................................. 5-79
2SK cards.............................................................. 5-75
24SDT cards......................................................... 5-85
24SA, 24SLS cards............................................... 5-93
I/O Connections: 4ALS, 4ALS/M cards................ 5-63
4GID, 4TWL cards ............................................... 5-71

4S/SH, 4SH/S(-LL) .............................................. 5-87
4SK, 8SK cards ..................................................... 5-77
4T-C, 4T-CID cards.............................................. 5-59
4T, 4TPF, /S (12/16) <G> <ES> cards ................ 5-59
4TBR, 4TBRP cards ............................................. 5-57
4TEM, 4TEM/S, 4TEMP cards............................. 5-73
4TMR, 4TMR - PF /S (12/16)
<G> <ES> cards .................................................. 5-59
4TWL.................................................................... 5-71
4T/S, 4TMR/S (12/16) (PF)
<G> <ES> cards .................................................. 5-59
8ALS, 8ALS/M cards ............................................ 5-65
8BID cards............................................................ 5-69
8DID, 8DID/S, 8DID/S-Z cards ........................... 5-67
8S, 8S/SH, 8SH/S, (-LL)...................................... 5-87
8SD....................................................................... 5-79
5-55
8SDT..................................................................... 5-85
8SK ....................................................................... 5-77
8SKD, 16SKD ...................................................... 5-81
8SKK..................................................................... 5-103
8SA, 8SLS............................................................. 5-87
8SM cards ............................................................. 5-95
8SVD cards ........................................................... 5-83
8T-C, 8T-CID cards.............................................. 5-61
8T, 8TPF, 8T/S, 8T/S - PF cards .......................... 5-61
8T/S-G, 8T/S PF-G cards ..................................... 5-61
8TBR, 8TBRP cards ............................................. 5-57
8DRCF, 8DRCM cards ......................................... 5-97
5-56
Even Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector*
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
T(+) 0
T(-) 0
T(+) 4
T(-) 4
R(+) 0
R(-) 0
R(+) 4
R(-) 4
T(+) 1
T(-) 1
T(+) 5
T(-) 5
R(+) 1
R(-) 1
R(+) 5
R(-) 5
T(+) 2
T(-) 2
T(+) 6
T(-) 6
R(+) 2
R(-) 2
R(+) 6
R(-) 6
T(+) 3
T(-) 3
T(+) 7
T(-) 7
R(+) 3
R(-) 3
R(+) 7
R(-) 7
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector*
T(+) 4
T(-) 4
R(+) 4
R(-) 4
T(+) 5
T(-) 5
T(+) 6
T(-) 6
R(+) 6
R(-) 6
T(+) 7
T(-) 7
R(+) 7
R(-) 7
T(+) 0
T(-) 0
R(+) 0
R(-) 0
T(+) 1
T(-) 1
R(+) 1
R(-) 1
T(+) 2
T(-) 2
R(+) 2
R(-) 2
T(+) 3
T(-) 3
R(+) 3
R(-) 3
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
R(+) 5
R(-) 5
* Trunk Circuits 4,5,6 and 7 are present only on 8TBR and 8TBR-P cards.
Table 5-19 4TBR, 8TBR,

4TBRP, 8TBRP cards
5-57
Table 5-20 I/O

Connections:
4TBR, 8TBR, 4TBRP,
8TBRP cards
Even Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
T(+) 0
T(-) 0
T(+) 4
T(-) 4
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
R(+) 0
R(-) 0
R(+) 4
R(-) 4
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
T(+) 1
T(-) 1
T(+) 5
T(-) 5
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
R(+) 1
R(-) 1
R(+) 5
R(-) 5
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
T(+) 2
T(-) 2
T(+) 6
T(-) 6
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
R(+) 2
R(-) 2
R(+) 6
R(-) 6
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
T(+) 3
T(-) 3
T(+) 7
T(-) 7
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
R(+) 3
R(-) 3
R(+) 7
R(-) 7
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
Lower
Connector *
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
T(+) 0
T(-) 0
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
T(+) 4
T(-) 4
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
R(+) 0
R(-) 0
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
R(+) 4
R(-) 4
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
T(+) 1
T(-) 1
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
T(+) 5
T(-) 5
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
R(+) 1
R(-) 1
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
R(+) 5
R(-) 5
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
T(+) 2
T(-) 2
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
T(+) 6
T(-) 6
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
R(+) 2
R(-) 2
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
R(+) 6
R(-) 6
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
T(+) 3
T(-) 3
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
T(+) 7
T(-) 7
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
R(+) 3
R(-) 3
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
R(+) 7
R(-) 7
* Trunk Circuits 4,5,6 and 7 are present only on 8TBR and 8TBR-P cards.
5-58
Even Slots
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
TT2
TR2
STT2*
STR2*
TT0
TR0
SCT2*
SCR2*
STT0*
STR0*
TT3
TR3
SCT0*
SCR0*
STT3*
STR3*
TT1
TR1
SCT3*
SCR3*
STT1*
STR1*
SCT1*
SCR1*
TT2
TR2
STT2*
STR2*
SCT2*
SCR2*
TT3
TR3
STT3*
STR3*
Pin Color
Odd Slots
SCT3*
SCR3*
TT0
TR0
STT0*
STR0*
SCT0*
SCR0*
TT1
TR1
STT1*
STR1*
SCT1*
SCR1*
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
* STT, STR, SCT and SCR are power failure transfer connections which are provided
only on 4T-C, 4T-CID cards and cards with the suffix PF. See page 5-17, Power Fail (PF)
Transfer Circuits for Power Failure Transfer wiring interconnections diagram and
database programming.
5-59
Table 5-21 I/O

Connections:
4T-C, 4T-CID, 4T, 4TMR,
4TPF, 4TMR-PF (/S)
(12/16) (PF) <G> <ES>
cards
Table 5-22 I/O

Connections:
4T-C, 4T-CID, 4T, 4TMR,
4TPF, 4TMR-PF (/S)
(12/16) (PF) <G> <ES>
cards
Even Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
TT2
TR2
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
STT2*
STR2*
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
TT0
TR0
SCT2*
SCR2*
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
STT0*
STR0*
TT3
TR3
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
SCT0*
SCR0*
STT3*
STR3*
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
TT1
TR1
SCT3*
SCR3*
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
STT1*
STR1*
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
SCT1*
SCR1*
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
Lower
Connector
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
TT2
TR2
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
STT2*
STR2*
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
TT0
TR0
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
SCT2*
SCR2*
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
STT0*
STR0*
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
TT3
TR3
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
SCT0*
SCR0*
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
STT3*
STR3*
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
TT1
TR1
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
SCT3*
SCR3*
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
STT1*
STR1*
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
SCT1*
SCR1*
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
5-60
Even Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
TT0
TR0
TT4
TR4
TT1
TR1
STT4*
STR4*
TT2
TR2
SCT4*
SCR4*
STT2*
STR2*
TT5
TR5
SCT2*
SCR2*
STT5*
STR5*
TT3
TR3
SCT5*
SCR5*
STT3*
STR3*
TT6
TR6
SCT3*
SCR3*
TT7
TR7
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
TT4
TR4
STT4*
STR4*
SCT4*
SCR4*
STT5*
STR5*
SCT5*
SCR5*
TT6
TR6
TT7
TR7
TT0
TR0
TT1
TR1
TT2
TR2
STT2*
STR2*
SCT2*
SCR2*
TT3
TR3
STT3*
STR3*
SCT3*
SCR3*
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
5-61
TT5
TR5
Table 5-23 I/O

Connections:
8T-C, 8T-CID, 8T, 8TPF,
8T/S, 8T/S-PF (/S) (PF)
<G> <ES> cards
Table 5-24 I/O

Connections:
8T-C, 8T-CID, 8T, 8TPF,
8T/S, 8T/S-PF (/S) (PF)
<G> <ES> cards
Even Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
TT0
TR0
TT4
TR4
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
TT1
TR1
STT4*
STR4*
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
TT2
TR2
SCT4*
SCR4*
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
STT2*
STR2*
TT5
TR5
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
SCT2*
SCR2*
STT5*
STR5*
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
TT3
TR3
SCT5*
SCR5*
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
STT3*
STR3*
TT6
TR6
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
SCT3*
SCR3*
TT7
TR7
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
Lower
Connector
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
TT0
TR0
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
TT4
TR4
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
TT1
TR1
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
STT4*
STR4*
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
TT2
TR2
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
SCT4*
SCR4*
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
STT2*
STR2*
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
TT5
TR5
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
SCT2*
SCR2*
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
STT5*
STR5*
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
TT3
TR3
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
SCT5*
SCR5*
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
STT3*
STR3*
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
TT6
TR6
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
SCT3*
SCR3*
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
TT7
TR7
5-62
Even Slots
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
TT2
TR2
STT2*
STR2*
TT0
TR0
SCT2*
SCR2*
STT0*
STR0*
TT3
TR3
SCT0*
SCR0*
STT3*
STR3*
TT1
TR1
SCT3*
SCR3*
STT1*
STR1*
SCT1*
SCR1*
TT2
TR2
STT2*
STR2*
SCT2*
SCR2*
TT3
TR3
STT3*
STR3*
Pin Color
Odd Slots
SCT3*
SCR3*
TT0
TR0
STT0*
STR0*
SCT0*
SCR0*
TT1
TR1
STT1*
STR1*
SCT1*
SCR1*
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
only on cards with the suffix PF. See page 5-17, Power Fail (PF) Transfer Circuits for
Power Failure Transfer wiring interconnections diagram and database programming.
5-63
Table 5-25 I/O

Connections:
4ALS, 4ALS/M cards
For Coral Europe only
Table 5-26 I/O

Connections:
4ALS, 4ALS/M cards
Even Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
TT2
TR2
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
STT2*
STR2*
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
TT0
TR0
SCT2*
SCR2*
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
STT0*
STR0*
TT3
TR3
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
SCT0*
SCR0*
STT3*
STR3*
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
TT1
TR1
SCT3*
SCR3*
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
STT1*
STR1*
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
SCT1*
SCR1*
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
Lower
Connector
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
TT2
TR2
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
STT2*
STR2*
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
TT0
TR0
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
SCT2*
SCR2*
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
STT0*
STR0*
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
TT3
TR3
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
SCT0*
SCR0*
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
STT3*
STR3*
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
TT1
TR1
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
SCT3*
SCR3*
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
STT1*
STR1*
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
SCT1*
SCR1*
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
5-64
Even Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
TT0
TR0
TT4
TR4
TT1
TR1
STT4*
STR4*
TT2
TR2
SCT4*
SCR4*
STT2*
STR2*
TT5
TR5
SCT2*
SCR2*
STT5*
STR5*
TT3
TR3
SCT5*
SCR5*
STT3*
STR3*
TT6
TR6
SCT3*
SCR3*
TT7
TR7
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
TT4
TR4
STT4*
STR4*
SCT4*
SCR4*
STT5*
STR5*
SCT5*
SCR5*
TT6
TR6
TT7
TR7
TT0
TR0
TT1
TR1
TT2
TR2
STT2*
STR2*
SCT2*
SCR2*
TT3
TR3
STT3*
STR3*
SCT3*
SCR3*
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
only on cards with the suffix PF. See Section 5.4, Power Fail (PF) Transfer Circuits for
5-65
TT5
TR5
Table 5-27 8ALS,

8ALS/M cards
Even Slots
Table 5-28 8ALS,

8ALS/M cards
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
TT0
TR0
TT4
TR4
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
TT1
TR1
STT4*
STR4*
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
TT2
TR2
SCT4*
SCR4*
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
STT2*
STR2*
TT5
TR5
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
SCT2*
SCR2*
STT5*
STR5*
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
TT3
TR3
SCT5*
SCR5*
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
STT3*
STR3*
TT6
TR6
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
SCT3*
SCR3*
TT7
TR7
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
Lower
Connector
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
TT0
TR0
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
TT4
TR4
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
TT1
TR1
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
STT4*
STR4*
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
TT2
TR2
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
SCT4*
SCR4*
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
STT2*
STR2*
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
TT5
TR5
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
SCT2*
SCR2*
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
STT5*
STR5*
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
TT3
TR3
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
SCT5*
SCR5*
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
STT3*
STR3*
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
TT6
TR6
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
SCT3*
SCR3*
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
TT7
TR7
5-66
Even Slots
Table 5-29 8DID, 8DID/S,

8DID/S-Z cards
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
TT0
TR0
TT4
TR4
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
TT1
TR1
TT5
TR5
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
TT2
TR2
TT6
TR6
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
TT3
TR3
TT7
TR7
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
TT4
TR4
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
TT5
TR5
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
TT6
TR6
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
TT7
TR7
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
TT0
TR0
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
TT1
TR1
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
TT2
TR2
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
TT3
TR3
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
5-67
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
Even Slots
Table 5-30 8DID, 8DID/S,

8DID/S-Z cards
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
TT0
TR0
TT4
TR4
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
TT1
TR1
TT5
TR5
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
TT2
TR2
TT6
TR6
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
TT3
TR3
TT7
TR7
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
5-68
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
Lower
Connector
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
TT0
TR0
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
TT4
TR4
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
TT1
TR1
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
TT5
TR5
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
TT2
TR2
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
TT6
TR6
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
TT3
TR3
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
TT7
TR7
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Pin Color
Even Slots
8BID cards
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
TT0
TR0
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
TT1
TR1
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
TT2
TR2
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
Lower
Connector
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
TT4
TR4
TT5
TR5
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
TT3
TR3
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
TT6
TR6
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
TT7
TR7
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
TT4
TR4
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
TT5
TR5
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
TT6
TR6
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
TT7
TR7
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
TT0
TR0
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
TT1
TR1
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
TT2
TR2
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
TT3
TR3
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
5-69
Table 5-31
Table 5-32
Even Slots
8BID cards
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
TT0
TR0
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
TT1
TR1
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
TT2
TR2
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
TT4
TR4
TT5
TR5
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
Upper
Connector
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
TT3
TR3
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
TT6
TR6
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
TT7
TR7
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Pin Color
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
TT0
TR0
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
TT1
TR1
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
TT2
TR2
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
TT3
TR3
Lower
Connector
TT4
TR4
TT5
TR5
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
TT6
TR6
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
TT7
TR7
5
5-70
Lower
Connector
Even Slots
4GID, 4TWL
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
Lower
Connector
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
TT2
TR2
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
TT0
TR0
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
TT3
TR3
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
TT1
TR1
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
TT2
TR2
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
TT3
TR3
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
TT0
TR0
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
TT1
TR1
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Table 5-33
cards
Not Used
5-71
Table 5-34
4GID cards
Even Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
Lower
Connector
TT2
TR2
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
TT0
TR0
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
TT3
TR3
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
TT1
TR1
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Pin Color
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
TT0
TR0
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
TT1
TR1
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
Lower
Connector
TT2
TR2
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
5-72
Lower
Connector
TT3
TR3
Even Slots
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
ETT0
ETR0
ETT2
ETR2
ERT0
ERR0
ERT2
ERR2
E0
SG0
E2
SG2
M0
SB0
M2
SB2
ETT1
ETR1
ETT3
ETR3
ERT1
ERR1
ERT3
ERR3
E1
SG1
E3
SG3
M1
SB1
M3
SB3
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
ETT2
ETR2
ERT2
ERR2
E2
SG2
M2
SB2
ETT3
ETR3
ERT3
ERR3
E3
SG3
M3
SB3
ETT0
ETR0
ERT0
ERR0
E0
SG0
M0
SB0
ETT1
ETR1
ERT1
ERR1
E1
SG1
M1
SB1
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Pin Color
Odd Slots
NOTE: The ERR, ERT pairs are used only when a port is strapped for 4-wire operation.
Table 5-35 4TEM,

4TEM/S, 4TEMP cards
5-73
Table 5-36 4TEM,

4TEM/S, 4TEMP cards
Even Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
ETT0
ETR0
ETT2
ETR2
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
ERT0
ERR0
ERT2
ERR2
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
E0
SG0
E2
SG2
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
M0
SB0
M2
SB2
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
ETT1
ETR1
ETT3
ETR3
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
ERT1
ERR1
ERT3
ERR3
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
E1
SG1
E3
SG3
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
M1
SB1
M3
SB3
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
Lower
Connector
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
ETT0
ETR0
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
ETT2
ETR2
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
ERT0
ERR0
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
ERT2
ERR2
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
E0
SG0
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
E2
SG2
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
M0
SB0
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
M2
SB2
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
ETT1
ETR1
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
ETT3
ETR3
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
ERT1
ERR1
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
ERT3
ERR3
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
E1
SG1
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
E3
SG3
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
M1
SB1
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
M3
SB3
NOTE: The ERR, ERT pairs are used only when a port is strapped for 4-wire operation.
5-74
Even Slots
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
AT0
AR0
DT0
DR0
AT1
AR1
DT1
DR1
AT0
AR0
DT0
DR0
AT1
AR1
DT1
DR1
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
NOTE: AT, AR are the Audio Duplex pairs to/from the station set.
DT, DR are the Data Duplex pairs to/from the station set.
2SK cards
Table 5-37
5-75
Table 5-38
2SK cards
Even Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
AT0
AR0
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
DT0
DR0
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
AT1
AR1
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
DT1
DR1
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
AT0
AR0
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
DT0
DR0
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
AT1
AR1
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
DT1
DR1
DT, DR are the Data Duplex pairs t/from the station set.
5-76
Lower
Connector
Even Slots
4SK, 8SK
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
AT0
AR0
AT4
AR4
DT0
DR0
DT4
DR4
AT1
AR1
AT5
AR5
DT1
DR1
DT5
DR5
AT2
AR2
AT6
AR6
DT2
DR2
DT6
DR6
AT3
AR3
AT7
AR7
DT3
DR3
DT7
DR7
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
AT4
AR4
DT4
DR4
AT5
AR5
DT5
DR5
AT6
AR6
DT6
DR6
AT7
AR7
DT7
DR7
AT0
AR0
DT0
DR0
AT1
AR1
DT1
DR1
AT2
AR2
DT2
DR2
AT3
AR3
DT3
DR3
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Pin Color
Odd Slots
* Station Interface Circuits 4,5,6 and 7 are present only on 8SK cards
Table 5-39
cards
5-77
Table 5-40
cards
4SK, 8SK
Even Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
AT0
AR0
AT4
AR4
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
DT0
DR0
DT4
DR4
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
AT1
AR1
AT5
AR5
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
DT1
DR1
DT5
DR5
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
AT2
AR2
AT6
AR6
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
DT2
DR2
DT6
DR6
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
AT3
AR3
AT7
AR7
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
DT3
DR3
DT7
DR7
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
AT0
AR0
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
AT4
AR4
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
DT0
DR0
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
DT4
DR4
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
AT1
AR1
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
AT5
AR5
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
DT1
DR1
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
DT5
DR5
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
AT2
AR2
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
AT6
AR6
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
DT2
DR2
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
DT6
DR6
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
AT3
AR3
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
AT7
AR7
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
DT3
DR3
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
DT7
DR7
* Station Interface Circuits 4,5,6 and 7 are present only on 8SK cards
5-78
Lower
Connector *
Even Slots
2SD, 8SD
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
DTT0*
DRT0*
DTT4
DRT4
DTR0*
DRR0*
DTR4
DRR4
DTT1*
DRT1*
DTT5
DRT5
DTR1*
DRR1*
DTR5
DRR5
DTT2
DRT2
DTT6
DTR6
DTR2
DRR2
DTR6
DRR6
DTT3
DRT3
DTT7
DRT7
DTR3
DRR3
DTR7
DRR7
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
DTT4
DRT4
DTR4
DRR4
DTT5
DRT5
DTR5
DRR5
DTT6
DTR6
DTR6
DRR6
DTT7
DRT7
DTR7
DRR7
DTT0*
DRT0*
DTR0*
DRR0*
DTT1*
DRT1*
DTR1*
DRR1*
DTT2
DRT2
DTR2
DRR2
DTT3
DRT3
DTR3
DRR3
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Pin Color
Odd Slots
* 2SD cards only provide station interface circuits 0 and 1
Table 5-41
cards
NOTE: DTT, DRT are the Transmit Data pairs to the station set.
DTR, DRR are the Receive Data pairs from the station set.
5-79
Table 5-42
cards
Even Slots
2SD, 8SD
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
DTT0*
DRT0*
DTT4
DRT4
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
DTR0*
DRR0*
DTR4
DRR4
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
DTT1*
DRT1*
DTT5
DRT5
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
DTR1*
DRR1*
DTR5
DRR5
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
DTT2
DRT2
DTT6
DTR6
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
DTR2
DRR2
DTR6
DRR6
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
DTT3
DRT3
DTT7
DRT7
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
DTR3
DRR3
DTR7
DRR7
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
DTT0*
DRT0*
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
DTT4
DRT4
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
DTR0*
DRR0*
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
DTR4
DRR4
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
DTT1*
DRT1*
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
DTT5
DRT5
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
DTR1*
DRR1*
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
DTR5
DRR5
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
DTT2
DRT2
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
DTT6
DTR6
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
DTR2
DRR2
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
DTR6
DRR6
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
DTT3
DRT3
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
DTT7
DRT7
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
DTR3
DRR3
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
DTR7
DRR7
* 2SD cards only provide station interface circuits 0 and 1
NOTE: DTT, DRT are the Transmit Data pairs to the station set.
DTR, DRR are the Receive Data pairs from the station set.
5-80
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Lower
Connector *
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
B0
A0
B8
A8
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
B1
A1
B9
A9
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
B2
A2
B10
A10
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
B3
A3
B11
A11
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
B4
A4
B12
A12
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
B5
A5
B13
A13
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
B6
A6
B14
A14
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
B7
A7
B15
A15
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
B8
A8
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
B9
A9
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
B10
A10
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
B11
A11
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
B12
A12
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
B13
A13
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
B14
A14
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
B15
A15
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
B0
A0
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
B1
A1
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
B2
A2
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
B3
A3
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
B4
A4
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
B5
A5
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
B6
A6
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
B7
A7
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Even Slots
Not Used
Table 5-43 8SKD,

16SKD cards
* Circuits 8 through 15 are present only on 16SKD cards.
5-81
Even Slots
Table 5-44 8SKD,

16SKD cards
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
B0
A0
B8
A8
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
B1
A1
B9
A9
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
B2
A2
B10
A10
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
B3
A3
B11
A11
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
B4
A4
B12
A12
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
B5
A5
B13
A13
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
B6
A6
B14
A14
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
B7
A7
B15
A15
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
Lower
Connector *
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
B0
A0
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
B8
A8
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
B1
A1
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
B9
A9
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
B2
A2
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
B10
A10
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
B3
A3
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
B11
A11
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
B4
A4
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
B12
A12
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
B5
A5
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
B13
A13
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
B6
A6
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
B14
A14
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
B7
A7
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
B15
A15
* Circuits 8 through 15 are present only on 16SKD cards.
See Table 5-18 on page 5-53 for possible card combinations.
5-82
Even Slots
8SVD cards
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
B0
A0
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
B1
A1
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
B2
A2
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
B3
A3
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
B4
A4
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
B5
A5
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
B6
A6
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
B7
A7
Lower
Connector
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
B0
A0
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
B1
A1
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
B2
A2
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
B3
A3
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
B4
A4
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
B5
A5
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
B6
A6
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
B7
A7
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
5-83
Table 5-45
Table 5-46
Even Slots
8SVD cards
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
B0
A0
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
B1
A1
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
B2
A2
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
B3
A3
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
B4
A4
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
B5
A5
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
B6
A6
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
B7
A7
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
Lower
Connector
5-84
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Even Slots
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
B0
A0
B8 *
A8 *
B1
A1
B9 *
A9 *
B2
A2
B10 *
A10 *
B3
A3
B11 *
A11 *
B4
A4
B12 *
A12 *
B5
A5
B13 *
A13 *
B6
A6
B14 *
A14 *
B7
A7
B15 *
A15 *
B16
A16
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
**
**
Lower
Connector
B8 *
A8 *
B17 **
A17 **
B9 *
A9 *
B18
A18
**
**
B10 *
A10 *
B19
A19
**
**
B11 *
A11 *
B20
A20
**
**
B12 *
A12 *
B21
A21
**
**
B13 *
A13 *
B22
A22
**
**
B14 *
A14 *
B23
A23
**
**
B15 *
A15 *
Not Used
Not Used
B0
A0
B16
A16
**
**
B1
A1
B17
A17
**
**
B2
A2
B18
A18
**
**
B3
A3
B19
A19
**
**
B4
A4
B20
A20
**
**
B5
A5
B21
A21
**
**
B6
A6
B22
A22
**
**
B7
A7
B23
A23
**
**
Not Used
Not Used
Table 5-47 8SFT, 16SFT,

24SFT, 8SDT, 16SDT,
Pin Color
24SDT cards
* Circuits 8 through 15 are not present on 8SFT and 8SDT cards.
** Circuits 16 through 23 are present only on 24SFT and 24SDT cards.

*** See Table 5-18 on page 5-53 for possible card combinations.
5-85
Table 5-48 8SFT, 16SFT,

24SFT, 8SDT, 16SDT,
Pin Color
24SDT cards
Even Slots
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
Pin Color
Upper
Connector **
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
B0
A0
B8
A8
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
B16
A16
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
B1
A1
B9
A9
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
B17
A17
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
B2
A2
B10
A10
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
B18
A18
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
B3
A3
B11
A11
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
B19
A19
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
B4
A4
B12
A12
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
B20
A20
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
B5
A5
B13
A13
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
B21
A21
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
B6
A6
B14
A14
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
B22
A22
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
B7
A7
B15
A15
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
B23
A23
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector **
Pin Color
Lower
Connector *
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
B0
A0
B16
A16
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
B8
A8
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
B1
A1
B17
A17
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
B9
A9
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
B2
A2
B18
A18
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
B10
A10
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
B3
A3
B19
A19
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
B11
A11
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
B4
A4
B20
A20
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
B12
A12
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
B5
A5
B21
A21
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
B13
A13
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
B6
A6
B22
A22
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
B14
A14
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
B7
A7
B23
A23
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
B15
A15
* Circuits 8 through 15 are not present on 8SFT and 8SDT cards.

** Circuits 16 through 23 are present only on 24SFT and 24SDT cards.
5-86
Even Slots
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
ST0
SR0
ST1
SR1
ST2
SR2
ST3
SR3
ST0
SR0
ST1
SR1
ST2
SR2
ST3
SR3
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Pin Color
Odd Slots
Table 5-49 4S/SH,

4SH/S(-LL) cards
5-87
Even Slots
Table 5-50 4S/SH,

4SH/S(-LL) cards
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
ST0
SR0
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
ST1
SR1
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
ST2
SR2
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
ST3
SR3
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
5-88
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
ST0
SR0
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
ST1
SR1
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
ST2
SR2
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
ST3
SR3
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Pin Color
Lower
Connector *
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Even Slots
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
ST0
SR0
ST4
SR4
ST1
SR1
ST5
SR5
ST2
SR2
ST6
SR6
ST3
SR3
ST7
SR7
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
ST4
SR4
ST5
SR5
ST6
SR6
ST7
SR7
ST0
SR0
ST1
SR1
ST2
SR2
ST3
SR3
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Table 5-51 8SA,8SLS, 8S,

8S/SH, 8SH/S(-LL) cards
NOTE: Cards 8S, 8S/SH, 8SH/S, 8SA and 8SLS are interchangeable.
5-89
Even Slots
Table 5-52 8SA,8SLS, 8S,

8S/SH(-LL), 8SH/S cards
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
ST0
SR0
ST4
SR4
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
ST1
SR1
ST5
SR5
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
ST2
SR2
ST6
SR6
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
ST3
SR3
ST7
SR7
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
ST0
SR0
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
ST4
SR4
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
ST1
SR1
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
ST5
SR5
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
ST2
SR2
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
ST6
SR6
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
ST3
SR3
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
ST7
SR7
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
NOTE: Cards 8S, 8S/SH, 8SH/S, 8SA and 8SLS are interchangeable.
5-90
Lower
Connector *
Even Slots
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
ST0
SR0
ST8
SR8
ST1
SR1
ST9
SR9
ST2
SR2
ST10
SR10
ST3
SR3
ST11
SR11
ST4
SR4
ST12
SR12
ST5
SR5
ST13
SR13
ST6
SR6
ST14
SR14
ST7
SR7
ST15
SR15
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
ST8
SR8
ST9
SR9
ST10
SR10
ST11
SR11
ST12
SR12
ST13
SR13
ST14
SR14
ST15
SR15
ST0
SR0
ST1
SR1
ST2
SR2
ST3
SR3
ST4
SR4
ST5
SR5
ST6
SR6
ST7
SR7
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Pin Color
Odd Slots
NOTE: All the cards listed above are interchangeable.
Table 5-53 16SLS,

16SH/S(-LL), 16S, 16SH,
16S/SH cards
5-91
Table 5-54 16SLS,

16SH/S(-LL), 16S, 16SH,
16S/SH cards
Even Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
ST0
SR0
ST8
SR8
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
ST1
SR1
ST9
SR9
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
ST2
SR2
ST10
SR10
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
ST3
SR3
ST11
SR11
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
ST4
SR4
ST12
SR12
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
ST5
SR5
ST13
SR13
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
ST6
SR6
ST14
SR14
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
ST7
SR7
ST15
SR15
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Lower
Connector
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
ST0
SR0
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
ST8
SR8
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
ST1
SR1
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
ST9
SR9
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
ST2
SR2
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
ST10
SR10
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
ST3
SR3
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
ST11
SR11
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
ST4
SR4
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
ST12
SR12
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
ST5
SR5
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
ST13
SR13
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
ST6
SR6
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
ST14
SR14
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
ST7
SR7
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
ST15
SR15
NOTE: All the cards listed above are interchangeable.
5-92
Pin Color
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
ST0
SR0
ST8
SR8
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
ST1
SR1
ST9
SR9
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
ST2
SR2
ST10
SR10
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
ST3
SR3
ST11
SR11
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
ST4
SR4
ST12
SR12
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
ST5
SR5
ST13
SR13
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
ST6
SR6
ST14
SR14
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
ST7
SR7
ST15
SR15
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
ST16 *
SR16 *
ST8
SR8
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
ST17 *
SR17 *
ST9
SR9
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
ST18 *
SR18 *
ST10
SR10
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
ST19 *
SR19 *
ST11
SR11
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
ST20 *
SR20 *
ST12
SR12
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
ST21 *
SR21 *
ST13
SR13
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
ST22 *
SR22 *
ST14
SR14
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
ST23 *
SR23 *
ST15
SR15
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
ST0
SR0
ST16 *
SR16 *
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
ST1
SR1
ST17 *
SR17 *
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
ST2
SR2
ST18 *
SR18 *
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
ST3
SR3
ST19 *
SR19 *
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
ST4
SR4
ST20 *
SR20 *
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
ST5
SR5
ST21 *
SR21 *
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
ST6
SR6
ST22 *
SR22 *
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
ST7
SR7
ST23 *
SR23 *
Not Used
Not Used
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Not Used
Not Used
* Circuits 16 through 23 are present only on 24SLS and 24SA cards.
Even Slots
Table 5-55 16SLS,

24SA,24SLS cards
5-93
Even Slots
Table 5-56 16SLS,

24SA, 24SLS cards
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
Upper
Connector *
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
ST0
SR0
ST8
SR8
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
ST16
SR16
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
ST1
SR1
ST9
SR9
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
ST17
SR17
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
ST2
SR2
ST10
SR10
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
ST18
SR18
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
ST3
SR3
ST11
SR11
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
ST19
SR19
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
ST4
SR4
ST12
SR12
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
ST20
SR20
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
ST5
SR5
ST13
SR13
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
ST21
SR21
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
ST6
SR6
ST14
SR14
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
ST22
SR22
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
ST7
SR7
ST15
SR15
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
ST23
SR23
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector *
Pin Color
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
ST0
SR0
ST16
SR16
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
ST8
SR8
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
ST1
SR1
ST17
SR17
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
ST9
SR9
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
ST2
SR2
ST18
SR18
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
ST10
SR10
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
ST3
SR3
ST19
SR19
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
ST11
SR11
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
ST4
SR4
ST20
SR20
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
ST12
SR12
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
ST5
SR5
ST21
SR21
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
ST13
SR13
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
ST6
SR6
ST22
SR22
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
ST14
SR14
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
ST7
SR7
ST23
SR23
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
ST15
SR15
* Circuits 16 through 23 are present only on 24SLS and 24SA cards.
5-94
Lower
Connector
Even Slots
8SM cards
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
ST0
SR0
ST4
SR4
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
ST1
SR1
ST5
SR5
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
ST2
SR2
ST6
SR6
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
ST3
SR3
ST7
SR7
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
ST4
SR4
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
ST5
SR5
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
ST6
SR6
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
ST7
SR7
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
ST0
SR0
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
ST1
SR1
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
ST2
SR2
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
ST3
SR3
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
5-95
Table 5-57
Table 5-58
Even Slots
8SM cards
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
ST0
SR0
ST4
SR4
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
ST1
SR1
ST5
SR5
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
ST2
SR2
ST6
SR6
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
ST3
SR3
ST7
SR7
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
5-96
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
Lower
Connector
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
ST0
SR0
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
ST4
SR4
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
ST1
SR1
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
ST5
SR5
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
ST2
SR2
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
ST6
SR6
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
ST3
SR3
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
ST7
SR7
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Pin Color
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
26 Wh/Bl
TXD1
TXD3
RXD1
RXD3
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
RTS1
RTS3
CTS1
CTS3
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
DTR1
DTR3
DSR1
DSR3
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
TXD2
RLY1
RXD2
RLY1
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
RTS2
RLY2
CTS2
RLY2
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
DTR2
RLY3
DSR2
RLY3
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
M1
PAGE *
M1
PAGE *
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
M2
Not Used
M2
SGRND
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
TXD3
RXD3
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
RTS3
CTS3
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
DTR3
DSR3
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
RLY1
RLY1
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
RLY2
RLY2
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
RLY3
RLY3
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
PAGE *
PAGE *
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
Not Used
SGRND
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
TXD1
RXD1
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
RTS1
CTS1
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
DTR1
DSR1
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
TXD2
RXD2
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
RTS2
CTS2
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
DTR2
DSR2
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
M1
M1
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
M2
M2
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
25 Sl/Vi
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
* When replacing RMI with 8DRCM or 8DRCF, mind the PAGE I/O connections, since their MDF
location may vary.
NOTE: M1 - Audio Music Input (Internal/External)); M2 - Audio Music Input (External only)
RLY1 - External Paging Contact; RLY2 - UNA Bell Contact
RLY3 - System Alarm or Dial-Operated Contact
RXD, TXD, CTS, RTS, DSR, DTR, SGRND - RS232E Data Ports
5-97
Even Slots
Table 5-59 8DRCF,

8DRCM cards
Even Slots
Table 5-60 8DRCF,

8DRCM cards
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
TXD1
RXD1
TXD3
RXD3
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
RTS1
CTS1
RTS3
CTS3
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
DTR1
DSR1
DTR3
DSR3
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
TXD2
RXD2
RLY1
RLY1
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
RTS2
CTS2
RLY2
RLY2
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
DTR2
DSR2
RLY3
RLY3
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
M1
M1
PAGE *
PAGE *
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
M2
M2
Not Used
SGRND
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
Lower
Connector
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
TXD1
RXD1
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
TXD3
RXD3
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
RTS1
CTS1
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
RTS3
CTS3
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
DTR1
DSR1
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
DTR3
DSR3
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
TXD2
RXD2
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
RLY1
RLY1
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
RTS2
CTS2
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
RLY2
RLY2
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
DTR2
DSR2
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
RLY3
RLY3
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
M1
M1
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
PAGE *
PAGE *
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
M2
M2
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Not Used
SGRND
* When replacing RMI with 8DRCM or 8DRCF, mind the PAGE I/O connections, since their MDF
location may vary.
NOTE: M1 - Audio Music Input (Internal/External));

M2 - Audio Music Input (External only)
RLY1 - External Paging Contact;
RLY2 - UNA Bell Contact
RXD, TXD, CTS, RTS, DSR, DTR, SGRND - RS232E Data Ports
5-98
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Odd Slots
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
26 Wh/Bl
TXD1 *
TXD3 *
RXD1 *
RXD3 *
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
RTS1 *
RTS3 *
CTS1 *
CTS3 *
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
DTR1 *
DTR3 *
DSR1 *
DSR3 *
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
TXD2 *
RLY1
RXD2 *
RLY1
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
RTS2 *
RLY2
CTS2 *
RLY2
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
DTR2 *
RLY3
DSR2 *
RLY3
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
M/P1
M/P1
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
M/P2
Not Used
M/P2
SGRND *
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
TXD3 *
RXD3 *
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
RTS3 *
CTS3 *
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
DTR3 *
DSR3 *
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
RLY1
RLY1
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
RLY2
RLY2
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
RLY3
RLY3
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
Not Used
SGRND *
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
TXD1 *
RXD1 *
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
RTS1 *
CTS1 *
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
DTR1 *
DSR1 *
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
TXD2 *
RXD2 *
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
RTS2 *
CTS2 *
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
DTR2 *
DSR2 *
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
M/P1
M/P1
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
M/P2
M/P2
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
25 Sl/Vi
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
* RXD, TXD, CTS, RTS, DSR, DTR, SGRND - RS232C Data Ports, are present only on RMI cards.
NOTE: M/P1 - Audio Input (MOH, Background Music)

M/P2 - 2nd Audio Input or External Paging Audio Output
RLY1 - External Paging Contact
Even Slots
RMI, ASU
Table 5-61
cards
5-99
Table 5-62
cards
Even Slots
RMI, ASU
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
TXD1 *
RXD1 *
TXD3 *
RXD3 *
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
RTS1 *
CTS1 *
RTS3 *
CTS3 *
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
DTR1 *
DSR1 *
DTR3 *
DSR3 *
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
TXD2 *
RXD2 *
RLY1
RLY1
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
RTS2 *
CTS2 *
RLY2
RLY2
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
DTR2 *
DSR2 *
RLY3
RLY3
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
M/P1
M/P1
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
M/P2
M/P2
Upper
Connector
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
Not Used
SGRND *
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
Lower
Connector
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
TXD1 *
RXD1 *
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
TXD3 *
RXD3 *
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
RTS1 *
CTS1 *
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
RTS3 *
CTS3 *
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
DTR1 *
DSR1 *
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
DTR3 *
DSR3 *
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
TXD2 *
RXD2 *
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
RLY1
RLY1
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
RTS2 *
CTS2 *
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
RLY2
RLY2
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
DTR2 *
DSR2 *
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
RLY3
RLY3
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
M/P1
M/P1
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
M/P2
M/P2
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Not Used
SGRND *
* RXD, TXD, CTS, RTS, DSR, DTR, SGRND - RS232C Data Ports, are present only
on RMI cards.
NOTE: M/P1 - Audio Input (MOH, Background Music)

M/P2 - 2nd Audio Input or External Paging Audio Output
RLY1 - External Paging Contact
5-100
Even Slots
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
TT BS1 *
TR BS1 *
RT BS1 *
RR BS1 *
TT BS2 *
TR BS2 *
RT BS2 *
RR BS2 *
CLK 2M (-)
CLK 2M (+)
CLK 8K (-)
CLK 8K (+)
PLS 320 ms (-)
PLS 320 ms (+)
RS 485 (-)
RS 485 (+)
TT BS1 *
TR BS1 *
RT BS1 *
RR BS1 *
TT BS2 *
TR BS2 *
RT BS2 *
RR BS2 *
CLK 2M (-)
CLK 2M (+)
CLK 8K (-)
CLK 8K (+)
PLS 320 ms (-)
PLS 320 ms (+)
RS 485 (-)
RS 485 (+)
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Pin Color
Odd Slots
* TR BS and TT BS pairs are connected to pins 3,4 of base stations Rx plug.

RR BS and RT BS pairs are connected to pins 3,4 of base stations Tx plug.
Table 5-63 SKW/x cards

(Issue 4 and later)
5-101
Even Slots
Table 5-64 SKW/x cards

(Issue 4 and later)
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
TT BS1 *
TR BS1 *
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
RT BS1 *
RR BS1 *
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
TT BS2 *
TR BS2 *
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
RT BS2 *
RR BS2 *
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
CLK 2M (-)
CLK 2M (+)
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
CLK 8K (-)
CLK 8K (+)
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
PLS 320 ms (-)

PLS 320 ms (+)
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
RS 485 (-)
RS 485 (+)
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
TT BS1 *
TR BS1 *
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
RT BS1 *
RR BS1 *
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
TT BS2 *
TR BS2 *
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
RT BS2 *
RR BS2 *
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
CLK 2M (-)
CLK 2M (+)
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
CLK 8K (-)
CLK 8K (+)
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
PLS 320 ms (-)

PLS 320 ms (+)
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
RS 485 (-)
RS 485 (+)
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Lower
Connector
* TR BS and TT BS pairs are connected to pins 3,4 of base stations Rx plug
RR BS and RT BS pairs are connected to pins 3,4 of base stations Tx plug.
5-102
Even Slots
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
B0
A0
B1
A1
B2
A2
B3
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
B7
A7
B0
A0
B1
A1
B2
A2
B3
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
B7
A7
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Pin Color
Odd Slots
NOTE: For 16SKK cards see Table 5-67 below.
Table 5-65 8SKK card

for Wireless FlexAIR
(Radio Base Station)
5-103

Even Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
B0
A0
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
B1
A1
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
B2
A2
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
B3
A3
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
B4
A4
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
B5
A5
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
B6
A6
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
B7
A7
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
B0
A0
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
B1
A1
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
B2
A2
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
B3
A3
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
B4
A4
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
B5
A5
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
B6
A6
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
B7
A7
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
NOTE: For 16SKK cards see Table 5-68 below.
5-104
Pin Color
Lower
Connector
Even Slots
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
25 Sl/Vi
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
B0
A0
B8
A8
B1
A1
B9
A9
B2
A2
B10
A10
B3
A3
B11
A11
B4
A4
B12
A12
B5
A5
B13
A13
B6
A6
B14
A14
B7
A7
B15
A15
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
B8
A8
B9
A9
B10
A10
B11
A11
B12
A12
B13
A13
B14
A14
B15
A15
B0
A0
B1
A1
B2
A2
B3
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
B7
A7
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Pin Color
Odd Slots
NOTE: Radio Base Station ports 8 through 15 are not present only on 8SKK cards.

5-105

Even Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
B0
A0
B8
A8
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
B1
A1
B9
A9
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
B2
A2
B10
A10
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
B3
A3
B11
A11
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
B4
A4
B12
A12
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
B5
A5
B13
A13
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
B6
A6
B14
A14
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
B7
A7
B15
A15
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
Upper
Connector
Odd Slots
Pin Color
Upper
Connector
Lower
Connector
Pin Color
Lower
Connector
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
B0
A0
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
B8
A8
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
B1
A1
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
B9
A9
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
B2
A2
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
B10
A10
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
B3
A3
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
B11
A11
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
B4
A4
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
B12
A12
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
B5
A5
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
B13
A13
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
B6
A6
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
B14
A14
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
B7
A7
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
B15
A15
NOTE: Radio Base Station ports 8 through 15 are not present only on 8SKK cards.
5-106
Chapter 6
Cage Description
6.1 Cage Description and Installation........................6-3
Cor
Coral
6.2 Coral IPx 800M Main Cage ...............................6-39

6.3 Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage .......................6-45
6.4 System Configuration Options...........................6-53
Cage Description and Installation
6.1
This section describes the Coral IPx 800 cage. Upon completing this section, you will
be familiar with cage components and the general procedure of installing a cage onto a
19" or 23" rack. The Coral IPx 800 system is housed in one or more rack-mounted
cages. Each system consists of one main cage, which contains the common control
cards and peripheral cards, and one or two optional expansion cages. There are up to
three cages per system.
Coral IPx 800 is sold as a separate unit that is mounted on a rack supplied
by the customer.
For more detailed information about specific cages (main or expansion), refer to the
following:
Coral IPx 800M Main Cage, on page 6-39
Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage, on page 6-45
The actual instructions for installing the cage are found in Chapter 2.
Cage Structure
0
power supply unit, control cards, peripheral cards, and the I/O connections. The cages
are designed to provide a simple, reliable method for installing and removing the
printed circuit cards and assemblies that contain the active circuitry of the system.
The cage is field mounted in separate cages onto a rack supplied by the customer.
Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2 display the cage mounted onto a 19" rack. The cage can be
mounted onto a 23" rack by removing and reconfiguring mounting brackets. The cage
includes rack-mounted brackets and a door.
The main and expansion cages are easily accommodated into a standard 19 inch or 23
inch rack. The Coral IPx 800 system can be expanded by adding more cages.
The cage houses all hardware components of the Coral IPx 800 system including the
A hinged, removable latching door in the front enables easy access to circuit cards. All
cages are convection cooled in such a manner that allows cool air inflow to the cage
from the bottom of the front door and out from the top panel.
Cage Description
6-3
All cages are fully protected against electrical surge and electromagnetic and
radio-frequency interference (EMI and RFI). They meet or exceed all specifications of
telecommunications and electrical safety authorities world-wide. Peripheral interface
connections are made via the rear panel.
Cage with Door Closed

Cage with Door Opened
6-4
Figure 6-3 displays the system configuration with three cages mounted onto a rack
with the door closed.

System with Three Cages
Cage Description
6-5
Cage Front, Top, and Side Panels

The Coral IPx 800 cage is designed to provide a simple, reliable method for installing
and removing the printed circuit cards and assemblies that contain the active circuitry
of the system.
The Coral IPx 800 cage includes slots for control, service, and peripheral cards, a slot
for the power supply unit, door locking studs, free space at the bottom of the cage
designed for cool air intake, holes on the top panel for hot air outflow, I/O cable
routing from the front of the cage to the left and right panels, and a door release
mechanism on the right side of the cabinet adjacent to the door hinge.
6-6
Front of the Cage

The front view of the cage displays the cage door. See Figure 6-4. The cage door
includes a ventilation grille near the bottom for incoming cool air and locking studs on
the left side of the door.
Figure 6-4 Front, Left,

Right, and Top Views of
Coral IPx 800 Cage
Cage Description
6-7
Left and Right Panels

Figure 6-5 displays the left and right panels of the cage including the mounting
bracket, which is used to attach the cage to the rack. The mounting bracket for the rack
can be fitted to interface with both 19 and 23 racks. The cage is supplied with the
bracket mounted to interface with 19 racks. If the cage is to be mounted on a 23
rack, the bracket must be reassembled accordingly, as described on page 2-13, Preparing
the Cage for Mounting onto a 23 Rack.
Routing holes at the bottom of the left and right panels enable I/O connection wires to
be routed from the front of the cards.
Figure 6-5 Left and
Right Panels of the Cage
Mounting bracket
19" configuration
Hanging pin
Left side
Top door fastener
Rear panel
Cage door
Bottom door fastener
Cable routing
hole
Mounting bracket
19" configuration
Hanging pin
Right side
Cage door
Rear panel
Cable routing
hole
6-8
Top Panel
The top panel includes ventilation holes that allow warm air from the cage to flow
outwards. Do not block the top panel of the cage. If the ventilation holes are blocked,
heat will not be removed from the cage and the heat build-up could cause a fire. When
two Coral cages are installed one on top of the other, heat from the lower cage is
released through the bottom rear side of the cage above. When other systems are
installed directly above the Coral cage, a heat buffer bracket must be installed. See page
6-29, Mounting Brackets for specific conditions that require this bracket and the number
of brackets supplied per system.
Fire Hazard. The top panel ventilation holes are designed to allow warm air to flow out of
the cage. Placing objects on top of the cage will interfere with the heat dissipation
process and could result in fire.
X
6
Figure 6-6 Top Panel of

Cage Clear of Objects
Cage Description
6-9
Door
The door on the front of the cage provides physical protection to internal circuitry
during normal operation while still allowing access to the interior for maintenance
activities. The cage is also protected from RFI when the door is closed.
The cage door includes a ventilation grille near the bottom that allows cool air to enter
the cage. See Figure 6-7 for details. Locking studs are included on the left side of the
door that prevent the door from opening during normal operation. The locking stud is
moved from the unlocked position to the locked position by inserting a screwdriver
blade into the stud slot and turning counter-clockwise half a turn.
Figure 6-7 Front View of
Cage Door
Lock
Locking studs
Ventilation grille
The inside of the door includes a grounding wire connection designed to ground the
door. See Figure 6-8 for details. Door hinge mounts are mounted onto the hinges on the
right side of the cage. The door release mechanism on the right side of the cage
prevents the door from being removed from the cage accidentally from the two door
hinges.
Figure 6-8 Cage

Including Components
Relevant to the Door
Door release
mechanism
Door
fastening
holes
Door hinge
mounts
(Female)
Door hinges
(Male)
Locking
studs
Free space
Grounding wire
connection
Ventilation grille
6-10
Rear Panel
The rear panel includes the I/O Champ and RJ-45 cable connectors, cable connectors
between cages, AC power cord, AC power cover, DC power cover, spare fuse, and the
cage ground terminal. The rear panel of the cage is RFI protected. The Champ
connectors are secured to the rear panel with a set of Hook and Loop VelcroTM nylon
straps. See Figure 6-9 and Figure 6-10.
Figure 6-9 Coral

IPx 800M Rear Panel
DC-D power supply

duplication connector
Four upper
Champ I/O
connectors
9 RJ-45 I/O
connectors
Connector to
expansion
cage
Spare fuse
DC power
cover
RJ-45 LAN
connectors
AC power
cord
Ground
terminal
Six upper
Champ I/O
connectors
DC-D power supply

duplication connector
11 RJ-45 I/O
connectors
Connectors
to other cages
Spare fuse
DC power
cover
AC power
cover
Six lower
Champ I/O
connectors
Set of Velcro
nylon straps for
securing cables
Ground
terminal
Figure 6-10 Coral

IPx 800X Rear Panel
Set of Velcro
nylon straps for
securing cables
Four lower
Champ I/O
connectors
AC power
cover
AC power
cord
Cage Description
6-11
Connectors to Other Cages

Each cage includes connectors that allow cable connection between cages. The type
and quantity of cable depends on the cage number. For further information, see page
6-53, System Configuration Options.
I/O RJ-45 Connectors

Every peripheral card slot includes a single RJ-45 connector on the rear panel that is
used for digital cards (E1, T1, PRI, UDT, UGW, etc.). The RJ-45 connectors provide the
connections for the LAN and the digital trunks.
Digital Trunks
Place TBR, UDT, PRI, T1, 30T, or 30T/x digital trunk interface cards in slot #4 (the
primary synchronization slot) or slot #5 (the secondary synchronization slot). These
slots have been pre-wired to function as the primary and secondary external clock
sources. For further details, see the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Manual - Chapter 3.
LAN RJ-45 Connectors

The Coral IPx 800M cage includes two RJ-45 LAN connectors on the rear panel. These
connectors are for future use with network cards.
Cage Ground Terminal

The ground terminal is used to connect the cage to the master ground unit.
See Figure 6-13.
Odd and Even Slots

Each universal I/O slot is referred to as an odd slot (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11) or an even slot (2,
4, 6, 8, 10, 12).
I/O Champ Connectors

Half of the I/O Champ connectors are positioned on the cage rear panel on the top,
and are referred to as the upper connectors. The remaining half connectors are mounted
on the bottom, and are referred to as the lower connectors.
Each Champ connector includes a set of straps that allow the connectors to be secured
in place and prevent them from being inadvertently disconnected. Mating male plugs
should be industry standard (Amphenol, AMPTM, or equivalent). The connectors
provide metallic paths from the peripheral cards to station and trunk equipment
external to the system. The upper and lower champs are generally connected to the
6-12
MDF while the RJ-45 connectors are generally connected to the LAN or to digital
equipment.
Card Slot to I/O Champ Connector Relationship

Each peripheral card has a maximum of twenty four wire pairs. The twenty four wire
pairs are connected to the top and bottom I/O Champ connectors. Each pair of I/O
Champ connectors (upper and lower) serve two peripheral cards (even and odd).
Figure 6-11 illustrates the card slot to I/O Champ connector relationship. Pair 25 on
each I/O connector is not used.
Figure 6-12 illustrates the layout of I/O connectors for any pair of odd and even
universal I/O slots, as they appear on industry standard, 66 type punch blocks.
Refer to the specific card tables in Chapter 5 for I/O connector pin assignments. There
are no I/O connector pin assignments for the power supplies, common control cards,
or shared service cards.
Cage Description
6-13

Connection Pair
Allocation
25
50
26
UPPER
I/O CHAMP
CONNECTOR
EVEN SLOTS
2,4,6,8,10,12
NOT
USED
ODD SLOTS
1,3,5,7,9,11
1
50
26
To LOWER I/O
CHAMP CONNECTOR
To UPPER I/O
CHAMP CONNECTOR
EVEN
SLOTS
White/blue
2/27
White/orange
3/28
White/green
4/29
White/brown
5/30
White/slate
6/31
Red/blue
7/32
Red/orange
8/33
Red/green
Red/Brn
Red/Brn
9/34
Red/brown
Pairs 17-24
Pair 25
10/35
Red/slate
11/36
Black/blue
12/37
Black/orange
13/38
Black/green
14/39
Black/brown
15/40
Black/slate
16/41
Yellow/blue
17/42
Yellow/orange
18/43
Yellow/green
19/44
Yellow/brown
20/45
Yellow/slate
21/46
Violet/blue
22/47
Violet/orange
23/48
Violet/green
Vio/Brn
24/49
Violet/brown
Pair 25
25/50
Violet/slate
Pairs 9-16
EVEN
SLOTS
Ylw/Blu
Ylw/Org
ODD
SLOTS
Vio/Brn
Not used
1/26
Red/Grn
Ylw/Blu
Ylw/Org
ODD
SLOTS
Pairs 1-8
Wht/Blu
Red/Grn
Pairs 9-16
ODD
SLOTS
Pairs 1-8
Wht/Blu
EVEN
SLOTS
LOWER
I/O CHAMP
CONNECTOR
Not used
Pairs 17-24

Connection Layout for 66
Type Punch Blocks
25
Coral IPx 800,3000, 4000

ODD SLOTS 1-11
EVEN SLOTS 2-12
Note: These connections are identical for IPx 800, 3000, and 4000 systems.
AC Power Cord
The AC power cord is attached to the rear panel beneath the DC power cover. For
more information, see page 6-15, Coral IPx 800 DC Power Cover. If the system runs on
DC current, the AC power cord is not in use and can be disconnected from the cage.
See page 6-20, Removing the AC Power Cord for more details. If the system runs on AC
6-14
current, the AC power cord must be connected to the cage. See page 6-21, Installing the
AC Power Cord.
AC Power Cover
The AC power cover protects the AC power cord housing when it is not in use and the
cord has been disconnected (for DC systems). For detailed instructions on how to
install the AC power cover, see page 6-20, Removing the AC Power Cord.
DC Power Cover
The DC power cover is attached to the rear panel with two M4 screws on the top side
of the cover. See Figure 6-14. The bottom side of the cover includes two angles that
form extrusions, which are inserted into two mating slots on the rear panel of the cage
and secure the bottom part of the DC cover to the rear panel. A spare DC fuse is
attached to the DC cover.
Figure 6-13 DC Power
Cover Closure
Requirement for both AC
and DC Powered Coral
IPx 800 Systems
DC power cover
AC power cover
Cage ground terminal

DC Power Cover
AC power cord
to wall socket
M4 screws
inserted through
these holes
Spare fuse for
DC powered
systems
Extrusions
Cage Description
6-15
DC Power Terminals and Fuse

The DC power terminals and fuse are protected by a cover that is secured to the rear
panel. See Figure 6-18.
Opening the DC Power Cover

1.
Unfasten the two M4 screws at the top of the DC power cover by turning a
Phillips screwdriver in the counter clockwise direction.
2.
Lift and unhook the extrusion at the bottom of the DC cover from the rear panel.
Place the screws in a safe place for reassembly.
3.
Remove the DC power cover.
Electrical Hazard. Contact with live wires could cause shock, burn, or death. Verify that
all DC power is disconnected from the cage before opening.
Figure 6-15 DC Cover

Removal
Step
Step
Unscrew the two

screws in the
counter clockwise
direction.
Lift and raise

cover.
Remove cover.
6-16
Closing the DC Power Cover

1.
Insert the extrusion at the bottom of the DC cover into the two mating slots on the
rear panel.
2.
Push the DC cover closed.
3.
Fasten the two M4 screws in the clockwise direction.
Figure 6-16 DC Cover

Installation
Step
Push cover
closed.
Step
Insert bottom
extrusion into
mating slot on
rear panel.
Fasten cover
clockwise.
Step
Cage Description
6-17
DC Power Terminals
Beneath the DC power cover (Figure 6-17) are two 48 VRTN terminals, two 48V
terminals, and two GND terminals. Upper and lower terminals are connected with a
bonding bar. This allows interconnection of (up to four) cages. The terminals marked
GND are not used. See page 2-22, Wiring DC Powered Systems for a description of how to
connect the power wiring of the cage.
DC Power Fuse
The DC power fuse is attached to the rear panel of the cage underneath the DC power
cover. All cages include a fuse rated 30A/125V/S.B. All cages are shipped with a spare
fuse attached to the DC power cover. The spare fuse can be easily removed from the
DC power cover.
Figure 6-17 Rear Panel
of Coral IPx 800 Cage
with DC Power Cover
Removed
Spare fuse
30A/125V/S.B.
DC power
cover
DC power fuse
30A/125V/S.B.
DC power terminals
AC power cover

DC Power Terminals
DC power fuse
30A/125V/S.B.
Fuse
AC power cord
Bonding bars
6-18
-48V
48V
RTN
-48V
48V
RTN
GND
GND
Replacing a DC Power Fuse

1.
Verify that the DC power source is disconnected from the cage.
Electrical Hazard. Contact with live wires could cause shock, burn, or death. Verify that
all DC power is disconnected from the cage before opening.
2.
Open the DC power cover. See page 6-16, Opening the DC Power Cover for details.
3.
Replace only with the same type and rating of fuse. A spare fuse is located on the
DC power cover.
4.
Close the DC power cover. See page 6-17, Closing the DC Power Cover for details.
5.
Replace the spare fuse on the DC power cover with the same type and rating of
fuse.
Cage Description
6-19
AC Power Cord and Cover

When the system runs on DC power, you do not need the AC power cord, and it can
be disconnected from the cage.
Removing the AC Power Cord

To disconnect the AC power cord from the cage (See Figure 6-19):
1.
Open the DC power cover. See page 6-16, Opening the DC Power Cover.
2.
Unfasten the two screws that secure the AC power cord to the cage backplane and
remove the AC power cord.
Unfasten the screws with extreme caution, taking care that they do not fall into the
space between the rear panel and backplane. If the screws fall into that space, the
rear panel will have to be removed, and the screws extracted. Otherwise, the system
may malfunction due to short circuit.
3.
Unfasten the two screws that secure the AC connector cover to the rear panel.
4.
Reassemble the AC power cover over the space vacated by the AC connector.
5.
Close the DC power cover. See page 6-17, Closing the DC Power Cover.
6.
Store the AC power cord and screws for future reassembly.
Figure 6-19 AC Power

Cord Disassembly
6-20
Unfasten screws
securing AC cord
to cage and remove
cord
Unfasten captive
screws securing
AC connector cover
to cage
Reassemble AC
connector cover
over space vacated
by AC cord
Installing the AC Power Cord

When the system runs on AC power, you need the AC power cord, and it must be
connected to the cage.
To connect the AC power cord to the cage (see Figure 6-20):
1.
Open the DC power cover. See page 6-16, Opening the DC Power Cover.
2.
Unfasten the two screws and washers that secure the AC power cover to the cage
backplane.
3.
Reassemble the AC power cover adjacent to the AC power opening.
4.
Assemble the AC power cord with the two M3 screws.
Fasten the screws with extreme caution, taking care that they do not fall into the space
between the rear panel and backplane. If the screws fall into that space, the rear
panel will have to be removed, and the screws extracted. Otherwise, the system may
malfunction due to a short circuit.
Figure 6-20 AC Power

Cord Assembly
Unfasten captive
screws securing
AC connector cover
to cage
Reassemble AC
connector cover
adjacent to the
AC power
connector opening.
Close the DC power cover. See page 6-17, Closing the DC Power Cover.
Assemble AC power
cord to the cage.
5.
Cage Description
6-21
Accessing the Cage Interior

Opening the Door
1.
Unfasten the two locking studs on the left side of the door with a straight blade
screwdriver (half a turn counter clockwise). See Figure 6-21.
2.
Pull the door open using moderate force. The door opens to 110.
Electrical Hazard. Contact with live internal components could cause shock, burn, or
death. During system operation, the cage door must remain closed at all times. Exercise
extreme caution while handling the internal components of the cage.
Figure 6-21 Opening the

Door
Step
Step
Unfasten two studs

half a turn counter
clockwise.
Open door.
WARNING:
Avoid dangerous electric
shock. Do not touch electrical
components of Coral cards.
Note
6-22
Door opens to 110.
Closing the Door

1.
Verify that all cards and the power supply unit are properly installed and all
cables are properly connected. See Figure 6-22.
2.
Verify that the free space at the bottom of the cage is free of objects with the
exception of cables routed from the front of the cage.
Fire Hazard. The free space at the bottom of the cage is designed to allow cool air to
flow into the cage. Foreign objects placed inside this space will interfere with the heat
dissipation and could cause a fire.
3.
Close the door firmly.
4.
Fasten the locking studs with a straight blade screwdriver (half a turn clockwise).
Figure 6-22 Closing the

Door
Step
Step
Verify that all cards

are properly
installed.
Verify that the

free space is
free of objects.
WA R N I N G
Close door firmly.
Step
Tighten two
studs half a turn
clockwise.
Step
Prevent fire. Do not place any

object inside the free space
at the bottom of the cage.
Cage Description
6-23
Removing the Door

1.
Open the door to an angle of at least 90. See Figure 6-23.
2.
Pull the grounding wire from the connection on the door to disconnect it.
3.
Insert a straight blade screwdriver between the door release mechanism and the
right panel of the cage, and pry the door release mechanism outwards while
lifting the door upwards.
4.
At the same time, lift and remove the door.
Figure 6-23 Removing

the Door
Step
Step
Unplug grounding
wire.
Step
Pry the door release

mechanism outwards,
and at the same time
lift the door upwards.
Step
6-24
Open cage door to

an angle of at least
90 degrees.
Remove door.
Assembling the Door

1.
Align the door hinge mount above the cage hinges, such that the door and the
cage form an angle that is greater than 90. See Figure 6-24.
2.
Lower the door onto the hinges and push down until the door clicks into place.
3.
From the bottom of the cage, connect the grounding wire plug to the grounding
connection.
Figure 6-24 Assembling

the Door
Cage Description
6-25
Cage Interior
The cage houses the power supply unit, control, service, buffer, and peripheral cards.
The bottom of the cage includes six slots that allow I/O cables to be routed from the
front side of the cage to the routing holes on the side panels. The free space at the
bottom of the cage allows cables from the front of the panel to be routed from the front
side of the cage to the routing holes on the left and right panels. It also allows cool air
to flow inside the cage from the ventilation grille on the cage door. See Figure 6-25.

800 Cage Interior
Door release
mechanism
Ground wire
Door locking
bar
Card slots
Cable routing
hole
Free space
Wire routing
slot
IPx 800M Main Cage

The IPx 800M main cage is designated as the common control cage and is used to
house two common control cards, eight peripheral cards and one service card. The
Coral IPx 800 includes one IPx 800M cage for all configurations. See Figure 6-26 for a
view of the IPx 800M backplane. For more information, see page 6-39, Coral IPx 800M
Main Cage.
IPx 800X Expansion Cage

The IPx 800X expansion cage is used to house eleven peripheral cards and one service
or PX card. The Coral IPx 800 system includes up to two IPx 800X cages for all
configurations. See Figure 6-27 for a view of the IPx 800X backplane. For more
information, see page 6-45, Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage.
Card Slots
Guides at the top and bottom of the card cage align the cards and assemblies during
their insertion with multi-pin connectors mounted on the card cage backplane. The
guides and associated connectors comprise a card slot. See Figure 6-25.
6-26
The connectors provide metallic paths from the cards to the various power and signal
busses of the system and for peripheral cards, to the Input/Output (I/O) connectors.
Power Supply Unit

The Coral IPx 800 cage includes one PS19 AC, DC, or DC-D power supply unit located
on the left side of the cage. The power supply unit is attached to the cage with two
screws that ensure that the unit is grounded. These power supply units are described
in detail in Chapter 7.
Control Cards
The control cards are housed in the right side of the main cage. These cards are
described in detail in Chapter 8.
The Coral IPx 800 includes the MEX-IP and the HDC control cards.
Peripheral Cards
Coral IPx 800 includes eight peripheral cards in the main cage and 11 peripheral cards
in the expansion cage.
Service Cards
A service card can be housed in slot 9 of the IPx 800M cage and in slot 1 of the IPx
800X cage.
Buffer Card
A PX card is installed in slot 1 of the first IPx 800X cage when two expansion cages are
Configuration Jumpers
The configuration jumpers in the all cages are located on the backplane. See Figure 6-26
and Figure 6-27. For further information see page 6-39, Coral IPx 800M Main Cage.
installed.
Cage Description
6-27
Figure 6-26 Coral

IPx 800M Backplane
Power supply
connector
Configuration
jumpers
AC power
input
Shared service
card
Figure 6-27 Coral

IPx 800X Backplane
8 Peripheral card
connectors
Control and HDC

card connectors
Configuration
jumpers
Power supply
connector
AC power
input
11 peripheral card
connectors
Service or PX
card connectors
Front I/O Connections

Certain Coral cards (for example, MEX-IP, UDT, IPG, PRI, T1, and 30T) include I/O
connectors on the front that are routed via the free space at the bottom of the cage,
Figure 6-28 Cable

Routing from the Front of
the Cage
Left routing
hole
through the hole either on the left or right side. See Figure 6-28.
6-28
Free space
Right routing
hole
Mounting Brackets
The cage is supplied with the bracket mounted on the cage to interface with 19" racks.
If the cage is to be mounted on a 23" rack, the bracket must be reassembled
accordingly, as described on page 2-13, Preparing the Cage for Mounting onto a 23 Rack.
Figure 6-29 displays the cage mounted onto a 19" rack and Figure 6-30 displays the cage
mounted onto a 23" rack.
Figure 6-29 Cage

Mounted onto 19 Rack
19 Configuration
19 Rack
Mounting
bracket
Figure 6-30 Cage

Mounted onto 23 Rack
23 Configuration
Mounting
bracket
23 Rack
Cage Description
6-29
Heat Buffer Bracket

This section describes the conditions that necessitate the use of a heat buffer bracket on
the cage. The Coral IPx cage is designed such that cool air flows into the cage from the
ventilation grille at the bottom of the cage door. See Figure 6-31. The free space at the
bottom section of the cage allows cool air to flow into the cage via the ventilation grille
on the door, and then upwards past the cards and power supply. The cool air absorbs
the heat from the circuitry and flows out of the cage via the holes on the top panel.
The top panel must remain clear of objects, as they will interfere with the heat removal
from the cage and could result in a fire.
The bottom panel of the cage is angled such that it forms a gap between the bottom
panel and the top panel of the cage underneath. This gap allows the warm air to be
released. See Figure 6-33 through Figure 6-35. For this reason, whenever a Coral IPx
cage is installed directly above another Coral IPx cage, there is no need to install a heat
buffer bracket. Whenever a Coral IPx cage is NOT installed directly above, a heat
buffer bracket must be installed.
The heat buffer bracket is positioned such that it is impossible to install equipment
directly above the Coral IPx cage. See Figure 6-32. This ensures that a minimum space
of 1U (1.75" or 45 mm) is maintained between the top panel of the Coral IPx cage and
any equipment that may be installed above.

Cage Ventilation Flow
Warm air outflow
Free space
6-30
Ventilation grille
Number of Heat Buffer Brackets Supplied

The IPx 800 cage includes one heat buffer bracket as part of the standard shipment.
The customer can order additional heat buffer brackets independently.
Unless otherwise specified, the cages are shipped with 19" brackets. It is the
customers responsibility to order 23" brackets instead of 19" brackets if
required.
19 Configuration
Heat buffer
1U 23 top bracket
cat. num. 7244-4123750
23 Configuration
Heat buffer
1U 19 top bracket
cat. num. 7244-4123640

Cage with Heat Buffer
Bracket Installed Directly
Above
Cage Description
6-31
Two Coral IPx Cages Mounted Together

When a Coral IPx 800 cage (cage 1) is installed directly below another Coral IPx 800
cage (cage 2) warm air flows out from the top panel of the cage 1 and through the
bottom of cage 2. See Figure 6-33. For this reason, whenever a Coral IPx 800 cage is
mounted directly above another Coral IPx 800 cage, there is no need to install a heat
buffer bracket between the cages.
Cage Mounted Beneath
another Coral IPx 800
Cage
Cage Door
Rear Panel
2
Coral IPx
cage
Air
flow
Coral IPx
cage
Air
flow
Customer
supplied
cage
Heat buffer bracket between Coral IPx cages is not required.
6-32
Coral IPx Cage Mounted Below a Customer Supplied Cage

Wherever a Coral IPx 800 cage (cage 1) is mounted below a customer-supplied cage
(cage 2) a free space of 1 U (1.75" or 45 mm) must be maintained above the top panel
of the Coral IPx 800 cage. See Figure 6-34. To meet this requirement, a heat bracket
must be installed directly above the Coral IPx 800 cage.
Cage Mounted Beneath a
Customer Supplied Cage
Heat buffer
bracket
Air
flow
Coral IPx
cage
Customer
supplied
cage
Cage Description
6-33
Coral IPx Cage Mounted at the Top of the Rack

Wherever a Coral IPx 800 cage (cage 2) is mounted at the top of the rack, a heat buffer
bracket must be installed on top of the cage to ensure that no equipment can be
installed directly above the cage. See Figure 6-35.
Figure 6-35 Left View of
Coral IPx 800 Cage
Mounted at Top of Rack
Heat buffer
bracket
Top cage
in rack
Coral IPx
cage
Cage door
Air
flow
6-34
0I
There are six labels on the cage: four on the rear panel, one on the bottom of the free
space, and one in the inside of the door. See Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-37.
Surge Arrestor Warning Label (B)

The red warning label on the rear panel warns against installing any telephony
equipment that is not protected by a surge arrestor. For further information, see page
5-14, Surge Arrestor Magazine Mounting.
Power Rating Label (C)
Figure 6-36
Cage Description
6-35
o
n
ti
lla
a
st
In
d
a
n
n
p
tio
ri
sc
e
D
g
e
a
C
6
6-36
0I
11 Dismounting the Cage from the Rack

1.
Turn OFF the power supply unit on the left front side of the cage.
In the event that more than one cage is supplied by a PS19 DC-D power
supply unit, all supplied cages must be turned OFF.
2.
Do one of the following:
If the cage is supplied with DC electrical power, shut down the external power
supply unit that supplies power to the cage.
If the cage is supplied with AC electrical power, remove the AC power cable.
See page 6-20, Removing the AC Power Cord.
Electrical Hazard! This procedure requires the handling of power wires. Contact with live
cables could cause shock, burn, or death. Verify that no power cables are connected to
the system before handling and that the main power switch supplying the system is OFF.
3.
Disconnect all wires and cables between the cage and other cages.
4.
Disconnect the ground wire from the cage.
5.
Disconnect all I/O cables from the rear panel.
6.
Disconnect all I/O cables from the front panel, and remove them from the free
space beneath the cage. For more information, see page 6-26, Cage Interior.
7.
For 19" cages, remove the front door to obtain access to the cage bracket. For more
8.
Unfasten the four screws that secure the cage to the rack.
Ergonomic Hazard! Serious back injury could result due to improper handling. Use
proper lifting techniques to mount the cage onto the rack.
9.
Remove the cage from the rack using proper lifting techniques.
10. Remove the heat buffer bracket, if installed.
information, see page 6-24, Removing the Door.
Cage Description
6-37
6
6-38
6.2
Coral IPx 800M Main Cage

Description
This section describes the main features of the Coral IPx 800M (main) cage. For
information on how to configure the system, see page 6-53, System Configuration Options.
The IPx 800M main cage is the nerve center of the Coral IPx 800 system. It includes
the main control cards, peripheral cards, service cards, power supply unit and the
system configuration jumpers. The main cage includes eleven card slots: one service
slot, eight peripheral slots and two card slots for the control cards. The slot at the
extreme left of the cage is reserved for the power supply unit.
For a list of components supplied with the IPx 800M cage, see Table 2-5 on page 2-11.
Circuit Card Slots

The card section of the main cage includes eleven card slots and one power supply
unit slot. See Figure 6-38. The first two right slots are reserved for the common control
cards (MEX-IP and HDC). For further information, see Chapter 8. The following eight
universal I/O slots, numbered 1-8, can house any shared service or peripheral cards.
Slot 9 is reserved for a service card. Slots 4 and 5 are configured by the manufacturer
to house primary and secondary clock synchronization digital trunk cards. The slot at
the extreme left side is reserved for the power supply unit. Table 6-1 describes the
Slot Name
Contains
Rear RJ-45
Connection
Universal
I/O Slot
CONTROL
CARDS
MEX-IP control card (with optional

DBX or CLA daughterboard)
Yes*
No
HDC quad group controller card
No
No
Slot 1-8
Any peripheral or shared service card
Yes
Yes
Slot 9
Shared service card
Yes
No
POWER SUPPLY
PS19 AC, DC, or DC-D unit
No
No
Table 6-1 Coral IPx 800M

Card Slot Configuration
for Main Cage
*For more information, see page 6-12, LAN RJ-45 Connectors.
Cage Description
Coral IPx 800M Main Cage Description
cards that are inserted into the card slots for Coral IPx 800M.
6-39
6-40

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Universal I/O slot

Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
Main processor card (MEX-IP)

with optional DBX or CLA
Peripheral service card (HDC)
Shared service slot
Power supply
PS19 AC / DC / DC-D
Figure 6-38 Coral

IPx 800M Card Cage
(Front View)
0
Primary/secondary
clock synchronization
slots for digital trunk cards
Backplane Description
The backplane of the main cage includes the eight peripheral card connectors, two
control card connectors, one service card connector, and the configuration jumpers.
The backplane is displayed in Figure 6-39.
J31
SEC SYNC
Power supply
connector
PRM SYNC
SPARE
J29
J30 Z6
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Z5
Configuration jumpers
8 universal I/O slots
MEX-IP card slot

HDC card slot
Shared service slot

800M Backplane
Cage Description
6-41
The configuration jumpers of the main cage:
Configure the main cage to house the primary and/or secondary digital trunk
synchronization card (J29). For more information, see page 6-43, Digital Trunk
Synchronization Slots (J29).
Provide the shorting plugs that are used in jumper J29
STable 6-2 displays each jumper setting and its description.

Table 6-2 Coral IPx
800MConfiguration
Jumpers
Jumper
J29
top 2 pins
J29
bottom 2 pins
Description
Connected
Primary synchronization card installed in slot 4
Not connected
Primary synchronization card not installed in slot 4
Connected
Secondary synchronization card installed in slot 5
Not connected
Secondary synchronization card not installed in slot 5

not in use
J31
Spare - used to house shorting plugs, only
J30
6
6-42
Setting
Digital Trunk Synchronization Slots (J29)

Two synchronization sources may be defined for the Coral IPx 800 system. One serves
as the primary source, and the other serves as a secondary synchronization signal
source. A total of six slots are factory set to accept digital trunk cards to operate in
slave clock mode. Two slots are located in the IPx 800M main cage and the additional
four slots are pre-wired in each of the IPx 800X/500X expansion cages. Card slot 4 in
all cages is wired to operate as the primary external clock synchronization source
(marked PRM SYNC). Card slot 5 in all cages is wired as the secondary external clock
synchronization source (marked SEC SYNC). The expansion cage can house the
primary and/or secondary synchronization card in slot 4 and 5, respectively.
Figure 6-40 displays the jumper configuration for synchronization. For further
information, see page 2-30, Setting the Configuration Jumpers and Chapter 3 of the Coral
Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual.
The primary and secondary card slots may be housed in the same cage.
Primary
N/A
Primary
N/A
Slot 5
Secondary
N/A
N/A
Secondary
J29
J29
J29
J29
J30 Z6
Z5
J31
J29
SEC SYNC
Jumper
configuration
PRM SYNC
Slot 4
SPARE
Figure 6-40 Coral

IPx 800M Jumper
Configuration for
Synchronization Slots
(J29)
Cage Description
6-43
Connections to Other Cages

The main cage includes the following connectors that can be used to connect to other
cages (see Figure 6-41):
F1 is a D-type, 50-pin, female connector that is used to connect to the first

expansion cage. The connection is made with an H500-1 cable supplied with the
expansion cage.
P1 is a D-type, 25-pin, female connector that can be used to connect two cages that
house a PS19 DC-D power supply unit in one or both of the cages. The connection
is made with an H719 cable supplied with the power supply at specific customer
request. See Figure 6-53 on page 6-62.
For more information, see page 6-51, Connections to Other Cages and page 6-60,
Interconnecting Main and Expansion Cages.
Figure 6-41 Coral
IPx 800M Rear Panel
Connections to other
Cages
P1
F1
Expansion
connector
PS19 DC-D power

supply duplication
connector
-48V
6-44
48VRTN
Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage
6.3
Description
This section describes the main features of the Coral IPx 800X (expansion) cage. For a
general description of the Coral IPx 800 system, see page 6-3, Cage Description and
Installation. For information about configuring the system, see
page 6-53, System Configuration Options.
The expansion cage expands the Coral IPx 500/800 system capacity by adding ports to
the system. The expansion cage includes I/O card slots for peripheral cards and a slot
for the power supply unit. The rear panel of the cage includes two expansion
connectors that are used to connect the expansion cage to other cages and one power
supply duplication connector.
Up to two expansion cages may be installed in any IPx 500/800 system configuration.
For a list of components supplied with the IPx 800X cage, see Table 2-6 on page 2-11.
0
Circuit Card Slots

The expansion cage contains twelve card slots that are numbered 1 through 12 from
right to left. See Figure 6-42. Slot 1 is reserved for a shared service card or a PX buffer
card if two IPx 800X expansion cages are installed in the system. Slot 2 through slot 12
are universal I/O slots and may house any service or peripheral cards. Slots 4 and 5
cards. The slot on the extreme left labeled POWER SUPPLY is reserved for the power
supply unit. Table 6-3 identifies the cards that are inserted into the card slots for the
Coral IPx 800X cage.
Slot
Contains
Rear RJ-45
Connection
Universal
I/O Slot
Slot 1
Service card for system with 1 IPx

800X cage. PX card for cage 1
(when two cages are installed).
No
No
Slot 2-12
Any shared service or peripheral
Yes
Yes
No
No
cards
POWER SUPPLY
PS19 DC, DC-D, or AC unit
Cage Description
Table 6-3 Coral IPx 800X

Card Slot Configuration
for the Expansion Cage
Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage Description
may be configured to house primary or secondary clock synchronization digital trunk
6-45
6-46

12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Universal I/O slot

Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
Service Card or PX card slot
Power supply
PS19 AC / DC
Figure 6-42 Coral

IPx 800X Card Cage
(Front View)
Backplane Description
The backplane of the expansion cage includes the eleven peripheral card connectors,
the service or PX card connector, the power supply connector, the AC power input,
and the configuration jumpers.
The backplane is displayed in Figure 6-43.
Power supply
connector
J40
SPARE
Z6 J38
6 5
4 3 2
Z5
PRM
SYNC
SEC
SYNC
PX or service card
11 universal I/O slots
12 11 10 9 8 7
J37
Figure 6-43 Coral

IPx 800X Backplane
Cage Description
6-47
The configuration jumpers of the expansion cage:
Define the cage that houses the primary and/or secondary synchronization card.
Designate the cage number within the system:
IPx 500/800 (shelf 1 or shelf 2)
IPx Office (shelf 2 or shelf 3)
Table 6-4 displays the settings of each jumper its definition.

Table 6-4 Coral IPx 800X
Jumper Configuration
Jumper
Setting
Description
J37 - top 2 pins
Connected
Primary synchronization card in slot 4
Not connected
Primary synchronization card not in slot 4
Connected
Secondary synchronization card in slot 5
Not connected
Secondary synchronization card not in slot 5
J37 - bottom 2 pins
J38 - Z6 top pin
Z6 bottom pin
Z5 top pin
Z5 bottom pin
J38 - Z6 top pin
Z6 bottom pin
Z5 top pin
Z5 bottom pin
J38 - Z6 top pin
Z6 bottom pin
Z5 top pin
Z5 bottom pin
J38 - Z6 top pin
Z6 bottom pin
Z5 top pin
Z5 bottom pin
6-48
Not connected
Connected
Connected
Not connected
Connected
Not connected
Not connected
Connected
Not connected
Connected
Not connected
Connected
Not connected
Connected
Connected
Not connected
Expansion cage designated Shelf 1 in
IPx 500/800 systems
IPx 500/800 systems
Coral IPx Office systems
Coral IPx Office systems
Expansion Shelf Number (J38)
The term shelf is used in this section in order to retain consistency with
Program Interface terminology. The terms shelf and cage are identical.
Each peripheral card must be recognized by the main shelf. Therefore, the Coral
IPx 800 system must be able to distinguish between the first and second expansion
shelves. The main shelf is designated 0 by the manufacturer. The first expansion shelf
is designated 1. The second expansion shelf is designated 2. Jumpers are used to
configure the shelf number. Figure 6-44 displays the jumper configuration for each cage
designation.
The shelves in a Coral IPx Office system, however, are designated 1, 2, and 3, for the
main unit, first, and second expansion cages, respectively. Therefore, Coral IPx Office
must be able to distinguish between the first and second expansion shelves. The main
shelf is designated 1 by the manufacturer. The first expansion shelf is designated 2.
The second expansion shelf is designated 3. Jumpers are used to configure the shelf
number. Figure 6-44 displays the jumper configuration for each cage designation.
Coral IPx 500 / 800
Z6
Z5
J38
Shelf# 2
Shelf# 2
Z6
J38
Z5
Z6
J38
Z5
Shelf# 3
Z6
J38
Z5
J40
Shelf# 1
Coral IPx Office
SPARE
Z6
Z5
J38
J37
PRM
SYNC
SEC
SYNC
Figure 6-44 Coral

IPx 800X Jumper
Configuration for Shelf
Designation (J38)
Cage Description
6-49
Digital Trunk Synchronization Slots (J37)

Two synchronization sources may be defined for the Coral IPx 800 system. One serves
as the primary source, and the other serves as a secondary synchronization signal
source. A total of six slots are factory set to accept digital trunk cards to operate in
slave clock mode. Two slots are located in the Coral IPx 800 main cage and the
additional two slots are pre-wired in each of the IPx 800 expansion cages. Card slot #4
in all cages is wired to operate as the primary external clock synchronization source
(marked PRM SYNC). Card slot #5 in all cages is wired as the secondary external clock
synchronization source (marked SEC SYNC). The expansion cage can house the
primary and/or secondary synchronization card in slots 4 and 5, respectively.
Figure 6-45 displays the jumper configuration for clock synchronization. For further
information, see Chapter 3 of the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual.
The primary and secondary card slots may be housed in the same cage.
Figure 6-45 Coral
IPx 800X Jumper
Configuration for Primary
and Secondary
Synchronization Slots
(J37)
Slot 4
Primary
N/A
Primary
N/A
Slot 5
Secondary
N/A
N/A
Secondary
Jumper
configuration
J37
J37
J37
J40
SPARE
Z6
Z5
6-50
J38
J37
PRM
SYNC
SEC
SYNC
J37
Connections to Other Cages

The expansion cage includes three connectors that can be used to connect to other
cages (see Figure 6-46):
F2 is a D-type, 50-pin, male, serial port connector. It connects the second

expansion cage to the first expansion cage, or the first expansion cage to the main
cage. The connection is made with an H500-1 cable that is supplied with the
expansion cage.
F3 is a D-type, 50-pin, female, serial port connector. It connects the first expansion
cage to the second expansion cage. The connection is made with an H500-1 cable
that is supplied with the expansion cage.
P1 is a D-type, 25-pin, female connector that can be used to connect two cages that
house a PS19 DC-D power supply unit in one or both of the cages. The connection
is made with an H719 cable supplied with the power supply at specific customer
request. See Figure 6-53 on page 6-62.
For more information, see page 6-44, Connections to Other Cages and page 6-60,
Interconnecting Main and Expansion Cages.
Connector to
main cage or
1st expansion
cage
P1
PS19 DC-D Power Supply

Duplication Connector
F2
F3
Connector to
2nd expansion
cage
Figure 6-46 Coral

IPx 800X Rear Panel
Connections to other
Cages
Cage Description
6-51
NOTES:
6-52
6.4
System Configuration Options

Coral IPx 800
This chapter describes the layout and configuration of the Coral IPx 800 system. For a
general description of the Coral IPx cage, see page 6-3, Cage Description and Installation.
For a more detailed description of the main cage, see page 6-39, Coral IPx 800M Main
Cage. For a more detailed description of the expansion cage, see
page 6-45, Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage.
General Description
The Coral IPx 800 can operate as a system in any one of the following configurations:
System Configuration
See Figure
Main
Cage
1st Expansion
Cage
2nd Expansion
Cage
800M
Figure 6-47 on page 6-55
800M
800X
800M
800X
800X
800M
500X
800M
500X
800X
800M
500X
500X
The main cage includes control, service, and peripheral cards. The expansion cage or
cages include shared service cards and peripheral cards.
System Configuration Options Coral IPx 800
Table 6-5 Coral IPx 800

Options
Cage Description
6-53
Main Cage (IPx 800M)

The IPx 800M main cage is designated as the common control cage and is used to
house the common control cards. For further information, refer to Chapter 8, Common
Control Cards. In addition, the main cage houses eight universal peripheral slots and
one service slot as well. Each of the Coral IPx 800 configurations includes one IPx
800M cage. For more detailed information about the main cage, refer to page 6-39,
Coral IPx 800M Main Cage.
Expansion Cage (IPx 800X)

The expansion cage may house up to twelve cards. Slot 1 is used to house a shared
service card, or a PX card. For more information, see page 8-59, PX Card. Slot 2 through
slot 12 are universal I/O slots, and may house any combination of shared service and
peripheral cards. These card types are described in detail in the Coral Service and
Peripheral Cards Manual. For more detailed information about the expansion cage, refer
to page 6-45, Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage.
Expansion Cage (IPx 500X)

One IPx 500X cage may house ten peripheral special form-factor ipx cards.
For more detailed information, refer to page 6-70, Optional Coral IPx 500X Expansion
Cage.
Table 6-6 Number of

Universal I/O Slots per
Main
Cage
1st
Expansion
Cage
2nd
Expansion
Cage
Total System
Universal I/O
Slots
IPx 800M
IPx 800M+800X
11
19
IPx 800M+800X+800X
11
11
30
IPx 800M+500X
10
18
IPx 800M+500X+800X
10*
11**
29
IPx 800M+500X+500X
10
10
28
System
Configuration
* IPx 500 Cage
**IPx 800 Cage
6-54
Figure 6-47 System with

One Cage (IPx 800M)
Coral IPx 800M

Main cage
8 Universal
I/O slots
1 Power
supply
1 Shared
service
slot
Common
Control

Two Cages (IPx 800M and
IPx 800X)
Cage Description
6-55

Three Cages (IPx 800M
and Two IPx 800X Cages)
Coral IPx 800X

2nd expansion
1 Shared
service
slot
30 Universal
I/O slots
Coral IPx 800X

1st expansion
3 Power
supplies
Coral IPx 800M

Main cage
1 Shared
service
slot
Common
Control
6-56
PX control
card slot

Two Cages (IPx 800M and
IPx 500X)
Cage Description
6-57

Three Cages (IPx 800M,
IPx 500X, and IPx 800X)
Coral IPx 800X

2nd Expansion
11 Universal
I/O Slots
1 Shared
Service
Slot
1 Power
Supply
PS19
Coral IPx 500X

1st Expansion
*
10 Universal
I/O Slots
1 Power
Supply
PS500
Coral IPx 800M
Main Cage
8 Universal
I/O Slots
1 Power
Supply
PS19
1 Shared
Service
Slot
Common
Control
* Special form-factor cards
6-58

Three Cages (IP x800M
and Two IPx 500X Cages)
Cage Description
6-59
Interconnecting Main and Expansion Cages

The Coral IPx 800 can be expanded in any one of the following configurations:
Table 6-7 Coral IPx 800

System Expansion
Options
See Figure
Main Cage
1st Expansion
Cage
2nd Expansion
Cage
800M
800X
800M
800X
800X
800M
500X
800M
500X
800X
800M
500X
500X
H500 -1 Cable
The Coral IPx 800 main cage and its expansion cages maintain a continuous
conversation. HDLC and PCM highways, clock and synchronization signals as well
as alarms are constantly exchanged between the cages. All data transfer is carried out
via the H500-1 cable.
The H500-1 cable is connected from the main cage to the first expansion cage. If an
additional expansion cage is connected, an additional H500-1 cable is connected from

first expansion cage to second expansion cage.
One H500-1 male/female cable, 55" (140 cm) long, is supplied with each IPx 800X cage
or IPx 500X cage.
The IPx 500/800 cages include cable connections that allow the expansion cages to be
added.
The IPx 800M main cage includes one 50-pin female connection that connects to the
first expansion cage with an H500-1 male/female cable. When there is only main cage
in the system, this connection is not used.
The IPx 800X expansion cage includes two 50-pin cable connections that allow the
expansion cages to be added. The lower connection is female; the top connection is
male. The lower female connection connects the first expansion cage to the second
expansion cage. The top male connection connects either to the female connection on
the main cage or to the female connection on the first expansion cage.
6-60
The IPx 500X expansion cage includes two 50-pin connections: the top connection is
female; the bottom connection is male. The top female connection connects the first
expansion cage to the second expansion cage. The lower male connection connects
either to the female connection on the main cage or to the female connection on the
first expansion cage.
H719 Power Supply Duplication Cable

H719 cables supply power from cages that house a PS19 DC-D power supply unit to
other cages (Figure 6-53). This cable is supplied with the PS19 DC-D power supply unit
at specific customer request and is connected between the P1 connector of any two
IPx 800 cages in one of the following situations:
When one PS19 DC-D power supply unit supplies two IPx 800 cages with power.
The H719 cable supplies the second cage with power.
When two PS19 DC-D power supply units supply two cages with power. In this
case the H719 cable is connected to provide redundancy if one PS19 DC-D unit
fails.
For further information, see page 7-28, Connecting the Power Supply Duplication Cable
between Two Cages.
Cage Description
6-61
Do not use the H719 cable when the PS19 DC or PS19 AC power supplies are
installed.
This cable is only used with the PS19 DC-D power supply.
Connecting the power supply duplication connector (P1) for PS19 DC or PS19 AC
power supplies will result in damage to the system.
Figure 6-53 H719 Cable

Connection between Two
IPx 800 Cages with
PS19 DC-D Power Supply
Male
IPx 800 Cage
H719 Cable
Female
(Rear panel)
Male
IPx 800 Cage
6-62
Figure 6-54 Connection

between Two IPx 800
Cages
(IPx 800M and 800X)
Male
(Rear panel)
Expansion Cage
IPx 800X
Female
(Rear panel)
H500-1 Cable
Female
Male
Main
Cage
IPx 800M
Cage Description
6-63

between Three IPx 800
Cages
(IPx 800M and two 800X)
Male
(Rear panel)
Female
(Rear panel)
Not used
Male
(Rear panel)
Expansion Cage
IPx 800X
H500-1 Cable
(see previous page)
Main
Cage
IPx 800M
6-64
Male
Female
(Rear panel)
H500-1 Cable
Expansion Cage
IPx 800X
Female

between Two Cages
(IPx 800M and 500X)
Male
First
Expansion Cage
IPx 500X
Male
Female
(rear panel)
Main Cage
IPx 800M
H500-1 Cable
Female
Cage Description
6-65

between Three Cages
(IPx 800M, 500X and
800X)
H500-1 Cable
Male
(rear panel)
Female
Second
Expansion Cage
IPx 800X
Male
H500-1 Cable
Female
Female
Female
(rear panel)
Not used
Male
First
Expansion Cage
IPx 500X
Male
Female
(rear panel)
Main Cage
IPx 800M
6-66

between Three Cages
(IPx 800M and two 500X)
Female
(not used)
H500-1 Cable
Male
Second
Expansion Cage
IPx 500X
Male
First
Expansion Cage
IPx 500X
Male
Female
(rear panel)
Main Cage
IPx 800M
H500-1 Cable
Female
Female
Male
Cage Description
6-67
Suggestions for Peripheral Card Distribution

When installing a new Coral IPx 800 system, it is recommended that the timeslot (PCM
highway) distribution among the cages and card slots be taken into account when
planning the peripheral interface cards location.
The Coral IPx 800 system (main cage and two expansion cages) is supplied with a total
of 384 timeslots between a maximum of 32 card slots. The timeslots are evenly divided
into 3 groups of 128 timeslots and distributed between slot sets, as detailed in Table 6-8.
Therefore, slots 1-4 of cages 0, 1 and 2 share 128 timeslots, slots 5-8 of cages 0, 1 and 2
share 128 timeslots, and slots 9-12 of cages 0, 1 and 2 share an additional 128 timeslots.
Figure 6-59 illustrates the distribution of PCM highways in Coral IPx 800 systems.
To ensure efficient use of time slots, it is recommended to distribute heavy consumer cards
(cards with a large number of ports: UDT, 30T/x, T1, PRI-30, PRI-24, IPG or UGW) evenly
among the slot sets, i.e. one heavy consumer card per slot set. The least blocking sets are
the slot sets that have the highest ratio of number of timeslots to number of peripheral slots
in Table 6-8.
If three PRI-30 cards are installed, it is recommended that one of them be

installed in any one of slots 9-12, the second card in any one of slots 5-8,
and the last card in any one of slots 1-4.
Table 6-8
Time Slot
Distribution in Coral
IPx 800
Set
Peripheral
Shelf #
Card Slots
Number of
Peripheral
Slots
Number of
Timeslots
0, 1, 2
1, 2, 3, 4
12 slots
128
0, 1, 2
5, 6, 7, 8
12 slots
128
9
9 slots
128
1, 2
9, 10, 11, 12
6-68
Figure 6-59 Coral

IPx 800, PCM Highway
Distribution
SLOT 6
SLOT 5
SLOT 4
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
12
11
10
12
11
10
SLOT 11
SLOT 10
IPx 800X / 500X

2nd Expansion Cage
SLOT 12
SLOT 10
SLOT 11
SLOT 7
PCM highway A3
SLOT 1
SLOT 2
SLOT 3
SLOT 4
SLOT 5
SLOT 6
SLOT 7
SLOT 8
SLOT 9
SLOT 1
SLOT 2
SLOT 3
SLOT 4
SLOT 5
SLOT 6
SLOT 7
SLOT 8
PCM highway B1
384 time slots
SLOT 9
A3
B3
A2
B2
A1
B1
SLOT 8
64 time slots
each PCM highway
Not applicable in
IPx 500X
Not applicable in
IPx 500X
Peripheral
service
&
group
controller
SLOT 9
HDC
IPx 800X/ 500X

1st Expansion Cage
SLOT 12
IPx 800M
Main Cage
Coral IPx 800
Cage Description
6-69
Optional Coral IPx 500X Expansion Cage

General
The Coral IPx 500X expansion cage is a small, rack or wall-mounted extension to the
Coral IPx 500M or Coral IPx 800M cage. It supports any of the Coral FlexiCom 200 and
IPx 500 family small factor and peripheral cards. Any combination of up to two
IPx 500X and IPx 800X expansion cages can be connected to one IPx 800M cage. The
key features of the IPx 500X cage capacity and functions are described below.
Card Slots
One IPx 500X cage may house ten peripheral special form-factor ipx cards.
These card types are described in detail in Chapter 10 of the Coral IPx 500 Hardware and
Installation Manual.
Port Capacity
One IPx 500X cage supports up to 160 combined trunk and wired station ports.
Power Supply
The expansion unit is compatible with 48VDC or 115/230VAC power. Like the
IPx 500M cage, the expansion cage is either powered by the PS500 AC or PS500 DC
power supply unit. There is also an option to install a backup battery for the IPx 500X
cage. This battery pack, known as the BATTipx, can be ordered at specific customer
request.
MDFipx
An MDF may be supplied with the IPx 500X cage at specific customer request.
Whenever an MDFipx unit is included with an IPx 500X cage, it can function as a
master ground and be connected directly to the building master ground.
Setting the Configuration Jumpers

For information on setting the configuration jumpers on Coral IPx 500X cages, refer to
the Coral IPx 500 Installation Manual, Section 6.3.
6-70
Connecting the IPx 500X Cage to the IPx 800M Cage

All IPx 500 and IPx 800 cages are interconnected with an H500-1 cable.
For systems that include one IPx 500X cage and one IPx 800X cage, always connect the
IPx 500X cage directly to the IPx 800M cage. If an IPx 800X cage is installed between
the IPx 800M cage and an IPx 500X cage, a PX card will have to be installed in slot 1 of
the IPx 800X cage. This slot could otherwise be used for a service card.
Coral IPx 500 Hardware and Installation Manual
Coral FlexiCom and IPx Product Description
Cage Description
6-71
NOTES:
6-72
Chapter 7
Power Supplies
7.1 PS19 DC ...................................................................7-1
Cor
Coral
7.2 PS19 DC-D..............................................................7-17

7.3 PS19 AC..................................................................7-39
PS19 DC
7.1
Power Supply Unit

(Discontinued, replaced by PS19 DC-D)
General Description
The DC Power Supply (PS19 DC) provides internal operating voltages for the
Coral IPx 800 systems.
The PS19 DC operates from a nominal input of 48VDC, typically supplied by an
external 48VDC rectifier or a stationary battery plant. Actual input may vary from
40 to 60 volts allowing operation:
From an external battery power source while the batteries are charged at an
equalized charge rate.
During a power failure, until the batteries are completely discharged.
PS19 DC Front Panel

Figure 7-1 illustrates the front panel of the PS19 DC. The following items located on
Feature
Description
Alarm (red) Indicator
Lights when there is any failure within the PS19 DC
Power (green) Indicator
Lights when the power switch is turned on
ON/OFF Power
Switch
Turns the unit On or Off.

CAUTION!
Do not insert or remove the PS19 DC unit from
the cage when turned ON. Sudden power
surges could damage system components.
Before inserting or extracting the PS19 DC
unit, verify that the power switch is turned OFF.
Top and Bottom

Ejectors
Used to release the unit from the cage backplane.
PS19 DC Power Supply Unit
the front panel are described in the following table:
Power Supplies
7-1
Figure 7-1
PS19 DC
Front Panel Layout
Feature
Description
Top and Bottom

Fastener Holes
Used to insert the screws (M4x10) that secure the

unit to the cage, ground the unit and safeguard
against malfunction.
Top
Ejector
Top Mounting
Screw (M4x10)
and
Serrated Washer
ALARM
Alarm
(Red) Indicator
POWER
Power
(Green) Indicator
ON
Power Switch
OFF
PS19 DC
Cat. No. 72440953000
INPUT:
-40VDC to - 60VDC 12A
OUTPUT: +5VDC
+12VDC
-5VDC
-12VDC
-48VDC
-120VDC
12.0A
3.0A
0.15A
0.15A
7.0A
0.4A
85VRMS 20/25Hz 12VA
Bottom Mounting
Screw (M4x10)
and
Serrated Washer
Bottom
Ejector
7-2
PS19 DC Card Layout

The PS19 DC cards component side layout is shown in Figure 7-2. Three components
are described in the following table:
Feature
Description
F1
Message Fuse
A 0.8A / 250V, slow blow fuse, protects the units

message circuitry voltage. See PS19 DC Fuses on page 7-13.
F2
Ringer Fuse
A 0.8A / 250V, slow blow fuse, protects the units ring

generator circuitry voltage. See PS19 DC Fuses on page 7-13.
JU1
Ring Frequency
Selection Jumper
Configured as per customer specification providing 20Hz

(North American systems) or 25Hz depending on the
JU1 configuration. See Ringer Frequency Adjustment on page
7-8.
The entire cage 48VDC input circuitry, including the power supply, is protected by a
15A/250V slow blow fuse on the rear panel of the cage. See Figure 7-3, PS19 DC Block
Diagram.
Power Supplies
7-3
Figure 7-2
PS19 DC
Card Layout
F1
Message Fuse
0.8A/250V S.B.
On
Off
F2
Ringer Fuse
0.8A/250V S.B.
JU1
Ring Frequency
Selection
3
JU1
25Hz
20Hz
7-4
Circuit Description
Figure 7-3 presents a block diagram of the PS19 DC power supply.
Power Input Section

The DC input consists of: passive filter, inrush current, and an on/off switch. The DC
input is protected against reverse polarity.
DC Output Power
DC to DC converters convert the 48VDC input power to the following outputs:
+5VDC
+12VDC
5VDC
12VDC
Message and Ring Circuits

The 120VDC and 85VRMS voltages are provided for ringers to drive the ringers and
message waiting lamps of single line telephones connected to SLT ports of the system.
120 VDC for SLT (Single Line Telephone) message waiting lamps
85VRMS for SLT ringers
The current is used for ringing on industry standard, SLT, and magneto telephone
station ports. The ring generator provides high voltage (85VRMS) ring generator
current required by SLT station ports of the 16SH/S-LL, 8SLS, 16SLS, 24SLS, or
8SM cards.
Messaging
The messaging generator is capable of generating 120VDC for message lamps. It is
used to light neon lamps on SLT ports of the 16SH/S-LL, 8SLS, 16SLS, or 24SLS
cards.
Power Supplies
7-5
Ring Generator
The ring generator is capable of generating ringing for up to 20 ports simultaneously
at 20Hz or at 25Hz. The ringing frequency is selected with the JU1 configuration
jumper on the PS19 DC circuit board. See page 7-8, Ringer Frequency Adjustment.
-48VDC Output Power

The PS19 DC also filters and limits the 48VDC input to feed the peripheral card
slots.
Ripple and Noise

Filtering circuitry minimizes ripple and noise on the 48VDC feed to the peripheral
cards. The filtering circuitry produces an output voltage approximately 1.5V to 2.0V
lower than the input voltage to the PS19 DC.
Monitoring Circuitry
All outputs, with the exception of the 48VDC output, are regulated. Voltage and
current level monitoring circuitry check each output of the PS19 DC (including
message and ring generator currents), and produce an alarm signal to the Coral system
main processor in the event of malfunction.
Monitoring circuitry verifies that each voltage output (with the exception of the
48VDC output) is within specification. If any of the voltage outputs drop below
specification, the monitoring circuitry produces an alarm signal to the Coral system
processor, causing the red Alarm indicator to illuminate. Note that the green Power
indicator of the PS19 DC remains illuminated at the same time as the red alarm
indicator.
If the Input voltage drops below 36.51VDC, the unit shuts down and returns to power
only when the voltage increases above 38.51VDC again. Additionally, if the voltage
is greater than 621VDC, then the unit shuts down until the input voltage drops below
581VDC.
7-6
Figure 7-3
PS19 DC
Block Diagram
Power On/Off
Rear Panel
Fuse
S.B. 30A/125V
-VIN
VRTN
Passive
Filter
Feedback
-48VDC/7A
Current Limit
and
Active Filter
Inrush
Current
Common
Input:
-40 to -60VDC
-48VDC nom.
DC
+5V/12A
DC
+12V/3A
DC
DC
-12V/0.15A
-12V
Series
Regulator
2 1
-120V/0.4A
F1/F2 0.8A/250V S.B.
Ringing
Circuit
3
-5V/0.15A
F1
Messaging
Circuit
Rear
Backplane
48V RTN
NOTE:
-48VDC or approx.
1.5V to 2.0V lower
than -VIN (input voltage)
85VAC/12VA
Messaging
Ringer
F2
JU1
20/25 Hz
Frequency Selection
Common
Monitoring
Alarm
Indicator
(Red)
Power On/Off
Indicator
(Green)
Alarm
Control
Circuit
Power Supplies
7-7
Ringer Frequency Adjustment

The PS19 DC can supply either 20Hz or 25Hz ringing frequency by configuring
Jumper JU1 located on the bottom component side card. See Figure 7-2. This jumper is
factory configured according to local requirements. However, it can be configured in
the field. The procedure is as follows:
1.
Remove the power supply unit from its slot and place it over the anti-static
material with the component side facing upwards, as described in page 7-10,
Removing the Power Supply.
Do not insert or remove the power supply unit from the cage when turned ON. Sudden
power surges could damage system components.
2.
Frequency
JU1 shorting plug

over pins
20Hz
2 and 3
25Hz
1 and 2
Reinstall the power supply unit as described in page 7-9, To Install the Power Supply.
3.
Configure jumper JU1 as described below for the following frequencies:
7-8
Installation
The PS19 DC power supply is inserted in the extreme left slot of the card cage. Before
installing the power supply, verify that the ring frequency configuration jumper, JU1,
is set to the correct frequency (20 or 25Hz). See page 7-8, Ringer Frequency Adjustment.
To Install the Power Supply

4.
is not in use.
panel) for PS19 DC power supplies will result in damage to the system. This connector
is only used with the PS19 DC-D power supply, see page 7-28, Connecting the Power
Supply Duplication Cable between Two Cages. Do not use this connector when the
PS19 DC power supply is installed.
5.
Verify that the PS19 DC power switch is turned OFF.
6.
Position the two guide ridges (located on the right panel of the power supply, at
slot (labeled on the bottom of the card cage).
7.
Slide the PS19 DC gently but firmly, until fully inserted into the card cage. A slight
resistance should be felt as the multi-pin connectors engage at the rear of the
power supply and backplane.
Do not force the power supply into the card cage. Irreparable damage may occur
if the multi-pin connectors misalign while attempting to insert the unit into the
card cage. If more than slight resistance is encountered, partially slide out the card
from the cage and verify the alignment of the guide ridges with the card edge
guides. If alignment appears to be correct, remove the card from the slot and
inspect the multi-pin connectors for bent pins and debris in the pin holes.
Power Supplies
top and bottom) into the card edge guides corresponding to the POWER SUPPLY
7-9
8.
Secure the power supply to the card cage by fastening the two M4x10 screws,
located at the top and bottom of the units front panel to the cage, thus securing
the card to the cage as well as grounding the unit.
9.
Turn the PS19 DC power switch ON, and verify that the green Power indicator is
lit, while the red Alarm indicator is not lit.
Turn ON the PS19 DC units in the expansion cages only after powering the main cage
(IPx 800M) and verifying that the main cage has initialized properly and the alarm
indicator does not illuminate. Otherwise the cards in the expansion cages (IPx 800X)
might not initialize.
Removing the Power Supply

1.
Locate a desk or table top that can support 50lb (23kg). If the surface can be
damaged by sharp objects, place a protective sheet of cardboard or similar
material over the top surface.
2.
Place an anti-static sheet (the cards plastic shipping bag will suffice) over a desk
or a table top.
3.
Turn the PS19 DC power switch OFF (turn the switch downwards).
Do not remove the power supply unit from the cage when turned ON. Sudden power
surges could damage system components. Before extracting the PS19 DC card, verify
that the power switch is turned OFF.
4.
Unfasten the two M4x10 screws located at the top and bottom of the units front
panel and set aside.

5.
Carefully remove the PS19 DC from its slot.
6.
Place the PS19 DC over the anti-static material with the component side facing
upwards.
7-10
Ringer Database Programming

Max Ringers (Route: SFE,2)
The maximum number of SLTs that can be fed ringing simultaneously from each
PS19 DC is 20, by default. This value can be altered via the Coral databases System
Features (Route: SFE,2) branch, by changing the MAX_RING parameter value.
See Chapter 6 of the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for details.
Power Supplies
7-11
Troubleshooting (PS19 DC)

Power supply failure generally results in the loss of one or more output voltages.
However, protection circuitry in the power supply regulator circuitry may shut down
a regulator due to a current overload caused by an external fault.
The red Alarm indicator on the front panel of the PS19 DC lights when any of the
output voltages are below specification and/or when either the F1 or F2 fuse blows.
The red Alarm indicator illuminates if any voltage supplied by the power
supply is outside of specification. This could be caused by an internal or
external fault. If the alarm indicator illuminates in a replaced power supply,
the fault is not within the unit.
All maintenance activities are to be carried out by a qualified service technician.

The red Alarm indicator can be activated by malfunctions in the backplane, the power
supply, in any of the cards inserted into the cage, or in any of the above in a connected
cage.
Power Supply turned ON - Green Power Indicator is OFF

Check the following:
1.
DC power supply interruption (Range: 40 to 60 VDC).
2.
Blown main or circuit fuse/breaker in the building electrical panel.
3.
Blown fuse in the cage rear panel.
4.
Faulty PS19 DC.
(Insert a different PS19 DC unit as described in page 7-9, Installation.)
7-12
PS19 DC Fuses
The PS19 DC employs two fuses, F1 and F2, to protect the message and ringing
circuitry respectively.
If the F1 fuse blows, the message lamps for the SLT units connected via this
cage do not light.
If the F2 fuse blows, none of the SLT units connected via this cage can ring.
If the cage rear panel fuse blows, the PS19 DC Power green indicator and
Alarm red indicator do not illuminate.
To replace a fuse within the PS19 DC

1.
material with the component side facing upwards, as described on page 7-10,
2.
Replace only with the same type and rating of fuse. See the PS19 DC card layout
in Figure 7-2.
Reinstall the power supply unit as described in page 7-9, To Install the Power Supply.
3.
Power Supplies
7-13
Determining the Cause of the Alarm Indicator

1.
Turn the PS19 DC power switch OFF (turn the switch downwards).
2.
Disconnect the expansion cable(s) connected to the relevant cage.
3.
Remove all cards from the relevant cage so that they protrude from the cage by
4.
Turn ON the PS19 DC and check the red Alarm indicator.
If the Alarm indicator is lit, either the PS19 DC is malfunctioning or the

problem is caused by the backplane. Replace the PS19 DC unit.
If the Alarm indicator is not lit, the unit is functioning properly and the alarm
is being caused by one of the cards.
5.
For cages that include common control cards (see table below).
Cage
Control Cards
IPx 800M
MEX-IP, HDC
IPx 800X
PX
To determine which control card is causing the problem, turn the PS19 DC power
switch OFF again (turn the switch downwards) and re-insert the first control card.
Then turn the PS19 DC power switch ON and check the red Alarm indicator.
Continue this process, adding one common control card at a time, and turning
OFF the PS19 DC power switch before inserting each card. Turn the PS19 DC
power switch ON and check the red Alarm indicator after inserting each card. If
the red Alarm indicator is lit, the last card inserted is causing the problem and
should be replaced.
Turn the PS19 DC power switch OFF, insert the common control cards (MEX-IP,
HDC, or PX). Then turn the PS19 DC power switch ON and check the red Alarm
indicator once again. If the red Alarm indicator is off, the problem is caused by
one of the cards that was removed.

6.
To determine which shared service and peripheral card is causing the problem,
insert the cards into their appropriate slots, one at a time, beginning from the right
side of the cage. Ensure that the cards rear panel connectors engage properly with
the backplane and that they initialize properly.
If the Alarm indicator lights when one of the cards is inserted, then that card is
faulty.
7-14
Specifications
PS19 DC (DC Power Supply)
Coral systems:............................................. IPx 800, 3000, 4000
Input:........................................................... 40VDC to 60VDC, 12A max.
Power Consumption: ........................................ Continues 575W
DC Outputs: ................................................+5VDC Nom. Regulated 12.0A max.

5VDC Nom. Regulated 0.15A max.
+12VDC Nom. Regulated 3.0A max.
12VDC Nom. Regulated 0.15A max.
48VDC unregulated (or approx.
1.5V to 2.0V lower than input voltage)
7.0A max.
Message Output (for SLTs):........................120VDC, 0.4A max.
Ringer Outputs (for SLTs):
Voltage: ...................................85VRMS
Frequency................................20 or 25Hz (jumper selectable)
Capacity ..................................12VA max.
Alarm: .........................................................Signaling malfunction
Front panel LED indicator (red)
Fuses: ..........................................................
Input (48VDC) ......................None (Protected by a fuse on the rear
panel of the cage)
Output (Message)....................F1: 0.8A/250V S.B
Output (Ringer).......................F2: 0.8A/250V S.B.
Controls and Adjustments: .........................ON/OFF power switch
Output ring frequency
Weight: ................................................................ 1.4 kg
Indicators: ...................................................Power ON/OFF (green)

ALARM (red)
Power Supplies
7-15
7
7-16
Power Supply Unit with Duplication
General Description
The DC duplication power supply (PS19 DC-D) provides internal operating voltages
for the Coral IPx 800, 3000 and 4000 systems.
The PS19 DC-D operates from a nominal input of 48VDC, typically supplied by an
external 48VDC rectifier or stationary battery plant. Actual input may vary from
40 to 60 volts, allowing operation;
From external battery power source while the batteries are charged at an
equalized charge rate
During a power failure, until the batteries are completely discharged
Each PS19 DC-D is designed with the capacity to support two fully populated cages
with average mix of port types. The PS19 DC-D employs automatic switching
circuitry to share the output between two cages for redundancy purposes. The
PS19 DC-D may be used in any one of the following three configurations supporting
the cards in the cages:
Configuration
Description
Economical
One power supply supporting two adjacent cages via the

H719 DC-D connection cable, see Figure 7-7.
Redundant
Two power supplies supporting two adjacent cages,

providing redundancy for both cages via the H719 DC-D
connection cable between the two cages. See Figure 7-8.
Double Power
One power supply for each cage, powering only its own
cage (no cable). Installing one PS19 DC-D in each cage
enables greater power support among the cards of the
same cage. See Figure 7-9.
See Connecting the Power Supply Duplication Cable between Two Cages on page 7-28 for H719
DC-D wiring details.
Power Supplies
7-17
PS19 DC-D Power Supply Unit with Duplication
PS19 DC-D
7.2
PS19 DC-D Front Panel

Figure 7-4 displays the front panel of the PS19 DC-D. The following items located on
the front panel are described in the following table:

Feature
Description
Alarm (red)
Indicator
Lights when there is any failure within the PS19 DC
Power (green)
Indicator
ON/OFF
Power Switch
Turns the unit On or Off

CAUTION
Do not insert or remove the PS19 DC-D unit from the
cage when turned ON. Sudden power surges could
damage system components. Before inserting or
extracting the PS19 DC-D unit, verify that the power
switch is turned OFF.
Handle
Used to pull the unit out of the card cage
Top and Bottom Ejectors
Used to release the unit from the cage backplane.
Top and bottom captive

screws
Used to secure the unit to the cage. These screws also

ground the unit to the cage and safeguard the unit against
malfunction.
Turning one PS19 DC-D to OFF does not remove power from the peripheral cage if a
shared PS19 DC-D is turned ON. Shared power supplies must both be turned off to
remove all power from both cages.
7-18
Figure 7-4
PS19 DC-D
Front Panel
Top
Ejector
Top
Captive Screw
ALARM
Alarm
(Red) Indicator
POWER
Power
(Green) Indicator
ON
Power Switch
OFF
PS19 DC-D
CAT.NO. 72440953100
INPUT:
-40VDC to - 60VDC 25A
OUTPUT: +5VDC
+12VDC
-5VDC
-12VDC
-48VDC
-120VDC
20A
5.0A
0.25A
0.25A
12.0A
0.6A
85VRMS 20/25Hz 20VA
Handle
Bottom
Ejector
Bottom
Captive Screw
Power Supplies
7-19
PS19 DC-D Card Layout

The PS19 DC-D card layout is shown in Figure 7-5. Two components are described in
the following table:
Description
F1
Input Fuse
25A/125V, slow blow, protects the input voltage. See page

7-34, PS19 DC-D Fuses.
The entire cage 48VDC input circuitry, including the
power supply, is protected by a slow blow 30A/125V
fuse on the rear panel of the cage wired in series to the F1
fuse, see Figure 7-6, PS19 DC-D Block Diagram.
J3
Ring Frequency
Selection Jumper
Configured as per customer specification providing 20Hz

(North American systems) or 25Hz depending on the J3
configuration, see page 7-25, Ringer Frequency Adjustment.
Feature
7-20
Figure 7-5
PS19 DC-D
Card Layout
Power Supplies
7-21
Circuit Description
Figure 7-6 presents a block diagram of the PS19 DC-D power supply.
Power Input Section

The DC input consists of: passive filter, inrush current, and an on/off switch. The DC
input is protected against reverse polarity.
DC Output Power
The PS19 DC-D includes two switch-mode DC-DC converters that convert 48VDC
input power to:
+5VDC
5VDC
+12VDC
12VDC
The 120VDC and 85VRMS voltages are provided for ringers to drive the ringers and
120VDC for SLT (Single Line Telephone) message waiting lamps
Ring Generator
The ring generator is capable of generating ringing up to 33 ports simultaneously at
20Hz or at 25Hz. The ringing frequency is configured by setting jumper J3 on the
PS19 DC-D circuit board, see page 7-25, Ringer Frequency Adjustment.
The current is used for ringing on industry standard, single-line telephones (SLT), and
magneto telephone station ports and provides the high voltage (85VRMS) ring
generator current required by SLT station ports of the 16SH/S-LL, 8SLS, 16SLS,
24SLS, or 8SM cards.
Messaging
The messaging generator is capable of generating -120VDC for message lamps. It is
used to light neon lamps on SLT ports of the 16SH/S-LL, 8SLS, 16SLS, or 24SLS
cards.
7-22
48VDC
Output Power
The PS19 DC-D also filters and limits the 48VDC input to feed the peripheral card
slots.
Ripple and Noise

Filtering circuitry minimizes ripple and noise on the 48VDC feed to the peripheral
cards. The filtering circuitry produces an output voltage approximately 1.5V to 2V
lower than the input voltage to the PS19 DC-D.
Hot Swap Circuitry (Redundant Configuration)

The PS19 DC-D contains Hot Swap circuitry for redundancy purposes, so that if one
among two connected PS19 DC-D units fails, the second unit may take over the
power supply production.
All outputs, with the exception of the 48VDC output, are regulated.
Monitoring circuitry verifies that each voltage output (with the exception of the
48VDC output) is within specification. If any voltage deviates from specification, the
monitoring circuitry produces an alarm signal to the Coral system processor, causing
the red Alarm indicator to light. Note that the green Power indicator of a PS19 DC-D
remains lit at the same time as the red Alarm indicator.
If the voltage input drops below 36.51VDC the unit shuts down and returns to power
only when the voltage raises above 38.51VDC again. Additionally, if the voltage is
greater than 620.5VDC, then the unit shuts down until the input voltage drops below
580.5VDC.
Voltage and current level monitoring circuitry check each output of the PS19 DC-D
(including message and ring generator currents), and produce an alarm signal to the
Coral system main processor in the event of malfunction.
Power Supplies
7-23
Figure 7-6
PS19 DC-D
Block Diagram
Rear Panel
Fuse
S.B. 30A/125V
-VIN
Feedback
Fuse
F1
Passive
Filter
VRTN
On/Off
25A/125V S.B.
Power Input
Inrush
Current
-48VDC/12A
Current
Limit
Common
48V RTN
NOTE:
-48VDC or approx.
1.5V to 2.0V lower
than -VIN (input voltage)
Input:
-40 to -60VDC
-48VDC nom.
+5V/20A
-5V/0.25A
DC
+12V/5A
-12V/0.25A
Messaging -120V/0.6A
Circuit
Rear
Backplane
DC
85VAC/20VA
Ringing
Circuit
3
20Hz
2 1
Messaging
Ringer
J3
25Hz
Common
Frequency Selection
Monitoring
Control
Circuit
Power On/Off
Indicator
(Green)
7-24
Alarm
Indicator
(Red)
Alarm
PS Indicator Out
PS Indicator In
Ringer Frequency Adjustment

The PS19 DC-D can supply either 20Hz or 25Hz ringing frequency by configuring
Jumper J3 located on the left side card panel, see Figure 7-5. This jumper is configured
by the manufacturer according to local requirements. However, it can be configured at
the field. The procedure is as follows:
7.
Removing the power supply.
9.
Configure jumper J3 as described below for the following frequencies:

Frequency
J3 shorting plug
over pins
20Hz
2 and 3
25Hz
1 and 2
Reinstall the power supply unit as described in page 7-26, Installing the PS19 DC-D.
8.
Power Supplies
7-25
Installation
The PS19 DC-D is installed in the extreme left slot of the peripheral card cage.
The system may be configured for power redundancy with two PS19 DC-D units (one
in each cage) supporting two adjacent cages.
The Hot Standby system is designed to allow hot insertion and hot swaps of a
PS19 DC-D unit, such that, if one of the PS19 DC-D units malfunctions, system
operation is not interrupted because the second unit alone can continue powering
either cage.
Installing the PS19 DC-D

1.
Verify that the PS19 DC-D power switch is turned OFF.
2.
top and bottom) into the card edge guides corresponding to the POWER SUPPLY
label on the bottom of the cage slot.
3.
Slide the PS19 DC-D power supply gently but firmly, until fully inserted into the
card cage. A slight resistance should be felt as the multi-pin connectors engage at
the rear of the power supply and backplane.
Do not force the unit into the slot. Irreparable damage may occur if the multi-pin
connectors mis-align while attempting to insert the unit. If more than slight
resistance is encountered, partially slide the unit out of the card cage and verify
the alignment of the guide ridges with the unit edge guides. If alignment appears
to be correct, remove the unit from the slot and inspect the multi-pin connectors
for bent pins and debris in the pin holes.
4.
Secure the power supply to the card cage by fastening the two captive screws,
located at the top and bottom of the unit to the cage.
5.
Turn the power switch ON, and verify that the green Power indicator is lit while
the red Alarm indicator is not lit.
7-26
Turn ON the PS19 DC-D units in the expansion cages only after powering the Main
Cage (IPx 800M) and verifying that the Main Cage has initialized properly and the alarm
may not initialize.
Removing the power supply

1.
Locate a desk or table top that can support 50 lb (23kg). If the surface can be
2.
Place an anti-static sheet (the cards plastic shipping bag will suffice) over a desk
or a table top.
3.
Turn the PS19 DC-D power switch OFF (turn the switch downwards).
Do not remove the power supply unit from the cage when switched ON. Sudden power
surges could damage system components. Before extracting the power supply card,
4.
Unfasten the two captive screws on the front panel of the PS19 DC-D.
5.
Carefully remove the PS19 DC-D from its slot.

Place the PS19 DC-D over the anti-static material with the component side facing
upwards.
6.
verify that the power switch is turned OFF.
Power Supplies
7-27
Connecting the Power Supply Duplication Cable between Two Cages

An H719 DC-D connection cable enables the PS19 DC-D to supply power to two
adjacent cages with or without redundancy. The H719 DC-D cable must be ordered
separately by the customer.
The following two configurations are possible when the connection cable is used:
Configuration
Description
Economical
One PS19 DC-D can supply power to two adjacent cages

by connecting an H719 DC-D cable from the backplane
of the one cage to the POWER SUPPLY DUPLICATION
connector on the adjacent cage. See Figure 7-7.
Redundant
One PS19 DC-D can be installed on each of two adjacent

cages to provide power supply redundancy. An H719
DC-D cable is connected between both cages, in the
same manner as above. In this type of configuration, if
one of the power supplies fail, the other unit supplies
power to both cages and no calls are lost. This
configuration is depicted in Figure 7-8.
panel) for PS19 DC or PS19 AC power supplies will result in damage to the system.
This connector is only used with the PS19 DC-D power supply. Do not use this
connector when the PS19 DC or PS19 AC power supplies are installed.
Tip:
Using H719 cable requires 30A/125V slow blow fuse on the cage rear panel.
In old versions of the Coral IPx systems replace the 15A/125V S.B. fuse with
a 30A/125V S.B. fuse.
7-28
POWER SUPPLY
DUPLICATION
Connector
located on rear backplane
ON
OFF
PS 19
DC-D
CAT.NO. 72440953100
H719 DC-D
Cable
One PS19 DC-D Unit
POWER SUPPLY
DUPLICATION
Connector
Figure 7-7
PS19 DC-D
Economical Mode
Cabling
Power Supplies
7-29
Figure 7-8
PS19 DC-D
Redundancy Cabling
POWER SUPPLY
DUPLICATION
Connector
ON
OFF
PS 19
DC-D
CAT.NO. 72440953100
H719 DC-D
Cable
Two PS19 DC-D Units
ON
OFF
PS 19
DC-D
CAT.NO. 72440953100
POWER SUPPLY
DUPLICATION
Connector
7-30
Figure 7-9
PS19 DC-D
Double Power (No Cable)
ON
OFF
PS 19
DC-D
CAT.NO. 72440953100
H719 DC-D
Cable
NOT
CONNECTED
Two PS19 DC-D Units
ON
OFF
PS 19
DC-D
CAT.NO. 72440953100
Power Supplies
7-31
Ringer Database Programming

The maximum number of SLTs which can be fed ring generators simultaneously from
each PS19 DC-D is 33. By default, however, its value in the Coral database is set to
20. This default value can be altered via the Coral PI databases System Features
(Route: SFE,2) branch, by changing the system-wide MAX_RING parameter value.
See Chapter 6 of the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for further
details.
Defining Ringer Shelf Number (Route: RPS)

The ringer power supply (RINGER PS) definition in the PI database of the RPS branch
must be defined to reflect the actual power supply hardware setup per cage. The
(RINGER PS) default definitions are set up for Double Power configurations. For the
Economical and Redundant Power configurations, the RINGER PS definition per
cage must be updated to reflect the actual system setup - especially when increasing
MAX_RING.
When a PS19 DC-D supplies power to SLT ringers located on two adjacent cages
(Redundant or Economical configurations), the two adjacent cages must share the
same RINGER PS definition, via the Coral database (Route: RPS).
See Chapter 6 Ringers, of the Coral Program Interface & Database Reference
Manual for details on the parameter definitions.
7-32
Troubleshooting (PS19 DC-D)

However, protection circuitry in the power supply regulator circuitry may shut down
a regulator because of a current overload caused by an external fault.
The red Alarm indicator on the front panel of the PS19 DC-D lights when any of the
output voltages are outside of specification. This may be caused by internal or external
faults. The technician must isolate the problem and replace the faulty unit when
necessary, see below.

cage.
If one of the units is faulty, while the second unit is functioning properly, then
the red (ALARM) lit unit is at fault and should be replaced.
If both units have the red ALARM indicator lit, then both shelves are not
functioning properly and the problem must be isolated to either both the units
or one of the peripheral shelf cards.
Alternatively, the PS19 DC-D unit may not light any Power or Alarm indicator and
shut down. Following the shutdown of a P19 DC-D unit, the F1 fuse within the
PS19 DC-D or the fuse on the rear panel cage should be replaced. If this does not
restore the unit, then the unit should be replaced.
For Redundant Peripheral Power Supply Units

(i.e. one PS19 DC-D installed on each of two adjacent shelves and connected via a
cable on the backplane, see Figure 7-8):
Power Supplies
7-33

1.
DC power supply interruption. (Range: -40 to -60 VDC)
2.
3.
Blown fuse in the cage rear panel.
4.
Blown fuse, F1, within the PS19 DC-D.

(Replace fuse as described in page 7-34, PS19 DC-D Fuses.)
5.
Faulty PS19 DC-D.

(Insert a different PS19 DC-D unit as described in page 7-26, Installation.)
PS19 DC-D Fuses

The PS19 DC-D employs one fuse, F1, to protect the DC mains input.
If the F1 fuse blows, the PS19 DC-D Power green indicator and Alarm red
indicator do not illuminate.
If the cage rear panel fuse blows, the PS19 DC Power green indicator and
Alarm red indicator do not illuminate.
To replace the fuse within the PS19 DC-D

1.
Removing the power supply.
Do not insert or remove the PS19 DC-D unit from the cage when turned ON. Sudden
2.
Replace only with the same type and rating of fuse.

The PS19 DC-D card layout is shown in page 7-21, PS19 DC-D Card Layout.
Reinstall the power supply unit as described in page 7-26, Installing the PS19 DC-D.
3.
7-34
Determining the Cause of the Alarm Indicator

The red Alarm indicator can be activated by malfunctions in the PS19 DC-D or one
of the peripheral shelf cards. The Troubleshooting procedures for a lit Alarm indicator
are described below, depending on the PS19 DC-D usage: Redundant, Double Power
or Economical.
Double Power PS19 DC-D Configuration

For a single PS19 DC-D supplying power only to its own cage the peripheral
cards must be individually examined.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Switch ON the PS19 DC-D and check the red Alarm indicator.
If the Alarm indicator is lit, either the PS19 DC-D is malfunctioning or the
problem is caused by the backplane. Replace the PS19 DC-D unit.
If the Power indicator lights but the Alarm indicator is not lit, the unit is
functioning properly and the alarm is being caused by one of the cards.
Cage
Control Cards
IPx 800M
MEX-IP, HDC
IPx 800X
PX
To determine which control card is causing the problem, turn the PS19 DC-D
power switch OFF again (turn the switch downwards), re-insert the control card.
Then turn the PS19 DC-D power switch ON, and check the red Alarm indicator.
OFF the PS19 DC-D power switch before inserting each card. Turn the PS19 DC-D
the red Alarm indicator is lit on, the last card inserted is causing the problem and
should be replaced.
Turn the PS19 DC-D power switch OFF, insert the common control cards (MEX-IP,
HDC, or PX). Then turn the PS19 DC-D power switch ON and check the red
Alarm indicator once again. If the red Alarm indicator is off, the problem is
caused by one of the cards that was removed.
6.
insert the cards into their appropriate slots, one by one, beginning from the right
Power Supplies
7-35
5.
the backplane and that they initialize properly.
If the Alarm indicator lights when one of the cards is inserted, then that card is
faulty.
Redundant PS19 DC-D Configuration

1.
In the relevant cages turn the PS19 DC-D power switch OFF (turn the switch
downwards).
2.
Remove the H719 DC-D connector cable from the backplane to isolate the power
supplies.
3.
In the relevant cages switch ON the PS19 DC-D and check the red Alarm
indicators.
4.
Continue checking each cage separately in the manner described above. See page
7-35, Double Power PS19 DC-D Configuration.
Economical PS19 DC-D Configuration

For a single PS19 DC-D supplying power to two cages:
1.
2.
Remove the H719 DC-D connector cable from the backplane to isolate the cage
causing the Alarm.
3.
If the Alarm indicator is lit, continue checking each cage separately in the
manner described above. See page 7-35, Double Power PS19 DC-D Configuration.
functioning properly and the alarm is being caused by the adjacent cage with
no power supply or by the H719 cable.
4.
5.
Remove the PS19 DC-D and install it on the adjacent cage (See page 7-26,
Installation).
6.
If the Alarm indicator is lit, continue checking the cage with the power supply,
in the manner described above for the Double Power Case, skip to page 7-35,
Double Power PS19 DC-D Configuration.
functioning properly and the alarm is being caused by the H719 cable.
8.
Replace the H719 cable.
7.
7-36
Specifications
PS19 DC-D (DC Power Supply-Duplication)
Coral systems:............................................. IPx 800, 3000, 4000 (requires 30A/125V
fuse on the cage rear panel)
Input:........................................................... -40VDC to -60VDC, 25A max.
Power Consumption: ........................................ Continues 575W per cage
DC Outputs: ................................................+5VDC nom. regulated 20A max.

5VDC nom. regulated 0.25A max.
+12VDC nom. regulated 5A max.
48VDC unregulated (or approx.
1.5V to 2.0V lower than input voltage)
12.0A max.
Message Output (for SLTs):........................120VDC, 0.4A max.
Ringer Outputs (for SLTs): .........................
Voltage: ...................................85VRMS
Frequency................................20Hz or 25Hz (jumper selectable)
Capacity ..................................20VA Max.
Alarm: .........................................................Signaling malfunction
Indicators: ...................................................Power ON/OFF (green)

ALARM (red)
Fuses: ..........................................................
Input (-48VDC).......................25A/125V S.B.
Output .....................................None
Controls and Adjustments: .........................ON/OFF power switch
Weight: ................................................................ 3.0 kg
Power Supplies
7-37
NOTES:
7-38
PS19 AC
7.3
Power Supply Unit

0
General Description
The AC power supply (PS19 AC) provides internal operating voltages for the
Coral IPx 800 and 3000 cages.
The PS19 AC operates from a nominal input of 100-240VAC/47-63Hz.
PS19 AC Front Panel

Figure 7-10 displays the front panel of the PS19 AC. The following items are located on
Feature
Description
Alarm (red)
Indicator
Lights when there is any failure within the PS19 AC
Power (green)
Indicator
ON/OFF
Power Switch
Turns the unit On or Off.

CAUTION
Do not insert or remove the PS19 AC unit from the cage
when turned ON. Sudden power surges could damage
system components. Before inserting or extracting the
PS19 AC unit, verify that the power switch is turned
OFF.
Handle
Used to pull the unit out of the card cage
Top and bottom

Ejectors
Used to release the unit from the cage backplane
PS19 AC Power Supply Unit
the front panel and are described in the following table:
Power Supplies
7-39
Feature
Description
Top and bottom

Captive Screws
Used to secure the unit to the cage. These screws also

ground the unit to the cage and safeguard the unit
against malfunction.
Figure 7-10 PS19 AC

Front Panel
Top
Ejector
Top
Captive Screw
ALARM
Alarm
(Red) Indicator
POWER
Power
(Green) Indicator
ON
Power Switch
OFF
PS19 AC
Cat. No. 72440952900
INPUT:
100-240VAC 47-63Hz
CURRENT RATING:
6A/115VAC/60Hz
3A/230VAC/50Hz
OUTPUT: +5VDC 13.0A

+12VDC 3.0A
-5VDC 0.15A
-12VDC 0.15A
-48VDC 7.0A
-120VDC 0.4A
85VRMS 20/25Hz 12VA
Handle
Bottom
Captive Screw
7-40
Bottom
Ejector
PS19 AC Card Layout

The PS19 AC card layout is shown in Figure 7-11. Two components are described in the
following table:
Description
J2
Ring Frequency
Selection
Jumper
Configured as per customer specification, providing 20

Hz (North American systems) or 25 Hz depending on the
J2 configuration. See page 7-45, Ringer Frequency Adjustment.
F5
Main Fuse
10A/250V, slow blow, protects the AC input voltage.

See page 7-50, PS19 AC Fuse.
Feature
Power Supplies
7-41
Figure 7-11 PS19 AC

Circuit Board
On
Off
J2:
Ring Frequency
Selection
3
25Hz
FAN 1
FAN 2
20Hz
J2
F5:
AC Input Fuse
10A/250V S.B.
F5
AC Connector
continued protection against risk of fire,

CAUTION: For
replace only with same type and rating of fuse.
7-42
Circuit Description
Figure 7-12 displays a block diagram of the PS19 AC power supply.

The PS19 AC includes one AC-DC converter and one switch-mode DC-DC converter
that convert 98-126VAC and 198-253VAC (47-63Hz) input power to:
DC outputs
Message and Ring outputs
DC Output Power
-48VDC
+5VDC
5VDC
+12VDC
12VDC

The -120VDC and 85VRMS voltages are provided for ringers to drive the ringers and
120VDC for SLT message waiting lamps
Ring Generator
The ring generator is capable of generating ringing up to 20 ports simultaneously at
20Hz or at 25Hz. The ringing frequency is configured by setting jumper J2 on the
PS19 AC circuit board. See page 7-45, Ringer Frequency Adjustment.
The current is used for ringing on industry standard, SLTs, and magneto telephone
station ports and provides the high voltage (85VRMS) ring generator current required
Messaging
The messaging generator is capable of generating of -120VDC for message lamps. It is
used to light neon lamps on SLT ports of the 16SH/S-LL, 8SLS, 16SLS, or 24SLS cards.
by SLT station ports of the 16SH/S-LL, 8SLS, 16SLS, 24SLS, or 8SM cards.
Power Supplies
7-43
The PS19 AC also limits the 48VDC output to feed the peripheral card slots.
All outputs, with the exception of the 48 VDC output, are regulated.
Voltage and current level monitoring circuitry checks each output of the PS19 AC
(including message and ring generator currents), and produces an alarm signal to the
Coral system main processor in the event of malfunction.
Monitoring circuitry verifies that each voltage output is within specification. If any
voltage deviates from specification, the monitoring circuitry produces an alarm signal
to the Coral system processor, causing the red alarm indicator to illuminate. Note that
the green power indicator of a PS19 AC remains illuminated at the same time as the
red alarm indicator.
Figure 7-12 PS19 AC
Block Diagram
Feedback
AC Input Fuse
10A/250V S.B.
F5
L
E
AC
DC
-48VDC/7A
Current
Limit
Common
48V RTN
100-240VAC
47-63Hz
+5V/13A
-5V/0.15A
DC
+12V/3A
-12V/0.15A
Messaging
Circuit
DC
Ringing
Circuit
3
-120V/0.4A
85VAC/12VA
Messaging
Ringer
J2
20/25 Hz
Frequency Selection
Common
Monitoring
On/Off
Switch
Control
Circuit
Power On
Indicator
(Green)
7-44
Alarm
Indicator
(Red)
Alarm
3 Ringer Frequency Adjustment

The PS19 AC can supply either 20Hz or 25Hz ringing frequency by configuring
Jumper J2 located on the bottom left component side card panel. See Figure 7-11. This
jumper is configured by the manufacturer according to local requirements. However, it
can be configured in the field. The procedure is as follows:
1.
Do not insert or remove the PS19 AC unit from the cage when turned ON. Sudden
Frequency
J2 shorting plug
over pins
20 Hz
2 and 3
25 Hz
1 and 2
Reinstall the power supply unit as described on page 7-46, Installing the Power
Supply.
3.
Configure jumper J2 for the following frequencies:
2.
Power Supplies
7-45
4 Installation
The PS19 AC power supply is inserted into the Coral IPx cage in the extreme left slot.
Before installing the power supply, verify that the ring frequency configuration jumper
is set to the correct frequency (20Hz or 25Hz). See the table on page 7-45, Ringer
Frequency Adjustment.
Installing the Power Supply

1.
is not in use.
panel) for PS19 AC power supplies will result in damage to the system. This connector
is only used with the PS19 DC-D power supply, see page 7-28, Connecting the Power
Supply Duplication Cable between Two Cages. Do not use this connector when the
PS19 AC power supply is installed.
2.
Verify that the PS19 AC power switch is turned OFF.
Inserting the PS19 AC power supply card into the cage when the power switch is ON
could result in a sudden surge voltage that could damage the Coral IPx system. Before
inserting the PS19 AC card, verify that the power switch is turned OFF.
3.
the top and bottom) into the card edge guides corresponding to the POWER
SUPPLY label on the bottom of the cage slot.
4.
Slide the power supply gently but firmly, until fully inserted into the card cage. A
slight resistance should be felt as the multi-pin connectors engage at the rear of
the power supply and backplane.
Do not force the unit into the slot. Irreparable damage may occur if the multi-pin
connectors misalign while you attempt to insert the unit. If more than slight
resistance is encountered, partially slide the unit out of the card cage and verify
the alignment of the guide ridges with the unit edge guides. If alignment appears
to be correct, remove the unit from the slot and inspect the multi-pin connectors
for bent pins and debris in the pin holes.
7-46
5.
Secure the PS19 AC to the card cage by fastening the two captive screws, located
at the top and bottom of the PS19 AC to the cage. See Figure 7-10.
6.
Turn the power switch ON, and verify that the green Power indicator is lit, while
the red Alarm indicator is not lit.
Turn ON the PS19 AC units in the expansion cages only after powering the Main Cage
(IPx 800M) and verifying that the Main Cage has initialized properly and the alarm
may not initialize.
Removing the Power Supply

1.
Locate a desk or table top that can support 50 lb (23kg). If the surface can be
2.
Place an anti-static sheet over a desk or a table top (the cards plastic shipping bag
will suffice).
3.
Turn the PS19 AC power supply switch OFF (turn the switch downwards).
Do not remove the PS19 AC unit from the cage when turned ON. Sudden power surges
could damage system components. Before extracting the PS19 AC card, verify that the
power switch is turned OFF.
4.
Unfasten the two captive screws on the front panel of the PS19 AC. See Figure
6.
Carefully remove the PS19 AC from its slot.

Place the PS19 AC over the anti-static material with the component side facing
upwards.
5.
7-10.
Power Supplies
7-47
5 Ringer Database Programming

.

The maximum number of SLTs that can be fed ringing simultaneously from each
PS19 AC is 20, by default. This value can be altered via the Coral databases System
Features (Route: SFE,2) branch, by changing the MAX_RING parameter value.
See Chapter 6 of the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for details.
7-48
6 Troubleshooting (PS19 AC)
However, protection circuitry in the power supply regulator circuitry may shut down a
regulator due to a current overload caused by an external fault.
The red Alarm indicator on the front panel of the PS19 AC lights when any of the
output voltages are outside of specification.
cage.

1.
AC power supply interruption.
115VAC/60Hz (Range: 98-126VAC, 47-63Hz)
230VAC/50Hz (Range: 198-253VAC, 47-63Hz)
2.
3.
Blown fuse F5 within the PS19 AC

(Replace fuse as described on page 7-50, PS19 AC Fuse.)
Faulty PS19 AC
(Insert a different PS19 AC unit as described on page 7-46, Installation.)
4.
Power Supplies
7-49
PS19 AC Fuse
The PS19 AC includes one fuse, F5, to protect the AC mains input. If the fuse blows,
the PS19 AC Power green indicator and Alarm red indicator do not illuminate.
Replacing a Fuse within the PS19 AC

1.
Do not insert or remove the PS19 AC unit from the cage when turned ON. Sudden
2.
Replace only with the same type and rating of fuse (10A/250V S.B.).
See the PS19 AC card layout shown in Figure 7-11.
3.
Reinstall the power supply unit as described on page 7-46, Installing the Power
Supply.
7-50
Determining the Cause of the Red Alarm Indicator

1.
Turn the PS19 AC power switch OFF (turn the switch downwards).
2.
3.
4.
Turn ON the PS19 AC and check the red Alarm indicator.
If the Alarm indicator is lit, either the

PS19 AC is malfunctioning (replace as described in page 7-46, Installation.)
or the problem is caused by the backplane (contact the manufacturer).
If the Alarm indicator is not lit, the unit is functioning properly and the alarm
is being caused by one of the cards.
5.
Cage
Control Cards
IPx 800M
MEX-IP, HDC
IPx 800X
PX
To determine which control card is causing the problem, turn the PS19 AC power
switch OFF again (turn the switch downwards) and re-insert the control card.
Then turn the PS19 AC power switch ON and check the red Alarm indicator.
OFF the PS19 AC power switch before inserting each card. Turn the PS19 AC
the red Alarm indicator is lit on, the last card inserted is causing the problem and
should be replaced.
Turn the PS19 AC power switch OFF, insert the common control cards (MEX-IP,
HDC or PX). Then turn the PS19 AC power switch ON and check the red Alarm
by one of the cards that was removed.
insert the cards into their appropriate slots, one at a time, beginning from the right
the backplane and that they initialize properly. If the Alarm indicator lights when
one of the cards is inserted, then that card is faulty.
6.
indicator once again. If the the red Alarm indicator lit off, the problem is caused
Power Supplies
7-51
7 Specifications
PS19 AC (AC Power Supply)
Coral systems: ...................................... IPx 800, 3000
Input:...................................................... 100-240VAC 47-63Hz
Power Rating: ....................................... 115VAC / 60Hz / 6A (Range: 98 to 126VAC)
230VAC / 50Hz / 3A (Range: 198 to 253VAC)
Power Consumption: .......................... Continues 575W
DC Outputs:.......................................... 48VDC regulated 7.0A max.
+5VDC nom. regulated 13.0A max.
+12VDC nom. regulated 3.0A max.
Message Output (for SLTs): ................ 120VDC, 0.4A max.
Ringer Output (for SLTs):
Voltage.........................................85VRMS
Frequency ...................................20 or 25Hz (jumper selectable)
Capacity ......................................12VA Max.
Alarm: .................................................... Signaling malfunction
Indicators: ............................................. Power ON/OFF (green)
ALARM (red)
Fuses:
Input ............................................F5: 10A/250V S.B.
Output .........................................None
Controls and Adjustments:
ON/OFF power switch
Weight:................................................... 2.6 kg
7-52
Chapter 8
Common Control Cards
8.1 Common Control Cards.......................................8-1
Cor
Coral
8.2 MEX-IP Card .......................................................8-5

8.3 IMC8 Cartridge ..................................................8-23
8.4 DBX Module ......................................................8-29
8.5 CLA Module.......................................................8-37
8.6 HDC Card ..........................................................8-51
8.7 PX Card .............................................................8-59
8.1
0
General Information
The Common Control portion of the Coral IPx 800 systems provides the control
mechanism for establishing audio and data connections or calls between Peripheral
I/O ports in the system via the PCM bus. Common Control is divided into the
following functions:
Main Processor
Generic Feature Memory
Database Memory
IMC8 Control
Peripheral Bus Interface or Group Controller
The Common Control card set consists of an MEX-IP Main Processor and Database
Memory, one IMC8 generic feature memory baby card, an optional DBX Database
memory eXpansion card with an optional CLA card, an HDC (High Density Group
Controller), and a PX card.
The MEX-IP and HDC cards reside in designated card slots in the IPx 800M cage. The
CLA and DBX cards are smaller baby cards that are mounted on the MEX-IP card. The
IMC8 card resides in a special slot in front of the MEX-IP card. The card slot
designation appears below each common control card slot on the front of the card
cage. For more information, see Chapter 6 - Cage Description.
The MEX-IP card is the core of the Coral common control. The card contains the
database memory (protected against power loss with a long-life lithium standby
battery). It also provides a real-time clock and hosts the System Authorization Unit
(SAU). Additionally, the MEX-IP acts as a mother card to one CLA card or up to four
DBX cards. The main processor receives status messages from ports in the system and
determines the appropriate response based on programming entries contained in the
system database.
The IMC8 card provides memory space for the generic feature software of the Coral
main processor circuitry, memory management circuitry, local bus interface and
IPx 800 systems. The generic feature software determines the operation of telephony
functions of the system. The IMC8 uses flash memory technology to provide
8-1
high-reliability, non-volatile storage for the generic software and system database,
combined with the capability of field software upgrade.
The DBX is an optional card that expands the database memory space, which stores
the system's configuration. The DBX is generally not required. It is likely to be
required in special applications (see page 8-31, When is a DBX card required?) or when
the CoraLINK with CLA card is implemented.
The CLA (CoraLINK Adapter) card is used for FlexCT CTI (Computer Telephone
Interface) applications. The optional CLA card incorporates the Application Processor
and Ethernet 10Base-T interface circuitry for the CoraLINK computer-telephony
integration (CTI) link. CoraLINK uses TCP/IP protocol and complies with ECMA 179
and 180 standards. CoraLINK also supports the Novell TSAPI protocol, the Intel
Dialogic CT-connect, and IBM Callpath. The CLA attaches to an expansion connector
on the MEX-IP card in piggyback fashion. The 10Base-T Ethernet interface appears at a
RJ-45 connector on the front panel of the MEX-IP card.
Refer to the following sections for detailed information on each Common Control card.
8-2
Card Handling Procedures
All circuit cards, including Common Control cards, Shared Service cards, and
Peripheral cards, contain static-sensitive circuitry and may be damaged or destroyed by
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Always wear a static dissipating wrist strap connected to
the system cabinet or card cage while handling circuit cards. Hold circuit cards by their
edges and avoid touching contact surfaces. Handle with care and do not drop.
Never place a Common Control card in a slot other than the one designated for that
card.
Never insert a Common Control card with power applied. Irreparable damage may
occur if a Common Control card is placed in an incorrect slot with power applied.
Inserting a Coral Circuit Card

The system cabinet is equipped with an anti-static wrist strap at the top, above the
card cage. This wrist strap should be worn while inserting, removing, or handling any
card in the system. Each card is shipped inside an anti-static plastic bag. Cards should
be kept in this bag whenever handling is not required.
To insert a circuit card into a card slot, grasp the card with both hands, fingers on the
top and bottom of the front panel. Verify that the card is oriented correctly (red
diagnostic indicator on front panel toward top of card). Align the edges of the circuit
card with the card edge guides in the card cage or shelf, and gently slide the card
straight into the card slot. A slight resistance will be felt as the multi-pin connectors on
the circuit card meet mating connectors on the backplane and engage. Push against the
extractor levers until the front panel of the card is flush with the front frame of the
card cage. Do not force the circuit card into the slot. If more than slight resistance is
encountered, remove the circuit card and examine the connectors for bent pins or
interfering debris.
edge of the card near the front panel, and thumbs against the extractor levers at the
8-3
NOTES:
8-4
MEX-IP Card
8.2
Main Processor Unit

(Discontinued, replaced by MEX-IP2)
General Description
Inserting or removing the MEX-IP control card when power is applied could damage the
card. Before inserting or removing the MEX-IP control card, verify that the PS19 unit
power toggle switch is turned OFF.
The main control processor card for Coral IPx 800 systems, the MEX-IP card (Figure
8-1) provides RS-232E programming and maintenance interface, Software
Authorization Unit (SAU), and IMC8 interface. The MEX-IP contains multi-pin
connectors and support circuitry for the addition of CLA and DBX baby cards. It
integrates the main processor, memory management circuitry, local bus interface,
real-time clock, generic feature software memory, and database memory.
The MEX-IP supervises overall system operation by executing system-wide processes.
These processes include port connection management, feature management, generic
feature software installation, feature authorization, configuration database
management, database backup and restoration, program interface input/output and
Port Management
In order to manage port connections and feature operation, the main processor
communicates through the HDC card, via the HDLC buses, with the local card
processors on each peripheral card both in the main and in the expansion cabinet(s).
The main processor receives status messages from the card processors regarding port
activity. It determines the appropriate response based on the programming entries
contained in the system database. The main processor then instructs the appropriate
card processor what action to take with each port.
MEX-IP Card Main Processor Unit
diagnostic testing.
8-5
Figure 8-1
MEX-IP Card
REMOVE
BEFORE
USE
MEX-IP
Backup
Battery
J2
IMC8
IMC8
SAU
INT
RST
J1
KB0
8-6
Memory Management
All system memory resides on the MEX-IP card. Random Access Memory (RAM) is
located directly on the MEX-IP card. The MEX-IP also supports the CLA and DBX
baby memory cards. The DBX contains 1MB of Static Random Access Memory (SRAM)
expansion memory.
Flash memory, located on the IMC8 card, stores the generic feature software which
determines the operation of the system. RAM, both on the MEX-IP and on the DBX
expansion cards, stores the system configuration database, and is used as a run
memory for general purposes.
Database memory and real-time clock functions in the Coral system are protected from
power loss by long-life lithium backup batteries. Such a battery is installed both on the
MEX-IP and on each DBX card. A monitoring circuit on each card constantly measures
the voltage level of its battery. It signals the main processor when the remaining
energy stored in any battery approaches the point that it can no longer provide
sufficient power to maintain the memory circuitry.
The generic feature software and feature authorization information is installed and
updated into the IMC8, using FMprog PC-utility. Similarly, the system database is
regularly backed up to, and may be transferred and restored from, an IMC8 card kept
in the IMC8 drive.
The Program Interface Facility

The PI (Program Interface) provides a text-based facility for reviewing and changing
the system configuration and database. It enables the performance and monitor of
diagnostic routines. The PI can be accessed either via a simple data terminal or by a
personal computer.
The PI and CoralVIEW CVA/CVD/CVT can be accessed via an RS-232E data terminal
port (KB0) provided on the MEX-IP front panel (see Figure 8-3), or via an additional
RS-232 port provided on an RMI/8DRCM/8DRCF peripheral card.
8-7
Software Authorization Management

The MEX-IP supervises the feature authorization using the SAU (Software
Authorization Unit) lock device. The SAU is a small, encapsulated device that is
plugged into a front panel connector on the MEX-IP. Figure 8-2 illustrates four views of
the SAU.
The SAU enables a set of permissions and feature authorizations associated with its
unique identification number. The Coral software detects and verifies the permission
settings of the SAU on the Control card (MEX-IP) enabling the system to function
properly.
During software installation, the SAU serial number is compared with the features
authorization data, to verify the authorized use of enhanced Coral system features.
During regular system operation, the SAU is checked to ensure that it remains attached to
the MEX-IP card. However, if necessary, the SAU can be removed for short periods (a
maximum of two weeks) without interrupting system operation. If the SAU is removed
for more than two weeks, the system ceases to process calls.
The Coral system automatically ceases call processing after 14 days for any of the
following reasons:
The SAU serial number does not match the corresponding IMC8 SAU serial number.
The Coral generic version contained in the IMC8 is higher than is authorized by the SAU.
An SAU is removed from the MEX-IP front panel.
Relevant system messages appear on the PI, warning that the system will not operate
Replacing a MEX-IP card necessitates removing the SAU from the old card and installing
FRONT
8-8
LEFT SIDE:
MARKET NUMBER
BAR CODE
REAR
*0000719*
7 2 4 4 0 9 9 7 0 0 0
SAU
Property of Tadiran Telecom
Figure 8-2 Software

Authorization Unit (SAU)
Detail
7 2 4 4 0 9 9 7 0 0 0
it on the replaced MEX-IP card.
*015*
without the proper SAU.
RIGHT SIDE:
SERIAL NUMBER
BAR CODE
When starting up the Coral system, ensure that there are no SAU Fault
messages during start-up or SAU Alarms (PI Branch: Root, 1, 1,
15-Controls) due to any one of the following three reasons:
-- missing SAU device
-- inappropriate SAU software for this type of system
-- mismatched SAU serial numbers on the IMC8 and SAU device
SAU Unique Serial Numbers

Each SAU is assigned a unique, factory set, system identification serial number that
enables the feature authorizations and Coral generic software version for the Coral
system. Figure 8-2 illustrates the four side views of the SAU, including sample ID
numbers. The left side includes the country code, while the right side includes the unique
serial number. The last digit of the serial number is a verification digit. Any leading zeros,
as well as the verification digit do not appear in the SAU number reported in the PI root
menu.
8-9
Front Panel Features

Figure 8-3 illustrates the front panel of the MEX-IP card. The front panel contains
various elements. The following table is a listing of the various functions and what
they are for:
Table 8-1
MEX-IP
Control Card Functions
Function
What is it for?
Status Display
7-segment display used for alarms and diagnostic functions. A full list of
possible displays is provided later on in this chapter. See Table 8-3 page
8-20, MEX-IP Status Display Codes.

Green LED
Lit to indicate normal system operation.
IMC8 Release
Button
Used to release the IMC8 card.
IMC8 Flash Memory Used to save and restore the database as well as to store the Generic
Card
feature software. See page 8-11 IMC8 Card below.
SAU Connector
Software Authorization Unit is attached here.
INT - CPU Interrupt

Push button
Used to immediately halt all main processor tasks with the exception of
the program interface (PI) sessions established via the KB0
programming port. Main processor tasks may be resumed by typing G
at the PI terminal device connected to KB0. The Interrupt push button is
used primarily for troubleshooting purposes.
1.Pressing the INT push button will cause all calls in

progress to be terminated.
2.Pressing the INT push button will cause the MEX-IP card
to cease functioning.
3.INT button is to be used by authorized system

technicians, only.
RST - CPU Reset
Push button
Forces the Coral system to restart.

Used to partially initialize the system (cause a warm restart procedure),
simulating the procedure that occurs automatically when power is
applied to the system.
Forcing initialization by pressing RST immediately disconnects all calls in
progress but does not default the database. However, resetting the main
processor while the database is being programmed may corrupt the
database. If this happens, the database must be restored.
Pressing the RST button will cause a partial initialization. All

calls in progress will be terminated.
8-10
Option DIP switches All switches should be set to OFF (right) so that the system will respond
after a power failure.
KB0
IMC8 Card
The IMC8 is an Integrated Memory Card with an 8 MB flash memory capacity. It
contains the generic software of the Coral system and is used to store the system
database. See page 8-23, IMC8 Cartridge for details.
The IMC8 is used by the main control during run-time. The memory management on
the MEX-IP allows part of the code to use portions of the IMC8 memory for run-time.
Therefore, the IMC8 card must not be removed from its drive during system operation.
If removed, the system will crash.
Do not Remove the IMC8 card form its drive during system operation.
Removing the IMC8 while the system is ON AIR will cause the system to shut down.
The MEX-IP numeric status display indicates various operating and error states of the
Coral system, and can provide valuable information to assist in the maintenance of the
system. A P appears during software installation or backup, to indicate data
programming to the flash memory of the IMC8 card.
Data Terminal Port, DTE Interface, used to connect an RS232-E serial

cable, providing access to the PI or CoralVIEW CVA/CVD/CVT.
Default configuration:
9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, VT-100.
See page 8-13, KB0 RS-232E Programing Port
8-11
MEX-IP Front
Figure 8-3
Panel
8-12
KB0 RS-232E Programing Port

The serial interface of the KB0 programming port on the MEX-IP conforms to the EIA
RS-232E specification. It is wired as a Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) device using a
popular 9-pin, female, D type connector. The interface allows connection of a common,
asynchronous, ASCII data terminal, personal computer or external modem for
programming the various features of the Coral system and monitoring diagnostic
information.
Figure 8-4 illustrates the pin assignments of the DB-9S. Table 8-2 lists the pin functions.
See Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation Procedure for detailed connection information and
terminal setup.
Pin Designation
Pin #
Function
Receive Data
Input to MEX-IP
Transmit Data
Output from MEX-IP
Data Terminal Ready
Output from MEX-IP
Signal Ground
Signal return
Data Set Ready
Input to MEX-IP
Request to Send
Output from MEX-IP
Clear to Send
Input to MEX-IP
Figure 8-4 KB0 Pin

Assignment
5 - SIGNAL GROUND
4 - DATA TERMINAL READY
CLEAR TO SEND - 8
3 - TRANSMIT DATA
REQUEST TO SEND - 7
2 - RECEIVE DATA
DATA SET READY - 6
1 - N.C.
KB0 Setup
The baud rate is set during first initialization at 9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop
bit, VT-100.
The baud rate can be set from 300 bps to 115,200 bps.
N.C. - 9
Consult the Program Interface Reference Manual (Chapter-17 Terminal Setup - Route:
TERM,0) for instructions on the database programming required.
Table 8-2
KB0 RS-232E
Interface Pin Functions
8-13
DBX Memory Card Installation

The DBX card is an expansion card of memory. It adds an additional 1 MB SRAM to
the Coral system main control. The card is equipped with an extension connector on
its top side, allowing for another DBX or CLA card to be connected on top of it.
Figure 8-5 illustrates the location of the memory interface connectors. The first DBX
card must be located at J1. DBX cards (if installed) may be located at the memory
extension connector at J1 or J2. Each DBX card is equipped with an extension
connector on their top side, which extends the memory interface connector from the
MEX-IP card. Each MEX-IP memory interface connector can support two memory
cards by stacking one memory card onto the extension connector of another.
The MEX-IP supports up to four DBX cards or one CLA and three DBX cards.
The DBX cards use a lithium battery to operate. When the battery voltage is low, the
diagnostic software displays a warning message, stating that the battery of either the
upper or the lower memory card needs to be replaced. The DBX connected directly to
the MEX-IP is the lower memory card, while the DBX connected on top of the first
one is referred to as the upper memory card.
Once the system database has been installed, the position of DBX cards
(J1, J2, upper and/or lower) on the MEX-IP card must not be changed.
Doing so will cause the Coral system to malfunction.
Before installing the MEX-IP card, verify that the protective battery insulator has been
removed on both the MEX-IP battery and the battery of any DBX baby card installed
on the MEX-IP card. Figure 8-5 identifies the location of the battery holder and
illustrates the insulator removal.

See page 8-29, DBX General Information, for detailed information about DBX cards.
CLA Card Installation

The CLA card may be installed using the memory card interface connector J1 on the
MEX-IP card. The CLA is installed as the upper card at the memory extension
connector on the first DBX. See page 8-37, CLA Module for details.
8-14
MEX-IP Card Installation

The MEX-IP card is installed in a reserved slot, at the extreme right side of the
IPx 800M main cage.
Do not insert or remove the MEX-IP card when power is on.

All DIP switches should be set to OFF (right) so that the system will respond after a
power failure. See page 8-11, Option DIP switches.
1.
Remove power from the Coral IPx system by positioning the PS19 power supply
power toggle switch to the OFF position (turned downwards), all of the PS19
power supply units in the system cages.
2.
Carefully remove the protective battery insulator from under the lithium battery
on the MEX-IP card. See Figure 8-5 on page 8-18.
3.
Verify that all slide switches (on the MEX-IP front panel) are set to OFF (right).
4.
If a DBX card(s) is supplied with the system, carefully remove the protective
battery insulator from under the top contact of the lithium battery holder on the
DBX card
Insert the MEX-IP fully into its card slot.
5.
8-15
Removal of DBX/CLA Card

Locate a desk or table capable of supporting 50 pounds (23kg). If the top surface might
be damaged by sharp objects, place a protective sheet of cardboard or similar material
over the top surface. Next, place an anti-static sheet (the card's plastic shipping bag
will suffice) over the desk or tabletop. Now lay the MEX-IP flat, over the anti-static
material.
CLA Removal
The CoraLINK hardware (when required) consists of a CLA card. If used, the CLA
card should be located at MEX-IP memory connector J1. Two (2) Phillips screws secure
the CLA panel to the MEX-IP panel. Four (4) nylon machine screws secure the CLA to
standoff spacers on the MEX-IP.
1.
Remove these six screws and set them aside.
2.
Stand the MEX-IP on a flat surface with the front panel facing back.
3.
Place thumbs on the MEX-IP card, on either side of the CLA near the MEX-IP
front panel. Use your fingers to lift the edge of the CLA card on both sides, gently
disengaging the multi-pin connector on the CLA from the MEX-IP connector J1.
DBX Removal
Most Coral systems do not require a DBX card. If equipped, the first DBX card should
be located at MEX-IP memory connector J1. Two (2) nylon machine screws secure the
DBX to standoff spacers on the MEX-IP. Using the same procedure described above,
remove the DBX from the MEX-IP connector.
8-16
10 Lithium Battery Condition Testing

A new lithium battery can maintain power to the MEX-IP memory circuitry and
real-time clock for approximately 90 days. The battery is not recharged by the system
power. Thus, if the battery has powered the memory and real-time clock for an
extended period and near depletion is suspected, the contents of the memory must be
backed up, and the battery must be replaced. The internal diagnostic procedure will
cause a "b" to appear on the 7 segment display of the MEX-IP front panel, indicating
that the battery should be replaced.
The battery voltage, tested under load, can be used to determine its state of charge.
Voltage measured across an unused battery connected to the memory circuitry should
fall between 3.30 and 3.35 volts. If the voltage measured across a battery is less than
2.50 volts, the battery must be replaced.
For first time use, release the protective battery insulator. See Figure 8-5.
Replacing the Lithium Battery

1.
Carefully lift the battery with your thumbnail.
Do not use any metal tool to release or insert the battery. Doing so could result in a
short circuit and damage the battery.
Insert the new battery with the + (positive) symbol appearing on top.
2.

manufacturer.
8-17
Figure 8-5
Layout
MEX-IP Card
BATTERY INSULATOR
(PULL AS SHOWN
TO REMOVE)
REMOVE
BEFORE
USE
Database Memory
Backup Battery
IMC8 Card
Flash Memory)
1st DBX/
4th DBX/
CLA
Connector
J1
MEX-IP
8-18
J2
2nd DBX/
3rd DBX
Connector
11 MEX-IP Status Display Codes

The MEX-IP numeric status display indicates various operating and error states of the
Coral system, and can provide valuable information to assist in the maintenance of the
system. Table 8-3 lists the various status indications and their corresponding meaning.
A . (dot) appears during normal system operation.
A "0" appears on the status display whenever the system is off-line for maintenance
testing, or to install or update the generic software.
A "b" in the status display indicates that a backup battery on the MEX-IP or on a DBX
card no longer has sufficient energy to maintain the memory circuitry if system power
is lost. Each time a programming session is started from the PI, any faulty battery is
identified. The system database should be saved as soon as possible to an IMC8 unit,
and the faulty battery must be replaced as soon as the system can be shut down, to
ensure continued system reliability.
An "E" indicates that the main processor has been interrupted to prevent database
corruption during a power fluctuation. This condition should clear itself momentarily.
An L indicates that the SAU cannot be detected at the SAU port on the front panel
of the MEX-IP. Generally, this indicates that the device is no longer present or is not
securely fastened to the MEX-IP.
A P appears during software installation or backup.
Do not remove the IMC8 card from the MEX-IP when P is illuminated! Doing so might
damage the IMC8 data.
likely to be accompanied by considerable system malfunction. Should an error

indication appear not to affect system operation, save the database to DB0.DEF
immediately. Follow the instructions in chapter 4 of this manual.
When the system can be restarted without disrupting service, press the INT push
button followed by the RST push button on the front panel of the MEX-IP.
Pressing INT or RST interrupts all calls in progress and causes the system to initialize,
possibly discarding the database information stored in the database memory and
All other error status indications generally indicate a more serious problem, and are
reloading the database from IMC8.
8-19
Should other symptoms of system malfunction also be present with an error

indication, the error indications will assist maintenance personnel in determining the
nature of the fault.
Table 8-3
MEX-IP
Status Display Codes
Status
Display
System Status
Normal System Operation
Off-Line Monitor/Diagnostics Mode
1,2,3,4,5,6
Appear Briefly During Initialization
Lithium Backup Battery (MEX-IP or DBX) Low
Flash Memory (IMC8) Checksum Error
Map RAM, Coding PROM, or Memory Configuration Error
AC Fail Active (System halted due to power fluctuation)
The Software Authorization Unit (SAU) cannot be detected at the SAU port
on the front panel of the MEX-IP. Generally, this indicates that the device is
no longer present or is not securely fastened to the MEX-IP
If the SAU is removed from the MEX-IP, the Coral system automatically
ceases call processing after 14 days. Relevant messages appear on the PI,
warning that the system will not operate without the proper SAU.
See page 8-8, Software Authorization Management for details.
Programming the flash memory during software installation and backup
8-20
12 Specifications
MEX-IP
Microprocessor:.................................................. IntelTM 80386EX
CPU Clock Rate:................................................. 32 MHz
Memory Addressing: ........................................ 16 MB
Data Bus Structure:............................................ 16 Bit; Shared with DBX, IMC8, CLA and
HDC
SRAM Storage Capacity: .................................. 2M Bytes with battery backup
(90 days typically)
Memory Device:................................................. 512kb X 4 bit SRAM
Baby Cards:......................................................... Up to four (three DBX and one CLA
or four DBX)
RAM Back-up Battery: ...................................... LF1/2W, 2430, 2430B
Voltage ...................................................... 3.0 VDC Nom.
Capacity.................................................... 250 mA/H
Dimensions:
Diameter ............................................ 0.965 in. (24.5 mm)
Width ................................................. 0.118 in. (3 mm)
NEDA Equivalent................................... 5011L
KB0:...................................................................... RS-232E
Connector.................................................. DB-9S
Baud rate ................................................... 300 bps to 115,200 bps
Number of bits ......................................... 7, 8
Stop bit ...................................................... 1
Default ................................................ 9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit,
............................................................. VT-100
Parity.......................................................... None, Odd, Even
8-21
NOTES:
8-22
IMC8 Cartridge
8.3
Integrated Memory Card with 8 Mbytes flash memory

0
General Information
The IMC8 Flash Memory card is a removable component of the Coral IPx 800
Common Control section. Installed on the MEX-IP, it incorporates 8MB of Erasable,
Programmable, Read-Only Memory (flash EPROM), used to store the generic feature
software version of the Coral IPx 800 systems. The generic feature software determines
the feature operation of the Coral system. In addition, the IMC8 is used to store the
database backup as well as the Boot Code. Figure 8-6 illustrates the IMC8 flash
memory card.
IMC8 Cartridge Integrated Memory Card with 8 Mbytes flash memory
Figure 8-6 IMC8 Flash

Memory Card - Right side
and Write Protect Knob
8-23
Figure 8-7 IMC8 Flash

Memory Card - Left side
with Authorized Feature
List
IMC8 provides an extremely reliable and non-volatile storage medium, yet allows field
software update capability. Once programmed, the flash EPROM memory retains its
contents indefinitely, without power. However, by using a precisely controlled erase
procedure, the entire EPROM contents can be flash cleared and then reprogrammed, to
update the operating software of the system.
IMC8 FlashLite Linear PC Card provides an easy, simple data storage in a standard
PCMCIA Type I form factor. The FlashLite PC Card provides a rugged, removable
Linear Flash data storage solution for mobile, Embedded Systems and Telecom
applications.
The card can also be inserted into a PC slot using any PCMCIA application adapter for
loading a new Coral software version.
8-24
IMC8 Installation
The IMC8 does not occupy a card slot within the Coral system cabinet. It is installed in
the drive on the front panel of the MEX-IP just above the SAU. The IMC8 release
button enables the removal of the IMC8 card. An arrow on the foil attached to the
front side of the IMC8 card indicates the insertion direction. The IMC8 card position
on the MEX-IP card is shown in Figure 8-8.
In order to avoid damage to the IMC8 card, press very gently during the card insertion.
Insert the IMC8 card with its label side facing right, as shown in Figure 8-6.
The IMC8 card contains three types of data:
Generic Feature Software Version
Database Backup
Boot Code
When replacing an IMC8 card with another card that contains upgraded software, the
new card will not contain a database. It is therefore important to make a binary backup
of the database before removing the card. See the Database Binary Backup PC Utility
Reference Manual for further details.
Make sure that the IMC8 card being installed is not write-protected. Figure 8-6
illustrates the IMC8 write-protect knob.
After a new card is installed, verify that the PI starts up properly, and then save the
database in accordance with the procedure provided in Section 4, System Database
Control.
Before each installation or removal of an IMC8 card, press the RESET button.
8-25
IMC8 Removal
The IMC8 release button enables the removal of the IMC8 card.
Before each removal of an IMC8 card, press the RESET button.
Do not remove the IMC8 card from the MEX-IP when P is illuminated on the numeric
status display.
When replacing an IMC8 card with another card that contains upgraded software, the
new card will not contain a database. It is therefore important to make a binary
backup of the database before removing the card. See the Database Binary Backup PC
Utility Reference Manual for further details.
8-26
Figure 8-8 IMC8 Card

Position on MEX-IP Card
MEX-IP
IMC8
Release
button
IMC8 Card
Flash Memory)
IMC8
drive
SAU
INT
Right side
Front panel
RST
8-27
Specifications
IMC8
Storage Capacity:....................... 8,388,608 Bytes (8MB)
Memory Configuration: ........... 16 bits
PCMCIA:..................................... Standard Compatible
8-28
DBX Module
8.4.
Database Expansion Memory Card

0
DBX General Information

The DBX memory expansion card is a component of the Coral IPx 800M Common
Control main cages. The DBX incorporates 1MB of Static Random Access Memory
(SRAM), used to store the configuration database of a Coral system, equipped with
MEX-IP or MCP-IPx cards. The DBX is an optional card that expands the database
memory space. The configuration database determines the individual characteristics of
a particular installation site. Figure 8-9 illustrates the DBX card layout.
DBX Card
MOUNTING HOLE
(for MCP-IPsl)
MOUNTING HOLE
(for MEX-IP)
BATTERY INSULATOR
(Pull As Shown To Remove)
MEMORY
EXPANSION
CONNECTOR
DBX-1
MOUNTING HOLE
(for MEX-IP)
DBX Module Database Expansion Memory Card
REMOVE
BEFORE
USE
Figure 8-9
Layout
8-29
SRAM devices require a constant source of power to retain their contents. Power to
maintain the memory is ordinarily provided by the Coral system in which the DBX is
installed. However, the DBX also contains an on-board lithium battery that provides
continuous power to the memory circuitry during the absence of system power. A
battery monitor circuit signals the Main Processor when the remaining Electrical
Power stored in the lithium back-up battery has exhausted to a level that can no
longer support the memory circuitry.
The DBX does not occupy a card slot within the Coral system cabinet. Rather, it is
installed as a baby card onto a memory interface connector on the MEX-IP Main
Processor card. DBX cards may be installed at two memory interface connectors on the
MEX-IP card either J1 or J2. Figure 8-10 illustrates the location of the two memory
interface connectors on the MEX-IP card. Note that MEX-IP connector J1 is reserved for
the first DBX card installed in the Coral system.
The DBX card is equipped with an extension connector on the top side that extends
the memory interface connector from the MEX-IP card. Each MEX-IP memory interface
connector can support two memory cards by stacking one memory card onto the
extension connector of another. When a DBX card is installed in the extension
connector of another DBX card, the memory card installed on the MEX-IP is referred to
as the lower memory card, and the DBX installed on the extension connector is
referred to as the upper memory card.
The CLA, when installed, is stacked on top of the first DBX card at J1.
If required, DBX may be installed as either the lower and upper memory card at J2. Up
to four DBX cards, or up to three DBX cards and one CLA card can be installed on the
MEX-IP card.
Most Coral systems do not require a DBX at all. Special applications may require a
single DBX, and rarely would any system configuration require more than one DBX
card.
Once the system database has been installed, the position of DBX cards
(J1, J2, upper and/or lower) on the MEX-IP card must not be changed.
Doing so will cause the Coral system to malfunction.
8-30
When is a DBX card required?

A DBX card is required:
In large Coral Configurations with 5000 or more ports
In Coral systems with a CLA card installed for CoraLINK
To use the Coral Directory feature
Refer to the Program Interface Reference Manual to display the database memory status.
(Chapter-4 Size Definition, Route: SIZ, CHECK MEMORY?)
1st DBX
J1 Lower
2nd DBX
J2 Lower
3rd DBX
J2 Upper
4th DBX
J1 Upper
CLA
J1 Upper
Comments
Must be installed for the CLA
Not available when CLA is required
MEX-IP
Location
Card Model
8-31
DBX Installation
The DBX is secured to the MEX-IP or to the memory interface extension connector of
another DBX card by 2 threaded nylon spacers.
Preparing for Installation

1.
Locate a desk or table top that will support 50 lb (23 kg). If the surface can be
2.
Place an anti-static sheet (the card's plastic shipping bag will suffice) over the desk
or table top.
3.
Remove power from all the Coral IPx system cages as described below, before any
insertion or removal of the MEX-IP card: turn off the power switch in all of the
PS19 Power Supply units in all system cages.
4.
Carefully remove the MEX-IP card from its slot and lay it flat, over the anti-static
material.
Installing Lower DBX Cards

5.
Remove the 2 nylon screws from the top of the spacers associated with the
memory interface connector.
6.
Carefully align the multi-pin connector on the bottom side of the DBX card with
the MEX-IP memory interface connector.
7.
Gently but firmly press the DBX connector into the MEX-IP connector until the
DBX card rests on the nylon spacer. A slight resistance will be felt as the
connectors engage.
8.
Insert the two nylon screws through the mounting holes of the DBX card and
thread the screws into the nylon spacers until snug. Do not over-tighten the nylon
screws or it may be damaged.
9.
Remove the plastic battery insulator tab from between the battery holder upper
contact and the lithium battery. Refer to Figure 8-9 which illustrates the location of
the battery insulator.
8-32
Installing Upper DBX Cards

If the DBX is to be stacked over another DBX card:
1.
Remove the 2 screws from the top of the nylon spacers associated with the
MEX-IP memory interface connector. These screws secure the lower card.
2.
Thread the 2 extension spacers provided with the DBX into the existing spacers on
the MEX-IP.
3.
Carefully align the multi-pin connector on the bottom side of the DBX card with
the memory interface extension connector.
4.
Gently but firmly press the DBX connector into the extension connector until the
DBX card rests on the new nylon spacers.
5.
Insert the 2 nylon screws through the mounting holes of the upper DBX card
and thread the screws into the new nylon spacers until snug. Do not over-tighten
the nylon screws or it may be damaged.
Remove the plastic battery insulator tab from between the battery holder upper
contact and the lithium battery. Refer to Figure 8-9 which illustrates the location of
the battery insulator.
6.
8-33
DBX Removal (As Required

1.
Repeat steps 1 through 4 above (page 8-32, Preparing for Installation).
2.
Remove the 2 nylon machine screws that secure the DBX card to the standoff
spacers on the MEX-IP card.
3.
Place thumbs on the MEX-IP card, on either side of the DBX near the MEX-IP
front side. Use your fingers to lift the edge of the DBX card on both sides, gently
disengaging the multi-pin connector on the DBX from MEX-IP connectors J1 or J2.
Lithium Battery Condition Testing

A new lithium battery has sufficient energy to maintain power to the DBX memory
circuitry for approximately 90 days. The battery is not recharged however, when
system power returns. Thus, if the battery has powered the memory for an extended
period and low battery capacity is suspected, the contents of the memory should be
backed up and the battery replaced.
The battery voltage, tested under load, can be used to determine its state of charge.
Voltage measured across a new battery connected to the memory circuitry should fall
between 3.30 and 3.35 volts. If the voltage measured across a cylindrical battery is less
than 2.50 volts, the battery should be replaced.
Replacing the Lithium Battery

In the following procedure, do not apply too much pressure to the battery holder clip
as this could cause the clip to snap.
1.
Carefully raise the battery holder clip.
2.
Insert the new battery with the + (positive) symbol appearing on top.

manufacturer.
8-34
Figure 8-10 DBX

Positions On MEX-IP
Card
BATTERY INSULATOR
(PULL AS SHOWN
TO REMOVE)
REMOVE
BEFORE
USE
Database Memory
Backup Battery
J2
IMC8 Card
Flash Memory)
2nd DBX/
3rd DBX
Connector
1st DBX/
4th DBX/
CLA
Connector
J1
MEX-IP
8-35
Specifications
DBX
Storage Capacity: ............................................... 1,048,576 Bytes (1.0MB)
Memory Configuration: .................................... 524,288 X 16 bits
Memory Device: ................................................. 128kb X 8 bit SRAM
Battery: ................................................................ LF1/2W, 2430, 2430B
Voltage ................................................................. 3.0VDC Nom.
Capacity............................................................... 250mAH
Dimensions
Diameter .................................................. 0.965 in. (24.5mm)
Width ........................................................ 0.118 in. (3mm)
NEDA Equivalent .............................................. 5011L
8-36
CLA Module
8.5
CoraLINK Adapter Card

0
General Description
The CLA (CoraLINK Adapter) appears in various configurations:
CLA 386 (10Base-2 via Coax) [this type has been discontinued]
CLA 486 (10Base-T via RJ-45)
CLA 686 (10/100Base-T via RJ-45) with a Compact Flash memory card
The CLA cards are shown in Figure 8-11 and Figure 8-12.
The CoraLINK is a Computer-Telephony Integration (CTI) Link for the Coral system
that provides an Open Architecture Interface (OAI) to the call processing and
management circuitry. CoraLINK enables external computer applications to monitor
call activity, and establish, manipulate, and disconnect calls through the Coral system.
Coral systems installed with the CLA card enable the system to function as a universal
communications switching platform for specialized communications applications. The
CoraLINK OAI interface enables connection of the Coral's control circuits to an
external Ethernet LAN computer network.
The CoraLINK module is physically connected to the Coral's control system and
provides an Ethernet 10/100Base-T via RJ-45 output connector for interfacing the
CoraLINK is implemented by installing a CLA card piggy-back as a baby card on
the MEX-IP card. The CLA is installed at the J1 memory expansion connector on the
MEX-IP card. Refer to the CoraLINK Reference Manual and Coral FlexiCom & Coral IPx
Product Description for detailed information on the CLA.
The CLA module is composed of a base card and two mini modules mounted on it.
The CLA module provides the physical connection, through the J-BUS, to the MEX-IP
card, the call processor of the Coral system, and provides the front panel RJ-45
connection to the network. Its front panel also contains a LED indicator, which when
lit indicates that the CLA card is active and properly working, a reset push button and
an RS-232 COM port.
The CoraLINK software is contained in two different cards: IMC8 and CLA.
The CLA contains the memory required for the cards software and the shared
memory used for information transfer on the bus interface circuit.
CLA Module CoraLINK Adapter Card
external computer network.
8-37
Figure 8-11 CLA 486

Card
NOTE: The Wire Must be

Towards The Outside Away
From The PCB, With
The White Dot Visible
Mounting
Hole
RS-232 Cable
Mounting
Hole
CLA
CoraLINK
Status Indicator
LED
LED
Reset Pushbutton
reM
Co
COM 1
Maintenance
RS-232 Port
le/
du t
o
e
niM rn
Mi Ethe
RST
RJ-45 Network
Interface
Ethernet
10Base-T
6
48
LINE
10Base-T

(Always Set To The Right
for Normal Operation)
Figure 8-12 F-CLA 686

Card
LAN
Cable
Mounting
Hole
PC104
BUS
NOTE: The Wire Must be

Towards The Outside Away
From The PCB, With
The White Dot Visible
Mounting
Hole
CFD
ule
od
RS-232 Cable
Mounting
Hole
FCLA
CoraLINK
Status Indicator
LED
LED
Reset Pushbutton
RJ-45 Network
Interface Ethernet
10/100Base-T
COM 1
Maintenance
RS-232 Port
RST
Compact
Flash Disk
(CFD)
memory
ule
od
M
A
CL
CF
6
68
LINE
100Base-T

(Always Set To The Right
for Normal Operation)
8-38
le
du
o
re M
Co
LAN Cable
IDE Bus
PC104
BUS
Mounting
Hole
The DIP switch located on the right side of the CLA can be set to two modes:
a. All three switches that are set to the right provide the mode for the normal
working condition of the CLA card.
b. Switches 1 through 3 that are set to the left, provide the debug mode. This
mode is used during software installation or for the use of technicians for
software debugging.
Card Front Panel

The CLA front panel, depicted in Figure 8-11 and Figure 8-12, contains the following items:
Green LED - indicates that the CLA card is active and properly working when lit.
Reset button - causes the CLA to drop all CTI calls and resets the card. The card
automatically reestablishes a network connection.
COM1 Connection - Maintenance port (for debugging).
LINE Connection - RJ-45 Ethernet interface.
CLA Functional Block Diagram

The functional block diagram is shown in Figure 8-13 and Figure 8-14.
The Ethernet Network Interface (LAN Communication Controller) is an adapter for
interconnecting the system with the Ethernet LAN external computer network. The
CoreModule 32-bit CPU compatible incorporates the elements of a PC compatible
computer and provides the processing power needed for the control of the CoraLINK
adapter.
The CLA base card contains a PC104 BUS to interconnect the mini modules. The PC104
BUS is electrically identical to the ISA BUS.
The communications software and part of the application software is run on the card
by the local CPU and is not loaded to the exchange call processor (MEX-IP).
The base card contains a 256 Kilobyte static RAM memory, shared between the CLA
and the MEX-IP. The shared memory is accessed from the CLA card via the PC104 BUS
and via the J-bus from the MEX-IP.
In the CLA 486 card, the 2MB flash memory EPROM on the base card contains the
card's software, which is burnt into memory during the regular software installation
procedure. The flash stores code for the card's program. The flash EPROM is connected
to the PC104 BUS.
In the CLA 686 card, the CFD (Compact Flash Disk) memory on the CFCLA mini
module contains the CLA card's software and programming code, which is factory
loaded. The CFD is connected to the PC104 BUS via IDE BUS.
The communication in this configuration is controlled by an intelligent CPU controller.
8-39
The CLA card also contains an NMI/watchdog circuit, providing a reset signal to the
CoreModule should it detect a failure in the software cycle.
The communication protocol implemented in the network is TCP/IP. The connection
to the computer network is via a RJ-45 connector type in accordance with the
10/100Base-T protocol and is located on the front panel of the CLA base card.
Figure 8-13 CLA 486
Card - Functional Block
Diagram
CoraLINK Circuitry
Coral System
486
UNIVERSAL
COMPUTER
CARD
8MB DRAM
32-BIT
CPU
PC104 BUS
SUPPORT
COM 1
9-PIN
D-TYPE
RS-232
for card
configuration
Coral
Main Controller
(MEX-IP,
MCP-IPsl or
MCP-IPx)
MAIN
CONTROLLER
MEMORY
Figure 8-14 F-CLA 686

Card - Functional Block
Diagram
ISA BUS
MEMORY
BUS
256kB
SHARED
DUAL-PORT
RAM
CoraLINK Circuitry
Coral System
2MB
FLASH
EPROM
8
8-40
RJ-45
32-BIT
CPU
ETHERNET
10/100Base-T
NETWORK
ETHERNET
NETWORK
INTERFACE
RJ-45
PC104 BUS
SUPPORT
COM 1
Coral
Main Controller
(MEX-IP,
MCP-IPsl or
MCP-IPx)
MAIN
CONTROLLER
MEMORY
ETHERNET
10Base-T
NETWORK
ETHERNET
NETWORK
INTERFACE
686
UNIVERSAL
COMPUTER
CARD
64MB SDRAM
PC104
BUS
ISA BUS
MEMORY
BUS
256kB
SHARED
DUAL-PORT
RAM
IDE
BUS
FLASH
DISK
CARD
9-PIN
D-TYPE
RS-232
for card
configuration
CLA Installation
This section details hardware installation procedures, software installation instructions
can be found in Chapter 4.
The Hardware installation procedure requires shutting off the Coral's input
power, which halts all normal system call processing and disconnects all
calls in progress. If this procedure is to be performed on an existing
installation that already is processing calls, it should be done at a time that
will pose the least disruption to call traffic.
The CoraLINK hardware consists of a CLA card mounted on the MEX-IP card.
Installing the CLA card is a quick and simple process requiring a small flat head and a
phillips screwdriver.
The CLA does not occupy a card slot within the Coral system cabinet. Rather, it is
installed as a baby card onto a memory interface connector on the MEX-IP card. The
CLA card may be installed at J-1 memory interface connector on the MEX-IP card.
Figure 8-16 illustrates the location of the interface connector on the MEX-IP card. Note
that the first DBX card installed in the Coral system must be located at J1. Figure 8-17
illustrates the location of the CLA card on the front of the MEX-IP card.
Unlike DBX memory card, the CLA card is not equipped with an extension connector
on the top side. Each MEX-IP J-1 bus interface connector can support two DBX
memory cards, or one DBX card and one CLA card, by stacking one card onto the
extension connector of another DBX memory card. When a CLA card is installed in the
extension connector of another DBX memory card, the DBX memory card installed on
the MEX-IP is referred to as the lower card, and the CLA installed on the extension
The CLA can be stacked on top of the first DBX at J1, or may be installed as the
lower card at J1. J2 cannot accept CLA cards due to physical limitations.
The CLA is secured to the MEX-IP or to the DBX memory interface extension
connector of another DBX memory card by four threaded nylon spacers (see Figure
8-15), and two Phillips screws on the front panel of the MEX-IP.
CLA Installation
1.
Locate a desk or table top that will support 50 pounds (23kg). If the surface may
be damaged by sharp objects, place a protective sheet of cardboard or similar
2.
connector is referred to as the upper card.
Place an anti-static sheet (the card's plastic shipping bag will suffice) over the desk
or table top.
8-41
3.
Remove power from the Coral system as described in section 8.2 page 8-15,
MEX-IP Card Installation.
4.
Remove the MEX-IP card from its slot and place it on a static protective surface.
5.
Remove the two phillips screws and the appropriate expansion panel from the
MEX-IP card, where the CLA module is to be placed.
6.
Remove the four nylon screws threaded into the top of the four standoff spacers
associated with connector J1 if you have not already done so. Place them aside.
Refer to Figure 8-16 for the location of the memory interface connectors on the
MEX-IP card.
7.
If the CLA is to be stacked over another DBX card, remove the 4 screws securing
the DBX to the MEX-IP. Thread the four extension spacers provided with the CLA
into the existing spacers on the MEX-IP to secure the DBX (see Figure 8-15).
8.
Carefully align the multi-pin plug on the bottom of the CLA card with the mating
connector J1 on the MEX-IP card, or on the extension connector of the lower
DBX. Verify that the pins of the CLA plug are aligned with the pin holes of the
MEX-IP connector.
9.
Gently but firmly press the CLA plug into the MEX-IP connector until the CLA
card rests on the four nylon spacers. A slight resistance will be felt as the
connectors engage.
10. Re-insert the four nylon screws through the mounting holes of the CLA card and
thread the screws into the nylon spacers until snug. Do not overtighten the nylon
screws or they may be damaged.
11. For F-CLA 686 card type, if not already inserted, insert the appropriate CLA
compact flash memory disk (CFD) into the drive on the CFCLA mini module (see
Figure 8-12).
13. Install the MEX-IP as described in section 8.2 page 8-15, MEX-IP Card Installation.
Figure 8-15 MEX-IP
Spacers for CLA and
DBX
CLA
Nylon
Screw
MEX-IP
Spacer
Type A
Spacer for CLA
12. Verify that all slide switches (on the CLA right side) are set to OFF (right).
8-42
CLA
Nylon
Screw
MEX-IP
Spacer
Type B
Spacer
Type A
Spacers for CLA and DBX
Nylon
Screw
Figure 8-16 MEX-IP

Memory Interface J-bus
Connector Locations
IMC8 Card
Flash Memory)
CLA
Position On
Top of DBX
DBX - "Lower"
CLA - "Upper"
J1
MEX-IP
8-43
Figure 8-17 CLA Card

Installation
MEX-IP
Status Display
Green LED
IMC8 Release Button
IMC8 Software and

Database Card
Software Authorization
Unit (SAU) Connector
Interrupt CPU Push-button

(Authorized Personnel Only)
SAU
SAU
CLA
CoraLINK
INT
LED
CLA Card
Status
Indicator
CoraLINK
RST
Reset CPU Pushbutton
RST
RST

COM 1 1
COM
(Always Set To The Right)
KB0 RS-232E
PI Programming Port
LINE
10Base-T
8-44
Reset CLA
Pushbutton
Maintenance
Port
RJ-45
Network
Interface
10Base-T (CLA 486)
10/100Base-T (FCLA 686)
Network Connections (RJ-45)

Connection to the LAN
The front panel of the CLA module contains a RJ-45 adapter for connection to the
Ethernet computer network. The CLA is designed to operate over Ethernet LAN with
a connection of less than 100 meters to the local switch or computer network when
using Category 5 UTP (unsaddled twisted pair), accordance with the 10/100Base-T
protocol.
The following table shows the interface connections of the pins on the CLA RJ-45
Table 8-4
CLA-ATS
(DTE)
Function
Pin 1
Tx(+)
Pin 2
Tx(-)
Pin 3
Rx(+)
Pin 4
not used
Pin 5
not used
Pin 6
Rx(-)
Pin 7
not used
Pin 8
not used
Database Programming Areas

The installation of a CLA card to a Coral system has considerable impact on the
system database. For further information, refer to Chapter 27 in the Program Interface
and Database Reference Manual.
Pin #
connectors.
8-45
CLA Maintenance
CLA maintenance is performed with a PC connected to the COM1 port on the front
panel of the CLA card. The RS-232 COM1 maintenance port allows you to execute
debugging commands as described in Table 8-6. The PC connected to the CLA card
must include an RS-232 connector that is capable of terminal emulation.
CLA card maintenance includes certain troubleshooting actions that are

carried out by a representative of the manufacturer, only. Incorrect use of
these commands could result in system disruption. For further information,
see the CoraLink Installation Procedure & Hardware and Software
Reference Manual.
RS-232 Pin Connections

The minimum pin connections of the RS-232 connector connected to COM1 are
displayed in Table 8-5.
Table 8-5
RS-232 Pin
Connections
Pin No.
Connection
Pin 2
Receive Data
Pin 3
Transmit Data
Pin 5
Ground
COM1 Default Port Settings

The default COM1 port settings are as follows:
Baud rate - 19200
Parity - none
Data bit - 8
Stop bits - 1
8-46
CLA Maintenance Debugging Commands

Table 8-6 displays some of the commands used to debug the FCLA card. A terminal
emulator must be opened prior to debugging.
What it Does
c0
Disables messages to the screen. Before closing the terminal, this function
must be entered. If this function is not entered before closing the
terminal, the CLA card will initialize. Enter c0 before entering c3.
c3
Activates messages to the screen
br3
Changes the baud rate. When you enter this command, the terminal will
cease to function until the terminal baud rate is updated.
Displays the free memory on the CLA card.
ci
Displays the following:
Number of Empty calls id
Number of Occupied calls id
Number of DCCLA - The number of corrective software actions

performed by the card. A functioning CLA card should read 0.
cs
Displays statistical information. This command is entered twice, with an

interval of 30 seconds between each command entry. The information
displayed includes the time it took to run the test and how many messages
were read to and from the Coral system per second and per hour.
Displays CLA card software version
Displays the date
Indicates whether there has been an overflow of information from the Coral
system to the CLA card.
Command
Table 8-6
Debugging
Functions via COM1
8-47
Applications
In Coral CTI applications, CoraLINK is connected to the Ethernet back-bone along
with the telephony server, as shown in Figure 8-18.
The CoraLink acts as an interface between the Coral system and any CTI server
application for all the services (call, transfer, etc.) and events (monitoring functions) of
the network. The CTI application together with the CTI telephony server manipulate
numerous different call commands from the agent network and translate them into
logical data. The CTI telephony server communicates with the CoraLINK through a
single connection. The CoraLINK then translates that data into logical information for
the Coral system, which processes the calls.
CoraLINK can support up to eight different multiple CTI applications on the network,
any or all of which may be simultaneously directing service requests to, and receiving
status events at any time.
CoraLINK uses TCP/IP protocol and complies with the ECMA 179 and 180 standards.
CoraLINK also supports the Novell TSAPI protocol, the Intel Dialogic CT-connect,
and IBMs Callpath.
The CLA should be accompanied by the appropriate software application.

Contact the manufacturer for the required CTI application and/or price list.
See Chapter 2 in the Coral FlexiCom & Coral IPx Product Description, for more
details.
8-48
Figure 8-18 CoraLINK

Application Telephony
Server
Ethernet 10/100Base-T RJ-45

TCP/IP
CTI Clients
CoraLINK
Interface
RJ-45
.
.
.
Server
LAN
Coral IPx
system
Any Telephony Server
(e.g. FlexCT server,
CallPath,
CT Connect,
TSAPI,
up to 8 connections).
Computers with
CTI applications
IVR
Server
8-49
Specifications
CLA 486
Application Interface:........................................ Complies with ECMA 179, 180 and
CSTA III
Access Protocol:.................................................. ITU X.217/X.227 (ACSE), X.219/X.229
(ROSE)
Network Type:.................................................... IEEE 802.3 Ethernet
Network Topology:............................................ 10Base-T
Network Interface Connector: ......................... RJ-45
Flash Memory:.................................................... 2 MB EPROM
Network Transport Protocol:............................ TCP/IP (BSD 4.3 socket Interface)
Coral Common Control: ................................... MEX-IP, MCP-IPsl, MCP-IPx
F-CLA 686
Application Interface:........................................ Complies with ECMA 179, 180 and
CSTA III
Access Protocol:.................................................. ITU X.217/X.227 (ACSE), X.219/X.229
(ROSE)
Network Type:.................................................... IEEE 802.3 Ethernet
Network Topology:............................................ 10/100Base-T
Network Interface Connector: ......................... RJ-45

Flash Memory:.................................................... 32, 64 MB Compact Flash Disk
Network Transport Protocol:............................ TCP/IP (BSD 4.3 socket Interface)
Coral Common Control: ................................... MEX-IP, MCP-IPsl, MCP-IPx
8-50
HDC Card
8.6
High Density Control

0
General Information
Do not insert or remove the HDC card when power is on. Removing the HDC card from
the system while the power is on will cause the system to crash. Inserting the HDC card
while the power is on will prevent the peripheral cards from initializing properly.
The HDC (High Density Control circuit) card for Coral IPx 800 systems serves as a
Digital tone generators (dial, busy, ringing, ringback, DTMF, MFC, and test)
High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) bus drive circuitry
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) bus drive circuitry
Clock circuitry to synchronize the Coral peripheral clock to an external clock

derived from a digital trunk interface such as the T1, 30T, 30T/x, PRI-23, PRI-30,
4TBR, or 8TBR card.
512 x 512 Timeslot Switch circuitry, as in the 4GC card.
Figure 8-22 on page 8-57 illustrates the HDC card layout.

IPx 800X
2nd expansion cage
IPx 800X
1st expansion cage
IPx 800M
main cage
Peripheral Cards
PX
HDC
MEX-IP
Figure 8-19 Coral

IPx 800, HDC and
Peripheral Cards
HDC Card High Density Control
communication link between the MEX-IP and peripheral cards. It contains:
8-51
The HDC card (in combination with one PX card when two expansion cages IPx 800X
are installed, see Figure 8-19) is functionally similar to the 4GC/32GC card used in
larger capacity Coral systems. The HDC card supports two HDLC and eight PCM
highways (each PCM highway provides 64 timeslot,) and drives the peripheral buses
directly.
Circuit Description
Figure 8-20 illustrates the four major circuit areas of the HDC card in a block diagram.
Figure 8-20 HDC Circuit

Block Diagram
CPU
Digital Tone Generation
Local
Bus
Data
Universal I/O Slots

HDLC
RAM
Card
Software
PROM
U56
Time Slot Management
HDLC
Tx
HDLC
Rx
PCM
Tx
PCM
Rx
512 x 512
PCM
Clock & Sync Generation
Timeslots
0 - 511
Clock (4.096 MHz)

Sync (8 KHz)
Clk Select
External Clock Selector

Primary
Sync
Secondary
Sync
Clock Selection
The external clock selector monitors the two inputs for the presence of an 8.0 kHz
clock signal that can be obtained from the incoming data stream of a digital trunk
card. A primary and secondary clock source may be defined in the system database to
synchronize the PCM clock of the HDC card with the digital trunk. If there is no
external clock source, the HDC card always reverts to an internal clock.
The HDC card contains phase-lock circuitry that synchronizes the Coral PCM clock to
a signal derived from one of two digital trunk interface cards (PRI23, PRI30, 4TBR,
8TBR, 30T, 30T/x or T1), designated the primary and secondary external clock source.
This feature, called slaved clock or loop-timed operation, enables the Coral system
to integrate with any digital telephone network in the world. The HDC monitors
external clock signal integrity and switches the system between the primary and
secondary external clock sources, or internal HDC clock, as necessary.
8-52
Digital Tone Generator

The digital tone generator generates the audio call progress tones (dial, busy, ringback,
etc.) used to notify the caller of the status of the call. The tones are also used during
Keyset (FlexSet, GKT, DKT, DST, EKT, VDK, etc.) ringing (except for mute ring which
is a function of the telephone set itself). DTMF and MFC dialing tones and test tone
patterns used by diagnostics are also generated by the 4GC/32GC. These tones are
stored in digital PCM form, in a programmable PROM. The stored tone patterns are
sent directly to the digital PCM bus when required. See page 8-55, Tone PROM, below
for more information.
Time Slot Management

Each HDLC and PCM bus operates at a fundamental data rate of 4.096 Mbps. This
data rate allows each HDLC bus sufficient bandwidth to simultaneously control up to
64 peripheral bus controller circuits located on the Shared Service and Peripheral
cards.
Every PCM highway consists of a transmit bus and a receive bus, each of which are
divided into 64 time slots. Each timeslot is eight bits wide, sampled every 125
microseconds (mS), or 8,000 times per second. This rate matches both American and
European PCM voice transmission rates to facilitate complete digital integration with
the local telephone network.
The timeslot manager, acting on command by the system processor, is responsible for
forwarding PCM voice samples from an incoming transmit timeslot assigned to one
port to a complementary outgoing receive timeslot for the recipient port. Traffic
handling capacity of the HDC card is maximized through the use of a very
sophisticated algorithm to avoid timeslot usage conflict.
Using Time Slots
64 ports on each of the eight peripheral highways to any other 64 ports, with a
maximum of 512 simultaneously busy ports, using the eight peripheral highways.
The HDCs 512 x 512 Time Switch interfaces with the Coral cabinet using eight Receive
and eight Transmit PCM highways. Each PCM highway carries 64 Time Slots. The total
number of Time Slots for the Coral with the HDC is 512 for Receive and 512 Transmit
PCM highways. The Coral backplane is designed to have two Receive and two
Transmit PCM highways for every four card slots. See Figure 8-21.
Number of Transmit TS - 64 on each of the eight PCM highways, making a total of 512.
Number of Receive TS - 64 on each of the eight PCM highways, making a total of 512.
Maximum 384 simultaneous calls per Coral IPx 800 system.
8-53
Peripheral highway. Therefore, the HDC card is capable of establishing a call between
A call between two ports requires one transmit and one receive timeslot on a single
Clock and Sync Generator

The Clock signal is strobed at 4.096 MHz to identify the bit period of the HDLC and
PCM buses. The Sync signal is strobed at 8.0 KHz, appearing once every 125mS to
identify the start of timeslot 0 on each of the two PCM buses.
Figure 8-21 Coral
IPx 800, PCM Highway
Distribution
Applicable in
IPx 800X
Applicable in
IPx 800X
SLOT 1
SLOT 2
SLOT 3
SLOT 1
SLOT 2
SLOT 3
SLOT 12
PCM highway B1
64 time slots each PCM highway
8-54
Prm.Sync.
Sec.Sync.
10
SLOT 4
11
SLOT 5
12
SLOT 6
SLOT 7
SLOT 8
SLOT 6
SLOT 9
SLOT 7
SLOT 10
SLOT 8
SLOT 11
IPx 500X / 800X

2nd Expansion Cage
SLOT 12
Prm.Sync.
Sec.Sync.
SLOT 4
10
SLOT 5
11
SLOT 9
12
SLOT 11
SLOT 10
SLOT 1
Prm.Sync.
SLOT 2
IPx 500X / 800X

1st Expansion Cage
SLOT 3
SLOT 6
PCM highway A3
Sec.Sync.
SLOT 4
SLOT 7
384 time slots
A3
B3
A2
B2
A1
B1
SLOT 8
Peripheral
service
&
group
controller
SLOT 9
HDC
SLOT 5
IPx 800M
Main Cage
Coral IPx 800
Tone PROM
The HDC card generates the audio call progress tones used to notify the caller of the
status of the call. In addition, tones used during Keyset (FlexSet, GKT, DKT, DST, EKT,
VDK, etc.) ringing (except for mute ring which is a function of the telephone set itself)
dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) dialing tones, multi-frequency (MFC) dialing tones,
and test tone patterns used by diagnostics are also generated by the 4GC/32GC. These
tones are stored in digital PCM form, in a programmable PROM. The stored tone
patterns are output directly to the digital PCM bus when required.
Two methods of encoding audio sounds into a digital, PCM form are in common use:
The A-Law method is in common use throughout Europe, Africa, Asia, South
America, and many countries in other continents.
The -Law (pronounced M-YOO Law, sometimes spelled Mu-Law, or m-Law)

method is in common use in North America. Neither method has any particular
advantage over the other.
The Coral switching system may operate using either encoding method. The database
defaults are set to the -Law (m-Law) method for systems shipped to North America,
and A-Law for all other locations. For instructions on the database programming, see
the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual- Chapter 6 System Features (Tones,
Route: SFE, 8, M_LAW).
To operate a system using the non-default encoding method, the database must be
programmed appropriately, and the tone PROM located on the HDC card must be
changed to PROM containing the system tones stored in the appropriate encoding
method.
The encoding method is important only when the Coral system interfaces with another
switching system through a digital trunk interface card such as a T1, 30T, 30T/x, 4TBR,
8TBR, PRI-23 or PRI-30. In this case, the encoding method of both systems must match,
The integrated circuit socket U45 includes the tone PROM. See Figure 8-22. This PROM
contains DTMF and MFC dialing tones and other system tones such as dial tone,
ringback tone, busy tone, the Keyset ringing tones. The tone PROM present in the
HDC card IC socket varies according to the country of use. The correct tone PROM for
each country of use is supplied by the manufacturer.
so that audio signals encoded by one system can be properly decoded by the other.
8-55
HDC Card Installation

The HDC card is installed in the Coral IPx 800M main cage, in a reserved slot, to the
left of the MEX-IP card.
Do not insert or remove the HDC card when power is on.
1.
Remove power from the Coral IPx 800 system by turning the PS19 power switch
OFF (downwards) in all cages.
Insert the HDC fully into its card slot.
2.
8-56
Figure 8-22 HDC Card

Layout and Front Panel
HDC
Tones, DTMF,
MFC PROM
U50
Timeswitch
PAL
U131 Arbiter
PAL
HDC layout C1
Card
U56 Software
PROM
U45
8-57
NOTES:
8-58
PX Card
8.7
Peripheral eXpansion Buffer Card

0
General Description
The PX (Peripheral eXpansion) buffer card acts as a buffer between first and second
expansion cages of the Coral IPx 800 system. For that reason, the PX is installed in the
first expansion cage only when two expansion cages are installed in the system. The
PX card is installed in slot #1 of the first expansion cage whenever a second expansion
cage is installed.
The PX card buffers PCM streams, HDLC highway, and clock & sync signals to the
second expansion cage. If the second expansion cage malfunctions, the PX card
prevents the malfunction in the second expansion cage from affecting the first
expansion cage, and the system continues to function with the main cage and the first
expansion cage fully operational.
Figure 8-23 displays the block diagram for the PX card. PCM and HDLC signals are
received from the Coral IPx 800M main cage and transmitted via the PX buffer card to
the second expansion cage. The second expansion cage transmits PCM and HDLC
signals to the main cage via the PX card.
PCM A Tx
HDLC A Rx
HDLC A Rx
HDLC A Tx
HDLC A Tx
HDLC B Rx
HDLC B Rx
HDLC B Tx
HDLC B Tx
Sync A
Sync A
Sync B
Sync B
CLOCK A
CLOCK A
CLOCK B
CLOCK B
PCM A Tx
Highway 1
Highway 2
Highway 3
Highway 4
PCM A Rx
To Second
Expansion Cage
To Main Cage
PCM A Rx
Highway 1
Highway 2
Highway 3
Highway 4
PX Card Peripheral eXpansion Buffer Card
Figure 8-23 PX Buffer

Card Block Diagram
8-59
PX Card Installation
1.
Remove power from the second expansion cage of Coral IPx 800 by turning the
PS19 power switch OFF (downwards). Do not insert or remove the PX buffer card
until power has been removed from the second expansion cage.
Do not insert or remove the PX card when power in the second expansion cage is on.
Doing so will result in incomplete initialization of the peripheral cards within the second
expansion cage. Before removing or inserting the PX card remove power from the
second expansion cage.
2.
Insert the PX fully into its card slot.
3.
Reactivate second expansion cage by switching the power toggle switch on the
PX Card Peripheral eXpansion Buffer Card
front panel of the PS19 power supply unit to ON.
8-60
International Headquarters
Tadiran Telecom Ltd.
18 Hasivim Street P.O.Box 7607
Petach Tikva 49170 Israel
Tel. +972-3-9262000, Fax. +972-3-9262310
USA Headquarters
Tadiran Telecom, Inc.
4 Tri Harbor Court
Port Washington, NY 11050
Tel. +1-516-632-7200, Fax. +1-516-632-7210
Visit us at our website http://www.tadirantele.com

Email: coral@tadirantele.com
C o r a l TM I P x 8 0 0
Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual
1st Edition 2005

Coral IPx 800 Installation Manual PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Coral IPx 800 Installation Manual PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Coral

The flexible way to communicate

Copyright by TADIRAN TELECOM LTD., 2005.

Federal Communications Commission

Canadian DOT Compliance Statement

Repairs to certified equipm2.8(1(ent)6.1(

UL Safety of Information Technology

The Coral system may include a CLASS I laser product.

Federal Communications Commission

Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation Procedure

Chapter 3 - Initial Powerup Tests

Chapter 4 - Software Installation Procedure

Chapter 5 - External Connections

Physical Connection............................................................................................................... 5-17

Chapter 6 - Cage Description

Circuit Card Slots ................................................................................................................... 6-45

Chapter 7 - Power Supplies

Chapter 8 - Common Control Cards

Figure 8-17: CLA Card Installation .......................................................................................................................... 8-44

Peripheral Card - to - Connector tables ................................................................................................................... 5-52

8SFT, 16SFT, 24SFT, 8SDT, 16SDT, 24SDT cards ............................................................................................... 5-85

MEX-IP Control Card Functions .............................................................................................................................. 8-10

1.1 Document Description .........................................1-1

1.2 Special Symbols Used in this Document.............1-3

Coral IPx 800 Installation Manual

a systematic installation procedure

a complete hardware reference

Installation Procedure Guide

Hardware Installation Procedure

Initial Power-Up Tests

Software Installation Procedure

The Hardware Reference is described in Chapters 6 through 8. These chapters offer

Power Supply Descriptions

Control Card Descriptions

General description and

Coral IPx and FlexiCom Product Description

All FlexSet types

Coral IPx and FlexiCom Product Description

1) PI - Program Interface and Database

1) PI - Program Interface and Database

Installation and Upgrade

FMprog PC-Utility Reference Manual

Coral FlexAIR (Wireless)

Coral FlexAIR (Wireless Systems) Installation

Coral VoIP Installation Manual

VoIP Gateway (IPG) card Installation Manual

IPx 500X Expansion

Coral IPx 500 Installation Manual

Coral Service and Peripheral Cards

Coral Terminal Equipment Installation Manual

Shared Service cards

Coral Service and Peripheral Cards

Coral IPx 8003000 Installation Manual

Special Symbols Used in this Document

This manual includes information that requires special attention, or is distinguished

There is a risk of danger to life or personal injury.

There is a risk of damage to the Coral System.

Special Symbols Used in this Document

Indicates important information demanding special attention.

Special Symbols Used in this Document

Coral IPx 8003000 Installation Manual